tg-university

In-Resort Fees (CMA Regulations)

Mon, 16 Mar 2026 11:03:33 GMT

Recent CMA regulations within the UK require travel companies to clearly display all charges that a customer could be liable for included in their holidays costs.

Recent CMA regulations within the UK require travel companies to clearly display all charges that a customer could be liable for included in their holidays costs.

We are working with accommodation and package holiday suppliers to be able to clearly split out and identify in-resort fees where possible.

To enable this feature on your results widget, go to "My Widgets" in your Travelify account and find the following widgets which all have the same settings to enable this feature:

"Travel Results"
"Travel Availability Extras"
"Travel Basket"

In the "Styling" > "Resort Fee Price Styles" settings, you can enable this display in your results, change the message and update the style to match your website.

Message settings - if you have an existing widget you are enabling this on, sometimes the text is blank and so you can add the following settings:

In-Resort Fees Label:

We recommend a short title that will be displayed on the result card, for example "In-Resort Fees"

Tooltip Label:

This is a tooltip that will pop over as the customer hovers over the "i" icon. We recommend a message such as:

"Approximately {AMOUNT} in fees is payable in-resort. This means your total holiday cost is {TOTALAMOUNT} This amount is calculated on todays exchange rate and may be subject to change."

It supports two custom tags which will auto-populate based on the amounts:

{AMOUNT} - this displays any in-resort fees, converted to the selling currency based on the exchange rate at that time.

{TOTALAMOUNT} - this displays the total holiday cost (booking element price + the in-resort fees in the field amount above field).

Suppliers Supporting In-Resort Fees

We are constantly working with suppliers to add this feature where supported by them, however not every supplier supports returning this data as a clear fees amounts we can break out to show in this data. It is your responsibility to choose the suppliers you are working with and if this is important to you to display this information, then we recommend reviewing the suppliers you have active to ensure they support this feature.

Please check the Supplier Directory in Travelify to see which suppliers support the in-resort fees. When you go into an accommodation/package holiday supplier, we now display a list of supported features of a supplier - see below example:

If the supplier shows " In-Resort Fees (Must Activate) " then this means you will need to speak to the supplier and have this feature activated on your account.

Travel Last Searches Widget

Mon, 09 Mar 2026 12:00:49 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING: At a glance, search history for your customers

Travel Balance Payment Widget

Mon, 02 Mar 2026 11:36:08 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING: This tutorial guides you through configuring the Travel Balance Payment widget.

In-Resort Fees (CMA Regulations) (Video Training)

Mon, 23 Feb 2026 12:47:14 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING: Recent CMA regulations within the UK require travel companies to clearly display all charges that a customer could be liable for included in their holidays costs.

Email Marketing using RSS Link Builder

Fri, 20 Feb 2026 11:00:53 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - The Travelgenix RSS link builder lets you display live product feeds to your audience on website pages and within marketing emails.

Creating Offer Boxes

Fri, 20 Feb 2026 10:50:32 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - This video will help you to create offer boxes for your website

30 Day Go Live Plan

Thu, 19 Feb 2026 13:00:09 GMT

This 30-day plan is designed to fit into a busy schedule. We aren't rebuilding the internet here; we are just making sure your travel business is seen and heard in all the right places.

Think of this as a "Couch to 5K" for your website. By the end of the month, you’ll have a site that Google recognises and customers trust.

Your 30-Day "Get Seen" Calendar

Week 1: Setting the Foundations (The "Check-In")

Focus: Telling the search engines you are open for business.

Day 1: Set up Google Search Console. Submit your sitemap so Google can start "reading" your pages.
Day 2: Set up Google Analytics 4. Check that it’s tracking your own visits so you know it's working.
Day 3: Claim your Google Business Profile. Fill in every detail—don’t skip the phone number or the bio!
Day 4: Upload 5 high-quality travel photos to your Google Business Profile. These are your "shop window" images.
Day 5: Review: Look at Search Console. Has Google found any errors? If not, great—you’re officially on the map.

Week 2: Solving Problems (The "Scratch the Itch")

Focus: Finding out what travellers want and giving it to them.

Day 8: Go to AnswerThePublic. Search for your top destination (e.g., "Skiing in France"). Pick the 3 most common questions people ask.
Day 9: Write a short, helpful 300-word "Quick Guide" on your site answering one of those questions.
Day 10: Use Canva to create a stunning graphic for that guide. Post it on your social media with a link back to your site.
Day 11: Answer the second question from your list as a new blog post or "Expert Tip" page.
Day 12: Review your Google Business Profile. Has anyone left a review? If so, reply with a friendly "Thank you!"

Week 3: Building Buzz (The "Digital Recommendations")

Focus: Getting the word out and looking like the expert you are.

Day 15: Use Canva to create a "Top 5 Tips" checklist for a specific holiday type you sell.
Day 16: Share that checklist on LinkedIn or Facebook. Ask people to tag a friend who needs a holiday.
Day 17: Reach out to a local partner (maybe a luggage shop or a local cafe) and ask if they’d share your "Top 5 Tips" link on their page.
Day 18: Write your third "Answer" post from your Week 2 research.
Day 19: Check Google Analytics. Which of your three posts got the most clicks? This is your "winner"—write more like this!

Week 4: Refining & Repeating (The "Consistency Loop")

Focus: Checking the data and planning for next month.

Day 22: Go back to Google Search Console. See if any new "search terms" have appeared. Are people finding you for things you didn't expect?
Day 23: Update your Google Business Profile with a "Weekly Update" post about a current travel trend or a new solution you offer.
Day 24: Use Canva to refresh your website’s main banner or "Hero" image. Keep it seasonal!
Day 25: Look at Google Analytics. Identify the page where people "drop off" (leave the site). Read through it—is it too technical? Make it simpler and more engaging.
Day 26: Plan your next 3 "Answer" topics for next month using AnswerThePublic.

The "Golden Rule" for Success

Don't try to do this all in one day. 20 minutes a day is far better for your business than a 10-hour sprint once a month. Google loves consistency; it shows them you are a reliable, active solution provider.

Go Live - Step By Step Guide

Wed, 18 Feb 2026 13:00:15 GMT

Building a successful travel website isn’t a "set and forget" project—it’s more like tending a garden. If you water it regularly, it blooms; if you leave it, the weeds take over.

Here is your step-by-step guide to using those five essential tools to keep your business growing.

1. Google Search Console: Your Direct Line to Google

Purpose: To make sure Google can see your pages and tell you if anything is broken.

Step-by-Step:

Verify Your Site: Go to Search Console and add your website URL. You’ll need to prove you own it by adding a small bit of code to your site (most website builders have a simple box for this).
Submit a Sitemap: This is essentially a "map" of your site that helps Google find every page. Most sites create one automatically at yourwebsite.com/sitemap.xml. Paste that link into the "Sitemaps" section.
Check for "Crawl Errors": Once a month, look at the "Indexing" report. If Google says a page can’t be found, it’s like having a broken link in your shop window. Fix it!

The Result: You'll see which search terms people are using to find you. Timeline: It takes 1–4 weeks for Google to start showing your data.

Ongoing Effort: Check this once a month. As you add new tours or blog posts, check here to ensure Google has "seen" them.

2. Google Analytics 4 (GA4): Your Business X-Ray

Purpose: To see where your visitors come from and what they do before they book.

Step-by-Step:

Set Up a Property: Sign up at Google Analytics. Follow the prompts to create a "Data Stream" for your website.
Install the Tag: Copy the "Measurement ID" (it starts with G-) and paste it into your website builder's analytics settings.
Watch the "Acquisition" Report: Go to Reports > Acquisition > Traffic acquisition. This tells you if people are coming from Google, Facebook, or clicking links in your emails.

The Result: You’ll stop guessing what works. If your Instagram posts aren't bringing visitors, you’ll know. Timeline: Data starts appearing within 24 hours.

Ongoing Effort: Review this weekly. Look for which pages people stay on the longest—that’s the content they find most helpful!

3. Google Business Profile: Your Local Megaphone

Purpose: To show up on Google Maps and in local search results.

Step-by-Step:

Claim Your Business: Go to Google Business and search for your company name. If it’s not there, create it.
Fill Every Box: Add your phone number, website, and opening hours. Crucial: Add high-quality photos of your tours or your happy team.
Verify: Google will usually send a postcard or ask for a quick video to prove you’re real.

The Result: You’ll appear when someone nearby searches for "Travel Agent" or "Tour Operator." Timeline: You can show up within days of verification.

Ongoing Effort: Post an "Update" (like a mini-blog post) once a week and reply to every single review. Active profiles rank higher!

4. Canva: Your Visual Hook

Purpose: To create professional-looking images that stop people from scrolling past your brand.

Step-by-Step:

Pick a Template: Search Canva for "Travel Instagram" or "Travel Brochure."
Customise with Your Photos : Drag and drop your own holiday photos into the template. Use your brand colours so people recognise you.
Download and Share: Use the "Share" button to download high-res versions for your site or social media.

The Result: Your business looks like a global powerhouse, even if you’re a team of one. Timeline: Instant. You’ll have a professional design in 10 minutes.

Ongoing Effort: Use this daily or weekly. Visuals go out of date fast; keep your "shop window" fresh with new, seasonal imagery.

5. AnswerThePublic: Your Content Crystal Ball

Purpose: To find out exactly what questions travellers are asking so you can provide the answers.

Step-by-Step:

Search Your Niche: Go to AnswerThePublic and type in a destination or service, like "Luxury Maldives" or "Walking tours London."
Download the Data: It will show you a "wheel" of questions people ask (e.g., "Is the Maldives expensive in May?").
Write the Solution : Pick one of those questions and write a short, helpful article on your website answering it.

The Result: You become the "expert" that Google loves to recommend. Timeline: Writing an article takes a few hours; seeing it rank on Google takes 3–6 months.

Ongoing Effort: Do this once a month. Search trends change with the seasons (winter sun vs. summer city breaks), so always check what people are curious about now.

The Reality Check

Digital growth is a marathon, not a sprint. You won't see a flood of bookings overnight, but by using these tools consistently, you are building an "asset" that works for you 24/7.

The "Get Found, Get Booked" Guide: How to Turn Your New Website into a Busy Travel Hub

Mon, 16 Feb 2026 13:11:02 GMT

So, you’ve launched your new travel site. It looks fantastic, the imagery is dream-worthy, and you’re ready to send people on the trip of a lifetime. The only problem? It’s a bit quiet.

If your website feels like a luxury resort with no guests, don't worry. It’s a common itch for new sites, and we’re going to scratch it. Here is how we get you off the back streets and onto the high street of the internet.

Why Is Nobody Seeing My Beautiful Site? (The Itch)

The biggest frustration for any travel business is knowing you have the perfect solution for a holidaymaker, but they simply aren't finding you. You're competing with the giants, and Google can sometimes feel like a VIP club where you’re not on the list.

The secret isn't "better tech"—it's being helpful. People don't search for "websites," they search for "where is the best place for a quiet half-term break?" or "how do I plan a trek in Peru?" When you start answering those questions, the traffic starts flowing.

The Visibility Roadmap: Your 3-Step Plan

1. Talk to the Search Engines

Think of Google as a giant filing cabinet. If you haven't told them you exist, they can't file you under "Amazing Travel Expert." You need to "check in" so they know your doors are open.

2. Answer the Questions Travellers Are Asking

Instead of just listing prices, tell stories. Write about the "top 5 hidden beaches" or "how to pack for a safari." When you provide the answers, Google rewards you by putting you in front of the people asking.

3. Get Digital Recommendations

In the travel world, word of mouth is everything. The digital version is getting other reputable websites to mention yours. It’s like a "thumbs up" that tells search engines you’re a trusted expert.

The Traffic Toolkit: How to Drive Visitors

Google's Front Page (Organic Search): This is the long game. By regularly adding fresh, helpful advice to your site, you’ll naturally climb the rankings.
The "Scroll-Stoppers" (Social Media): Don't just post "Book Now." Post a video of a sunset or a tip on how to skip the queues at the Louvre. Give them a reason to click through to your site.
The Local Map: If you have an office or a specific region you cover, appearing on the map is a "quick win" for building trust.

Your Travel Tech Stack: Simple Tools for Big Results

You don't need to be a coder to use these. They are your eyes and ears on the web.

Getting found is about being the most helpful person in the room. If you focus on solving your customers' travel headaches, the search engines will do the rest of the work for you.

Flight Prioritisation Tool - Deposit

Mon, 12 Jan 2026 12:49:49 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - This tool helps Travelify choose a better default flight for flight plus accommodation holidays.

Creating a New Role in Travelify

Fri, 28 Nov 2025 10:24:46 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - This Guide will walk you through the process of creating a new Role in Travelify.

Creating a New User in Travelify

Thu, 27 Nov 2025 10:49:19 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - This Guide walks you through the process of creating a New User in Travelify

Adding Promotion Code in Travelify - Step 1

Wed, 26 Nov 2025 11:00:01 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - Learn how to efficiently add a Promotion Code in Travelify

Adding a Promotion Code in Travelify - Step 2

Tue, 25 Nov 2025 14:53:14 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - Learn how to efficiently complete the process of adding a Voucher Code in Travelify

Order Manager in Travelify

Mon, 24 Nov 2025 14:59:06 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - This Guide will walk you through the process of using the Order Manager in Travelify

Using the CRM in Travelify

Sun, 23 Nov 2025 15:12:42 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - Explore this Guide to efficiently navigate the CRM feature in Travelify

Adding Suppliers from the Supplier Directory

Sat, 22 Nov 2025 15:23:05 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - This Guide will walk you through the process step-by-step to efficiently add Suppliers to your platform.

Standard Pricing Rules (Accommodation) in Travelify

Fri, 21 Nov 2025 15:44:27 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - This Guide will walk you through setting up Standard Pricing Rules for Accommodation in Travelify

Standard Pricing Rules (Flights) in Travelify

Thu, 20 Nov 2025 15:33:06 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - Explore the comprehensive Guide to utilising Pricing Rules in Travelify

Standard Pricing Rules (Dynamic Packaging) in Travelify

Wed, 19 Nov 2025 15:50:32 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - This Guide will walk you through configuring Standard Pricing Rules for Dynamic Packages in Travelify

Standard Deposit Rules - Step 1 Manage Deposit Options

Tue, 18 Nov 2025 16:10:17 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - Explore how to Manage Deposit Options and set up Standard Deposit Rules efficiently in Travelify

Standard Pricing Rules (Packages) in Travelify

Tue, 18 Nov 2025 16:01:51 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - This Guide will walk you through setting up Standard Pricing Rules for Packages in Travelify

Setting up Instalment Payment Options in Deposit Rules - Step 1 Manage Deposit Options

Mon, 17 Nov 2025 16:17:41 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - This Guide will walk you through the steps to set up the option of Instalment Payments via Deposit Rules.

Setting up a Low Deposit Option in Travelify - Step 1 Manage Deposit Options

Sun, 16 Nov 2025 16:27:44 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - In this Guide you will learn how to set up Low Deposit options in Travelify.

Adding a Deposit Rule - Step 2

Sat, 15 Nov 2025 16:33:31 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - This Guide will walk you through the final steps to adding Deposit Rules in Travelify

Deposit Set Up

Fri, 14 Nov 2025 10:26:05 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - We will show you how to make changes as to how the deposit is calculated, either per person or product price.

Advanced (Cascading) Pricing Rules

Thu, 13 Nov 2025 10:01:44 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - Set up rules to enable you to have cascading pricing.

Module 1: Your 24/7 Salesperson

Wed, 12 Nov 2025 12:15:46 GMT

The Foundation

You have a professional Travelgenix website. That puts you miles ahead of the travel entrepreneurs still trying to run a business via WhatsApp and a prayer. But here is the honest truth: A website without marketing is like a billboard in the middle of the desert. It might look fantastic, but if nobody drives passed it, it’s worthless.

Your website isn’t just a brochure; it is your digital HQ. It’s the salesperson that never sleeps, never takes a holiday, and never asks for a pay rise. But it can only do its job if you send people through the door. We aren't here to just "build a site" ; we are here to build a booking engine.

Actionable Steps

The 5-Second Test:

Open your website. Grab a stranger (or a friend who doesn't know your business). Let them look at your homepage for exactly 5 seconds, then close the laptop. Ask them: "What do I sell, and who is it for?" If they can’t answer instantly, rewrite your main headline.

Claim Your Territory:
Set up your Google Business Profile. It’s the fastest way to look legitimate and appear on Google Maps.

The "About" Audit:
Does your 'About Us' page sound like a CV? Boring. Rewrite it to focus on them. Instead of "I have 20 years of experience," try "You get the benefit of my 20 years of insider knowledge."

Free Online Resources

Top Tips from the Big Players

Look at Booking.com : They use Urgency. Notice how they use phrases like "Free Cancellation " or "Great Value" in bold? Review your own site; are you giving people a reason to book now?

Look at Airbnb : They use Trust. The first thing you see isn't just a house; it's the rating. Ensure your testimonials or Trustpilot score is visible on your homepage, above the fold (the part of the screen you see before scrolling).

Google Business Profile: Create your profile here

Hotjar (Free Basic Plan): See exactly where people click on your site. Hotjar.com

Headline Analyzer: Check if your headlines are punchyenough. Coschedule Headline Analyzer

Your Checklist

I have completed the 5-Second Test and refined my headline.

My Google Business Profile is live and verified.

My contact details are easy to find on every page.

Quick Quotes

Wed, 12 Nov 2025 09:51:39 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - Use this Guide to show you how to create personalised Quick Quotes for your customers.

Module 2: The Joy Of Saying "No"

Tue, 11 Nov 2025 15:02:58 GMT

Understanding Your Customer

Here is a scary thought: trying to sell to everyone is the fastest way to sell to no one. If you try to appeal to a budget backpacker and a luxury honeymooner at the same time, you end up confusing both of them.

The most successful travel businesses are specialists, not generalists. When you know exactly who you are talking to, your marketing becomes easy. You stop guessing what to write and start answering their specific problems. This is about finding your "Avatar" - the dream client who pays on time, values your advice, and tells their friends.

Actionable Steps

Create Your Avatar:

Don’t just list demographics (e.g., "Women aged 40-50" ). Give them a name. Let’s call her "Luxury Linda." What car does she drive? What worries keep her up at night? (e.g., "The hotel won't look like the photos" ). Write all your content for Linda.

The "You" Count: Go to your homepage. Count how many times you say "We" or "I" versus how many times you say "You." If you talk about yourself more than you talk about them, flip the script.

Free Online Resources

Top Tips from the Big Players

Look at Mr & Mrs Smith : They know their audience is style-conscious and affluent. Their language is curated, whispered and exclusive.

Look at Hostelworld : They know their audience wants fun and social vibes. Their language is energetic, casual and focuses on "meeting people."

The Lesson: Pick a lane and stay in it. Don't be afraid to alienate the people who aren't your customer.

HubSpot Make My Persona: A fun, free tool to build a visual profile of your ideal client. HubSpot Persona Tool

AnswerThePublic: Find out what questions your specific niche is asking. AnswerThePublic.com

Your Checklist

I have written down a profile of my "Ideal Avatar."

I have audited my website text to ensure I use "You" more than "I."

I have identified 3 major problems my ideal client faces that I can solve.

Enquiry Viewer in Travelify

Tue, 11 Nov 2025 09:39:58 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - This tool enables you to see the search exactly as the customer has selected on your website, so will help with any customer queries.

Module 3: Getting Found While You Sleep

Mon, 10 Nov 2025 15:20:59 GMT

SEO Simplified

SEO (Search Engine Optimisation) sounds like scary technical magic. It isn’t. It’s simply answering the questions people are whispering into their phones.

If you want to rank for "Holidays to Spain," good luck you are fighting TUI and Jet2. You won't win that fight. But if you want to rank for "Best boutique hotels in Seville for couples," you can absolutely win. This module is about working smarter, not harder, to get found by people who are ready to book.

Actionable Steps

The Long-Tail Hunt:

Stop targeting broad words. Write a list of 10 specific phrases your Avatar might search for. Think: [Adjective] + [Destination] + for + [Who]. Example: Quiet family villas in Corfu with a pool.

Google Search Console: Connect your Travelgenix site to Google Search Console. It tells Google you exist. Without this, you’re winking in the dark.

Rename Your Images: Google can't "see" pictures. If you upload a photo called "IMG_5501.jpg" , Google ignores it. Rename it to "luxury-safari-lodge-kenya.jpg" before you upload.

Free Online Resources

Top Tips from the Big Players

Look at TripAdvisor : They dominate search because they create pages for everything. "Best Italian Restaurants in [Town Name]." You can do the same. Create a blog post called "The Top 5 Hidden Gems in [Destination You Sell]."

Look at Hayes & Jarvis : Look at their destination pages. They don’t just list hotels; they have sections on "Best time to visit," "Weather," and "Things to do." Google loves this helpful content.

Ubersuggest (Free Version): Type in a keyword and see how difficult it is to rank for. Ubersuggest

Google Trends: See what destinations are trending right now. Google Trends

Your Checklist

My site is submitted to Google Search Console.

I have written a list of 10 "Long-Tail" keywords I want to target.

I have checked my homepage title tag to ensure it includes my main service (e.g., "Bespoke Italian Travel Specialist" rather than just "Home").

Creating Custom Offers in Travelify (Step 1)

Mon, 10 Nov 2025 09:31:31 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - Using Custom Offers you can create multiple offer pages for your customers to see on your website.

Module 4: Documentation, Not Creation

Sun, 09 Nov 2025 15:51:21 GMT

Social Media

Most travel agents burn out on social media because they think they need to be an "influencer." You don’t. You just need to be present.

The goal isn't to go viral; it's to build trust. When a client finds your website, they will check your Instagram or Facebook to see if you are still in business and if you are a real human. If your last post was from 2019, they won’t call you. We are going to switch your mindset from "creating art" to "documenting your expertise."

Actionable Steps

Pick ONE Platform:

Do not try to do Facebook, Instagram, TikTok, and LinkedIn all at once. Pick the one where your "Avatar" hangs out. Master that first..

The 3-Bucket Rule: Categorise your posts so you never run out of ideas:

Educate: Travel tips, visa advice, packing hacks.
Inspire: Stunning photos of destinations.
Trust: Reviews, photos of you working, client success stories.

Use Luna: If you on the Travelgenix Ignite package, use the Luna marketing tool. It's built to schedule this stuff for you so you can get back to booking holidays.

Free Online Resources

Top Tips from the Big Players

Look at Intrepid Travel : They don't just post polished ads; they post User Generated Content (photos their travellers took). It feels authentic. Ask your clients to tag you in their holiday pics and repost them!

Look at Kuoni : They use "Stories" effectively to do Q&As. "Ask us anything about the Maldives." It positions them as the experts.

Canva: The easiest way to make professional-looking posts. Canva.com

Unsplash: Free high-quality stock photos if you don't have your own yet. Unsplash.com

Your Checklist

I have chosen my primary social media platform.

My bio is updated with a link to my website.

I have planned my next 3 posts using the "3-Bucket Rule."

Application Settings - General

Sun, 09 Nov 2025 11:30:27 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - Make changes to your company details

Creating Deeplinks in Travelify

Sun, 09 Nov 2025 09:28:15 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - When you do a search on your website it creates a URL that has a time limit, using the Deeplink Builder you can create a permalink that will not expire.

Application Settings - Location

Sat, 08 Nov 2025 11:59:29 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - Add or amend your address details

Module 5: Renting vs. Owning

Sat, 08 Nov 2025 10:16:49 GMT

The Power Of Email Marketing

Social media is great, but here is the cold hard truth: Mark Zuckerberg owns your Facebook followers. If the algorithm changes tomorrow, you disappear. But your email list? You own that.

Email marketing isn't about spamming people with "Book Now!" buttons every day. It’s about having a quiet, direct conversation in their living room. It is statistically the highest ROI (Return on Investment) tool in the travel industry. If you aren't building a list, you are leaving money on the table.

Actionable Steps

The "Welcome" Automator:

Don't let new sign-ups sit in silence. Set up an automated "Welcome Email" that goes out immediately. It should deliver value instantly (e.g., "Thanks for joining! Here are my top 3 packing tips for 2025" ).

The Curiosity Gap:

Stop writing subject lines like "July Newsletter." Boring. nobody opens that. Write subject lines that open a "curiosity gap" in the brain. Example: "The one mistake people make in Italy..." or "Why I don't sell this hotel anymore..."

The "Text-Only" Rule:

You don't need fancy HTML designs. A plain text email that looks like it came from a friend often performs better than a glossy corporate flyer. It feels personal.

Free Online Resources

Top Tips from the Big Players

Look at Secret Escapes : They are masters of Exclusivity . Their emails feel like a whispered secret. "This price is only available for 72 hours." Use deadlines to make people act.

Look at Jack's Flight Club : They use Storytelling . They don't just paste a flight price; they tell you why it's a deal and how to book it. It builds huge trust.

MailerLite / Mailchimp: Both have excellent free tiers for starters. MailerLite.com

SubjectLine.com: Type in your subject line and it gives you a score out of 100 based on deliverability and psychology. SubjectLine.com

Your Checklist

I have a sign-up form clearly visible on my website footer or pop-up.

I have written and activated my automated "Welcome" email.

I have sent one broadcast email to my existing database this week.

Creating a Custom Location List in Travelify

Sat, 08 Nov 2025 09:20:10 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - The Custom Location List tool will enable you to create a curated list of search locations.

Application Settings - Booking & Support Contacts

Fri, 07 Nov 2025 12:32:43 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - View, add and amend contact details

Module 6: The "FAQ" Method

Fri, 07 Nov 2025 10:41:28 GMT

Content Is Currency

"Content" is a scary word. It makes you think you need to be a journalist or a YouTuber. You don't. In the travel business, Content = Helpfulness.

If a client asks you a question, 100 other people are searching for that answer on Google right now. Your job is simply to answer them. Good content builds authority. When you give away your knowledge for free, people trust you with their credit cards.

Actionable Steps

The "Answer The Public" Hack:

Write down the last 3 questions a client asked you (e.g., "Do I need a visa for Vietnam?" , "Is Dubai safe for solo women?" , "When is the best time to see the Northern Lights?" ). Boom. Those are your next three blog posts.

Repurpose Like A Pro:

Don't reinvent the wheel.

Write one blog post answering a question.
Copy a snippet of it for a Facebook post.
Summarise it for your Email Newsletter.

One piece of work, three pieces of content.

Visuals Matter:

Use your Travelgenix site to showcase high-res images. People buy holidays with their eyes first.

Free Online Resources

Top Tips from the Big Players

Look at Lonely Planet : Their guides are broken down into Digestible Chunks . "Top 5 Places to Eat," "Getting Around," etc. Use headings in your blogs so people can skim-read.

Look at The Points Guy : He goes Deep . He doesn't just say "The seat is nice." He measures the legroom. Detailed reviews of specific hotels or airlines show you are a true expert.

Grammarly (Free Version): Stops you from making embarrassing typos. Grammarly.com

Hemingway App: Paste your text in here. It tells you if your sentences are too long and complicated. Keep it simple. HemmingwayApp.com

Your Checklist

I have written down a list of 5 FAQs my clients always ask.

I have published one blog post answering one of those questions.

I have shared that blog post on my social media.

Adding Top Searchbox Locations in Travelify

Fri, 07 Nov 2025 09:11:07 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - Use this Guide to show you how to add top searchbox locations to enhance your website

Dynamic Content: Display and Navigation Options for Collection Records

Thu, 06 Nov 2025 14:45:20 GMT

Dynamic Content: Display and Navigation Options for Collection Records

There are various display and navigation options available for showcasing collection records. Whether you're using dynamic pages to generate multiple pages from a collection or simply displaying records, these options help make your content accessible to site visitors.

Dynamic Content: Dynamic Pages can be added to the site’s navigation or displayed with Collection Display Widgets to ensure they are easy to find.

If individual pages aren't necessary, collection records can still be displayed in a more streamlined way, without the need for dynamic pages.

Site Navigation and Dynamic Records

Note

Each parent navigation page may only contain information from one dynamic page. That is, multiple dynamic pages may not be linked to a single parent navigation page. Additionally, you may have up to 150 page items. However, it is not recommended you reach this limit.
If a navigation item contains a dynamic page and a regular page, the dynamic page items will always be displayed last, regardless of the order of the actions.

Tip

A dynamic page record can be added to navigation widgets using the Custom links option in the navigation widget. Note that only one record can be added per custom link.

Add Dynamic Page Records to the Site Navigation

To add the dynamic page to the navigation:

In the side panel, click Pages .
Click Hide/Show in Navigation , and then select Show on all .
In the Add to Navigation popup:
Select a parent navigation page from the Add page items as subpages drop down.
Select the field to display from the Select Field to display in navigation drop down.
Click Save Details .

Hide or Edit Record Availability (in the Site Navigation)

To adjust the availability of records in the site navigation:

In the side panel, click Pages .
Click the Settings icon next to the desired dynamic page.
Click Hide/Show in Navigation .
Select where you would like to hide it from the navigation or click Set nav details to edit the details.

Collection Display Widgets

Collection Display Widgets are elements that list and display the records of a collection. They can be used to allow visitors to navigate to the records of a dynamic page or simply to showcase a collection's data. These widgets also offer options to filter and sort the records. Additionally, when added to a dynamic page, they provide a dynamic filtering option for greater flexibility.

List (Note that when using connected data in the List widget, buttons are not available and the links appear as text links instead).
Photo Gallery
Media Slider
Tabs
Accordion
Table (display only, direct linking is not available)

Manage Connection to a Collection Display Widget

Connect to a Collection Display Widget

To connect a collection to a Collection Display Widget:

Add a Collection Display Widget to the page of your site on which you want it to exist. For more information, see Add Widgets.
Right-click on the widget to open the settings menu, and click Connect to Data .
Select the desired collection from the Connect to drop down menu. Select the desired collection from the Connect to drop down menu. If you are connecting to a table widget, complete the following:
After connecting to a collection, select the required fields from the Fields to display drop down. The columns will be ordered in the same order they were selected.
click Done .
After connecting successfully to the data, your Table widget will be marked with a blue Connected Data icon.
For all other widgets, map the fields in the collection to the elements in the widget you want to display.
(Optional) If you have created a dynamic page for the collection you have connected and would like to connect the widget to it, under Connect Link , select the dynamic page from the drop down list (this is what creates the link between the widget and your Dynamic Pages).
Click Done .

Disconnect Data

To disconnect a widget:

Right-click the widget, and click Change connection .
In the menu, select None .

For widgets that have content editing menus, if you are already in the widget content editor, you can hover on the blue icon in the top-right corner and click Disconnect .

Disconnecting a widget reverts the text and its style to the previously used style.

Filter & Sort

When connecting widgets to a collection, you can filter and sort the collection to display only what you want. This feature allows you to control the number of rows the widget displays, filter according to specific text fields, and sort the list in ascending or descending order.

To add filters and sort :

If the desired Collection Display Widget is not already placed on the site, add it to the page where you want it to exist. For more information, see Add Widgets.
Right-click on the widget to open the settings menu, and click Connect to Data .
If the widget already exists: right-click on the widget, hover over Connected Data , and select Change Connection .
Select the collection from the Connect to drop-down menu. (Skip this step if the widget already exists.)
Click on the Filter & Sort tab. You will have the following options:
Display. Select the number of items you want to display (for example, All, or 2).
+ Add sort.

Note

For numbers to be sorted correctly, the field must be numeric.

Fixed Filters. The fixed filter will display the records from the connected connection with the exact term entered.

Note

Filtering works according to exact values, and you may filter according to multiple values per field.

Dynamic Filters (only available when widget is on a dynamic page.) The dynamic filter links fields from two separate collections: one from the collection associated with the current dynamic page and another from the collection connected to the widget, displaying records with matching values dynamically. For detailed information, see the section Dynamic Filt ers .

 Tip

If you are having difficulty filtering and sorting correctly, check if the field is rich text. It is possible there is formatting on the text, even if you cannot see it. It is recommended you convert the field to plain text.

Dynamic Filters

The dynamic filter links fields from two separate collections: one from the collection associated with the current dynamic page and another from the collection connected to the widget, displaying records with matching values dynamically. This allows you to display only the content that is relevant to a page item.

Set up and use Dynamic filters

Step 1: Create and/or Configure the Collections

Create and configure 2 collections:

A primary collection. This is the collection that will contain the bulk of the information and includes a column for categories. An example would be a collection for a list of stores in a mall. In this example, the categories column would contain the store's categories. In step 9 this collection is referenced as Collection A.
A collection for the categories. This collection should have a column for the categories and each category from the primary collection should have a row/record. In step 9 this collection is referenced as Collection B.

Any type of collection can be used (Internal, Airtable, Google Sheets, and External Collections).

If you would like to use internal collections, to create them:

In the side panel, click Content .
Click Collections .
Click +Create Collection .

Step 2: Create and/or Configure the Dynamic Pages

In the side panel, click Pages .
Click +Add Page .
Create a Dynamic Page from each collection you created in step 2 (one for the primary collection and one for the category collection).
Note
If a dynamic page is already configured and connected to the primary collection, only 1 additional dynamic page will need to be created OR the data in the primary collection will just be displayed.
Navigate to the category's Dynamic Page and in the side panel, click Widgets , then drag and drop a Collection Display Widget onto the page.

Note

The available widgets are:

List
Photo Gallery
Media Slider
Tabs
Accordion
Table (display only, direct linking to the primary collection's dynamic page is not available)

Right-click on the Collection Display Widget that was just added to open the settings menu, and click Connect to Data . Connect it to Primary Collection. Before closing the Connected Data popup, open the Filter & Sort tab and in the Dynamic Filter section click +Add Filter .
Map between the category name field in the data collection (Collection A) and the category name field in the categories collection (Collection B).

Step 3: Make the Category's Page Accessible

Navigate to a regular page of your choice and in the side panel, click Widgets , then drag and drop the Gallery widget onto the page.
Right-click the Gallery widget to open the settings menu, and click Connect to Data . Connect it to the categories collection you created in step 2. Map the link field to its Dynamic Page.

Editor Overview

Thu, 06 Nov 2025 14:23:11 GMT

Editor Overview

This article covers the areas of the editor and how to add and configure sections, rows, columns, inner rows, and widget alignment.

Editor Interface Overview

The editor can be divided into several areas.

In the editor there are several predefined sections: the top navigation bar, the side panel, the central content area (often referred to as the editor canvas), and the design panel on the side. These sections are the basis for constructing websites according to the user’s vision.

Top Navigation Bar

The top navigation bar contains helpful shortcuts for different site actions.

The top navigation bar allows you to:

Page Navigation: Click on the pages menu to access a dropdown menu displaying all available pages on your site. You can navigate between pages by selecting them from this menu.
Switch between different screen size views (also called breakpoints) by clicking on the device icons. This allows you to preview how your current page appears on various screen sizes, from desktop to tablet to mobile. To learn more, see Screen Sizes and Devices .
Feedback Tab: Available for Editor 2.0 only. Click on the comment and sparkle icon to provide feedback about the editor. Share suggestions, ask questions, report bugs, or provide other comments.
Search Functionality: Click on the magnifying glass icon to search for anything you need within the editor or access the help center for assistance.
Info and Tools: Click on the information icon to access the following information:
Site Info. Displays the site name, published status, editor version, and a link to the site dashboard.
Preview Link. Displays the preview link for the site. To copy the link, select the device type and click Copy .
Stats. Displays basic stats for the site. To see more information, click Open Stats . This information is only available for published sites.
Editor Language. Switch the editor language. This does not affect the language of the site. To switch the editor language, select a language from the drop-down menu.
Save Progress Indicator: The checkmark icon serves as an indicator of your current site progress and whether changes have been successfully saved.
Undo or Redo: You can use the undo and redo functionalities represented by the back and forward circle arrows to revert or reapply recent actions performed in the editor.
Developer Mode: Enter developer mode by clicking on the appropriate icon. This mode allows you to access and modify your site's HTML and CSS code.
Preview Changes: Click on the eye icon to preview your site, including unpublished changes, on all or individual device screen sizes.
Publish or Republish: Use the publish or republish button to publish your site with the latest changes.
Home Button: Click on the home icon to return to your site dashboard.

Side Panel

The side panel serves as a comprehensive toolkit for managing various aspects of your site's design and functionality. You can make broad, sweeping changes to your site's design and functionality. These tabs allow you to customize your site's appearance, add new features and widgets, configure page settings, manage content, sell products online, publish blog posts, install apps, and optimize your site for search engines.

If you are in Classic Editor using flex mode or in Editor 2.0, you will have access to the Layers panel. The Layers panel provides a hierarchical view of your site page’s elements, allowing you to easily navigate and manage complex structures. Here, you can quickly identify the arrangement of widgets, columns, and sections, simplifying the process of locating and adjusting specific elements. From the Layers panel, you can perform various actions such as adding new elements, selecting elements, rearranging elements, renaming elements, and toggling element visibility on specific breakpoints.

Following are the options available in the side panel:

Layers (only available in flex mode and Editor 2.0)
Theme
Pages
Widgets
Media (Only available in Editor 2.0)
Content
Personalize
Sell Online
Membership
Blog
SEO & Settings
Unhide Elements (only visible if you have hidden elements; only applicable for classic editor, in editor 2.0 and flex mode, hidden elements can be found in the Layers screen)

Content Area / Canvas

The Content Area / Canvas is where you can move or add any of our features, or click and edit to change them. The content area allows you to change images, text, edit and delete buttons, and more.

Design Panel

Note

This content is relevant for both Flex mode in Classic Editor and Editor 2.0. To identify your current editor version, see How to Identify the Editor Version Your Site Uses .

The design panel offers a range of design settings for selected elements, enabling precise customization. Whether you are tweaking layout content alignment, spacing between elements, animation, and background, the design panel provides a comprehensive set of tools to enhance your website's visual appeal. Design options include layout adjustments, sizing configurations, alignment settings, and more, tailored to the selected element.

Website Builder Structure

The Website Builder is built from a header, footer, rows, sections, and columns. Every widget you add is inserted into one of these sections.

Note

If you are using flex mode in Classic Editor or Editor 2.0, rows are named "sections".

Rows

Rows are the horizontal sections of your site. When you add widgets and columns to your site, they are placed within these rows. To change how content is displayed in the mobile view, click the reverse column order toggle in the row editor.

You can add rows to your site by dragging widgets into the site. When you drag a widget between rows or into a space where want to add a row, a new row will be created when you drop the widget.

To delete a row, right-click anywhere on the row to open the context menu, and then click Delete . Alternatively, click the Row button at the top left corner of the row and click Delete .

Note

If you are using flex mode in Classic Editor or Editor 2.0, rows are named "sections".

Row Editor

Note

This information is specific to the Classic Editor, and not relevant for Editor 2.0 (formerly known as the All-Flex Editor.) To identify your current editor version, see How to Identify the Editor Version Your Site Uses .

Use the Row editor to change the row's background (color or image), add a border, or adjust the inner and outer spacing of the row. Use rows to organize and arrange the content in your site.

To configure rows, hover over the top left of a row until a row button appears, and click Row . The Row editor menu appears.

You have the following configuration options:

Click the Move row up and Move row down arrows to move the current row up or down.
Click +Add and select one of the following:
Row above. Add a new row above the current row.
Row below. Add a new row below the current row.
Section. Add a section to the existing row.
Column. Add a column to the existing row.
Inner row. Add a row within the current row.
To clear the inner spacing inside the row, click Clear Padding .
To revert the spacing to what you defined in theme spacing, click Reset To default spacing .
To add an entrance animation to the row (for example, fade from right, bounce in, zoom in), click Entrance Animation , and select an option.
To save the row as a section, click Save as Section and select to save only the current row, multiple rows, or the full page.
To hide the current row on a specific device (desktop, tablet, mobile), click Hide On Device , and select the device.
To lock the row for client editing, click Lock for client editing .
To copy the row, click Copy .
To anchor the row to the page or delete an existing anchor, click Set As Anchor or Edit Anchor .
To delete the row, click Delete .

Row Design Editor

Note

To edit the background style or spacing of the row :

Hover over the top left of a row until a row button appears, click Row , and then click Edit Design .
On the Settings tab, you have the following options:
Full bleed row. To change the row into a full bleed row, which allows content to span the entire width of the screen, click the Full bleed row toggle. If you choose not to have full bleed rows, the content width is limited to 960px.
On the Style tab, select a use a Background Color, Image, or Video. You have the following options:
Color
Select a Background color . Gradient color overrides image, and vice versa.
Click Border to select a border type, and move the slider to set the border width.
To add a shadow, click the Shadow toggle, and select a color, type, and position for the shadow.
Image
To add an image to the background, click + to open the image picker.
To create a background image slider, select multiple images from the image picker, and see Background Image Slider .
Select to have the image display as a Cover , Full image , Tile , or No repeat .
To enable parallax scrolling on a background image, click the Parallax scrolling toggle. When this is enabled, background content scrolls more slowly than foreground content.

Note

Parallax scrolling is not an option for the Background Image Slider or in mobile.
The option to keep a background image static is not available for tablet and mobile due to an iOS limitation.

Configure the Position , Background overlay , Border , and Shadow for the image.
Video . Click Select Video to view uploaded videos or paste the URL of the YouTube, Vimeo or Dailymotion video in the field provided. For more information about video backgrounds, see Element Backg rounds .

Note

For more information on backgrounds, see Element Backgrounds .

Columns

Note

Every row contains at least one column. Columns contain all the widgets in your site and control their arrangement. Whenever you add a new column, it appears alongside the existing column in that row.

While desktop and tablet views allow each row to hold up to four columns, mobile websites can only show at most two columns in a row. Columns added in desktop or tablet views will assume the full width of the page when switched to mobile view; to create a row with two columns in the mobile view, first switch to mobile view, then add a two-column widget.

To delete a column, right-click anywhere on the column to open the context menu, and then click Delete . Alternatively, click the red X at the top right corner of the column.

You can place widget directly into columns, or structure the column further by adding inner rows.

Column Editor

Note

Use the Column editor to change a column's background (color or image), add a border, or adjust the inner and outer spacing of the column. Use columns to organize and arrange the content in a row.

To configure a column:

Right click on the column. The column editor menu appears.

Note

If there is no padding on the column, the right click will not be directly accessible. To access the column in this case, right click on a widget that is in the column (this should bring up the context menu for the widget and will note the name of it at the top), click Select Container , select Column . To verify it has changed to the column's context menu, refer to the top; it should now say Column .

Click the Move column left and Move column right arrows to move the current column left or right (the arrows will be disabled if there is only one column).
To open the Column design editor, click Edit Design . The Column design editor appears.
Click +Add and select one of the following:
Column. Add a new column to the current row (a max of 4 columns can be added per row on desktop and 2 on mobile).
Inner row. Add a row within the current column.
Widget below. Add a widget.
To clear the inner spacing inside the column, click Clear Padding .
To revert the spacing to what you defined in theme spacing, click Reset To default spacing .
To add an entrance animation to the column (for example, fade from right, bounce in, zoom in), click Entrance Animation , and select an option.
To hide the current column on a specific device (desktop, tablet, mobile), click Hide On Device , and select the device.
To lock the column for client editing, click Lock for client editing .
To copy the column, click Copy .
To anchor the column to the page or delete an existing anchor, click Set As Anchor or Edit Anchor .
To delete the column, click Delete .

Column Design Editor

Note

To edit the background style or spacing of a column:

Right click on the column, then click Edit Design .

Note

On the Style tab, select a use a Background Color , Image , or Video . You have the following options:
Color
Select a Background color . Gradient color overrides image, and vice versa.
Click Border to select a border type, and move the slider to set the border width.
To add a shadow, click the Shadow toggle, and select a color, type, and position for the shadow.
Image
To add an image to the background, click + to open the image picker.
To create a background image slider, select multiple images from the image picker, and see Background Image Slider .
Select to have the image display as a Cover , Full image , Tile , or No repeat .
Configure the Position , Background overlay , Border , and Shadow for the image.
Video. Click Select Video to view uploaded videos or paste the URL of the YouTube, Vimeo or Dailymotion video in the field provided. For more information about video backgrounds, see Element Backgrounds .

Note

For more information on backgrounds, see Element Backgrounds .

Background Image Slider

Background Image Sliders can be used to set background images for rows or columns.

After selecting multiple images in the image picker, click Done . Once the slider is created, select a Slide transition from the drop-down menu, and move the slider to select a Slide speed (seconds).

Any of the other background image options such as Background Overlay, Positioning, and display style can be applied to the slider.

Inner Rows

Note

Inner rows allow extra design flexibility by enabling you to add rows inside columns. With the help of inner rows, you can vary the column layout and keep the general design of the row (for example, background, spacing, bleed).

Just like regular rows, inner rows can have their own background and spacing, be split into up to four columns, and have their column order changed on mobile. Columns in inner rows can be populated by any widget, but inner rows cannot be added to such columns.

To add an inner row to a column, do one of the following:

Right-click the row, and click Add Inner Row . If there are multiple columns in the row, choose to which column you want to add the inner rows.
Right-click the column, and click Add Inner Row .
Right-click the inner row, and click Add Row to place an inner row below the current one.

Inner Row Example

To give an example of how to use inner row, let’s look at two ways a layout that contains a title and 3 buttons can be designed:

Example 1: Add two rows. Place the Title in Row 1 with 1 Column. Split Row 2 into 3 columns. Place a button into each column. Note that two separate rows cannot share the same background image and you need to set spacing and bleed style separately for each row.

Example 2: Add a row. By default, each row contains a column. Add 2 inner rows to the column. Place the Title into inner row 1. Split inner row 2 into 3 columns. Place a button in each column. These two inner rows will share the main row background, spacing and bleed.

Some important considerations when it comes to editing inner rows:

You can only use the order switching arrows to switch the order between inner rows. To switch the order of widgets and inner rows, you need to manually drag and drop the widgets above or below the inner row.
2 columns, 3 columns, 4 columns widgets cannot be placed in inner rows. To add a column, right-click the row and click Add Column .
Unlike regular row, inner rows cannot be copy-pasted.

Designed Sections (Pre-Designed Section Templates)

Sections are pre-built rows of elements which users can add to their responsive sites. Sections enable users to build great looking sites quickly by saving time during the design process. The infrastructure was built in order to provide a better user experience with a variety of pre-made sections.

Note

Sections do not use any custom CSS, and are all build within the editor by designers.
Sections do not use the text color or text font settings from the site theme settings. However, you can always clear the format and apply your design.
Sections cannot be used in the header. To switch the full header section, open the header editor. For more information, see Headers .

Add Sections

To add sections of widgets:

Hover between rows, and click Add Section .
Select Designed . Sections display in the side panel.
In Section Mode, a gallery of pre-made sections is available in the left panel, grouped into categories (Intro, Features, About, Team, Testimonials, and so on).
In the side panel, click a section to display it as a new row. You can then browse sections within the same group by using the arrows keys or by selecting a section from a different group.
To embed the section into the site, click Save . Alternatively, click Save & Add Another to continue adding sections to your site. The section converts into a row and all elements in the section are editable.

Widget Alignment

When aligning widgets within the same column, the website builder attempts to Snap to Align them to be the exact same size. As you resize, the builder jumps ahead or behind to snap to location. This should make it easier to make widgets the exact same size.

There is also a Snap to Grid feature. The Snap to Grid feature helps lay widgets in the pages of your site with professional precision. This system allows you to align widgets horizontally and vertically within columns and rows. Rulers are presented when moving an element in its row or column, or when resizing the widget. The aligned elements are marked with a colored border. A widget may be aligned with more than one other widget, depending on the specific use case.

Alignment is supported in the views of the three different devices (desktop, tablet, mobile).

Header and Footer

For more information on configuring headers and footers, see:

Application Settings - Regional Settings

Thu, 06 Nov 2025 13:04:16 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - Make changes to your currency and nationality options

Module 7: Social Proof Is Your Currency

Thu, 06 Nov 2025 12:56:50 GMT

Reviews, Trust & Conversions

Here is the reality: Travellers trust strangers on the internet more than they trust you. A 5-star review from "Dave from Birmingham" carries more weight than your best sales pitch.

The best travel businesses don't just get reviews; they weaponise them. They splash them on their homepage, their emails, and their social headers. Your goal is to move a potential client from "cautious" to "confident" by showing them that others have gone before them and had a blast.

Actionable Steps

The "While You're There" Text:

Don't wait until two weeks after they get home. Send a quick WhatsApp while they are on the holiday (towards the end): "Hope you're having an amazing time! If you have 30 seconds, could you drop me a quick star rating here?" Strike while the iron is hot.

The Google Shortcut:

Don't make them hunt for the link. Go to your Google Business Profile, get the direct "Review Link," and save it on your phone. Text it directly to them.

Reply to EVERYTHING: Good review? Say thanks. Bad review? Reply professionally and offer to fix it. Silence looks arrogant; replying looks like you care.

Free Online Resources

Top Tips from the Big Players

Look at Amazon : They are the kings of reviews. Notice how "Verified Purchase" carries weight? When you post a review, add context: "Booked a Family Trip to Orlando, Oct 2024." It proves it's real.

Look at TripAdvisor : They highlight Keywords . If a review mentions "Great for kids," highlight that! It speaks to your specific Avatar (from Module 2).

Bit.ly: Shorten your long, ugly Google Review link into something neat like bit.ly/ReviewTravelgenix. Bitly.com

Canva: Create a simple graphic template where you can copy-paste a client quote and post it to Instagram. Canva.com

Your Checklist

I have saved my direct Google Review link to my phone notes.

I have added a "Testimonials" section to my website homepage.

I have asked 3 recent clients for a review this week.

Editor Versions

Thu, 06 Nov 2025 11:50:53 GMT

Editor Versions

Website Builder supports two editor versions to best suit your needs:

Editor 2.0
Classic Editor with optional flex mode

Each version of the editor is explained in the following sections along with the limitations and future developments of Editor 2.0.

Editor 2.0

Third Party Store is not supported in Editor 2.0.

Editor 2.0 integrates advanced functionalities while retaining the intuitive interface of the Classic Editor. However, it introduces an enhanced infrastructure, augmenting your editing experience with improved capabilities and efficiency:

Modern Editing Capabilities : Utilizes flex and grid technologies to enhance the editing process and improve the end result.
Easily adjust alignment or spacing of multiple elements at the same time (control in one click or slider).
Easily adjust column configurations with precision, vertically and horizontally.
Have up to 8 columns in a section.
Set an uneven number of columns to be the same size.
Seamlessly nest and overlap elements for dynamic designs using inner columns and advanced grids.
Responsive Design : Ensures full responsiveness across all screen sizes, reducing the need for manual customization while retaining the option.
Screen-Size-Specific Editing: Edit across desktop, tablet, and mobile devices, with customization options tailored to each screen size.
Edit per screen size rather than by device means, for example, if you view a site on mobile, the site will recognize the size of the screen and display the elements that you set to display on that screen size.
Edit per screen size allows for continuity across screen sizes, minimizing customization per device. With fewer breakpoints, Editor 2.0 streamlines style management, ensuring smoother cascading of styles and simplifying codebase complexity. Additionally, desktop and tablet screen sizes exhibit greater independence compared to the Classic Editor.
Consistent Header Design: Maintains header characteristics across screen sizes, such as the logo, facilitating seamless updates. You can update the header on the desktop and it will update on all devices.
Widget Accessibility: Supports all widgets from the Classic Editor.
Flex Section Management: Introduces a new flex section management system centralizing flex section reuse in Editor 2.0, including flex sections created in the Classic Editor, to further streamline website creation.
UI and Editing enhancements:
Design Panel Location: Resides on the right side of the interface in Editor 2.0, providing a cleaner editing environment. Users also have the option to close the panel when not in use.
Layer Panel Control: Manage the layer panel easily by closing and reopening it as needed to facilitate smoother navigation within the site structure.
Floating Bar Navigation: Enables seamlessly backtrack using breadcrumbs by introducing a floating navigation bar.
Duplicate Option: Enables the convenience of duplicating elements in Editor 2.0 by introducing a duplicate option.
Inline Image Resizing: Resize images directly within the editor interface, eliminating the need for external editing tools.
Improved Alignment and Spacing Controls: Enhanced vertical and horizontal alignment and spacing controls, including a spacing slider, streamlines the layout adjustment process. These improvements eliminate the need for additional rows and columns in the Classic Editor.
eCommerce Store Compatibility: Supports the native store, but does not support the third party store.

Editor 2.0: Future Developments and Current Limitations

Editor 2.0 is a dynamic and evolving feature set, incorporating continuous improvements to enhance the user experience. While the platform is continuously evolving, various features are under consideration or in development. Currently in the phase of evaluation and planning:

Third Party Store
Mobile editing
Global Rows (located in the Theme in the Classic Editor).
New Row Personalization action type.

Classic Editor

The Classic Editor has been a trusted tool known for its simplicity and efficiency in website creation. You can create beautiful websites just using the Classic Editor or you can also enhance your design experience by using flex mode in the Classic Editor.

Easy and Quick Site Creation: The Classic Editor offers a user-friendly interface, allowing users to create websites swiftly.
Device-Specific Editing: Edit across desktop, tablet, and mobile devices, with customization options tailored to each device.
Edit per device rather than by screen size means for example if you view a site on mobile, you are seeing the mobile version of the site.
While you can edit per device, desktop and tablet are closely connected which has its benefits for simpler layouts. However, this can also increase the time spent on the site if you are creating a more advanced layout because customization per device is available and sometimes required for all devices in order to achieve the desired design.
Flexibility with Flex Sections: Incorporate pre-designed Flex Sections and Team Sections to enhance layout flexibility.
Customizable Header : Customize headers per device, with the exception of tablets mirroring desktop layouts. Note that flex sections are not supported in the header.
eCommerce Store Compatibility : Supports the Native Store and the Third Party Store.

Flex Sections and Flex Mode Labels

The following explains the different flex section and mode labels and how they relate to the different editor versions:

Flex Sections: These are similar to rows in the Classic Editor, it also represents the primary editing mode within Editor 2.0. Flex was how we called flex sections or flex mode outside of Editor 2.0.
Flex Mode: Relevant to Flex Sections in the Classic Editor, it is not applicable in the Editor 2.0.
Flex: Relevant to Flex Sections, it is applicable to both the Editor 2.0 and the Classic Editor.
All-Flex Editor (now known as Editor 2.0): Previously referred to the editor before its transformation into the updated version known as Editor 2.0.

Transition Guidelines and Compatibility Between Editors

For customers concerned about the gradual transition from All-Flex to Editor 2.0 and its impact on the Classic Editor, here are some important notes:

Continued Support for Classic Editor: Sites built with the Classic Editor remain fully supported, with ongoing editing capabilities.
Migration between editor versions : If you do a complete site reset you can switch between editor versions.

How to Identify the Editor Version Your Site Uses

Thu, 06 Nov 2025 11:25:02 GMT

How to Identify the Editor Version Your Site Uses

To easily identify the editor version the site uses, there are labels inside the editor and on the Site Dashboard.

Inside the Editor

To locate the editor version of the site within the editor, you have two options:

Option 1: Navigate to the top navigation bar and find the device/screen options.

Editor 2.0 sites feature a computer icon with a crown above it.

Classic Editor sites feature a computer icon without a crown above it.

Option 2: Navigate to the top navigation bar and click the Info & Tools tab. Within the Site Info section, locate the Editor Version label.

Editor 2.0 sites are labeled Editor 2.0 , while Classic are labeled Classic .

On the Dashboard

To locate the editor version of the site on the dashboard, you have three options:

Option 1: Open your site list and check the version label.

Editor 2.0 sites are labeled Editor 2.0, while Classic Editor sites have no label.

Option 2 : Identify the editor version label in the Site Dashboard. Locate the site in the list, click the Site Dashboard icon. Or, click the three dots icon next to the site and select Site Dashboard from the menu.

Editor 2.0 sites are labeled Editor 2.0, and Classic Editor sites have no label.

Option 3 : For client-assigned sites, identify the editor version label in the Client Management section. Navigate to the top navigation bar, click the Clients & Team tab, and then click Client Management . In the client list, select the desired client, then click Sites and Permissions in the side panel. The editor version label will be next to the assigned site.

Editor 2.0 sites are labeled Editor 2.0.

Classic Editor sites do not have a label.

Blog

Thu, 06 Nov 2025 10:57:42 GMT

Blog

The Blog feature lets you create, maintain, and publish articles on your site. It provides tools to edit your individual post and blog designs, letting you provide a reliable stream of personalized content to attract visitors and create interest in your site.

Note

Starting January 20, 2025, all old blogs that have not been updated yet will be automatically updated.

Installation and Blog Page Overview

While some templates come with a blog, others will require a blog to be installed.

To install a blog:

In the side panel, click Blog .
Click Add Blog .
(Optional) Design the blog's main page (this page is added automatically upon installation of the blog):
In the side panel, click Pages .
Select the Blog page.
Design the page as desired while keeping the included All Posts widget.

When a blog is installed - either during site creation with a template that includes a blog or added later - a main blog page is automatically created and can be found in the Pages area of the side panel. By default, the page will include the All Posts widget.

The blog page is a standard page with all the options of a regular page. What makes it a blog page is simply that it includes the All Posts widget.

Warning

Because the blog page that is automatically added is a regular page, it can be deleted.
If the page is deleted and there is not an All Posts (or Recent Posts) widget on the site, it will not be possible to navigate to the posts from the site.
To restore a deleted main blog page, simply add a page, place the All Posts widget on it and design it as desired.

Blog Permissions

Permissions for the blog work the same as on other pages.

Blog Set Up

Use the blog editor to set up a new blog and add posts. Two editing modes work together seamlessly so you can design the perfect blog for your business and update it easily with new posts that look great, have the content you want, and are optimized for SEO. The two editing modes are Layout mode and Post mode .

Layout Mode

Layout mode is where you create and edit your various blog post layouts. In this mode, you arrange elements, such as blog title, author, main image, content placeholder, rows, columns, and more. Changes made to a layout are automatically applied to all past and future blog posts that use that specific layout.

To view available blog post layouts, click Blog in the side panel, then click Post Layouts and click Browse Post Layouts .

Note

Changing the position of the content placeholder can be achieved by adding rows, columns, or sections around the content placeholder. Or, you can adjust the padding of the content placeholder.

Change Position of Content Placeholder

You can change the position by changing padding settings or by adding columns and rows.

Note

You cannot delete, hide on device, or copy and paste the placeholder or the column/row that contains it.

To change the position of the content placeholder by changing padding settings:

In the side panel, click Blog .
Click Edit Layout to open Layout Mode.
Right-click the post placeholder to open the menu.
Select the container: row, column, main row, main column.
The Design Editor menu will open automatically.
Change the spacing settings to set the placeholder on the page.

To change the position of the content placeholder by adding columns and rows:

In the side panel, click Blog .
Click Edit Layout to open Layout Mode.
Right-click on the row that contains the placeholder to open the context menu.
Choose Add Column or Row : add adjacent, above or below.
Click Done .

Post Mode

Post mode is where you go to write individual blog posts. You have complete freedom over the content of each post (contained within the content placeholder section that is visible in Layout mode), and can add any widgets that you want. Editing a post is just like editing a page in the editor. All of the changes you make to an individual post in Post mode affect only that post.

When you are in Post mode, add any elements that you want to a specific post. For example, if you are working on a post that has multiple images, you can add several Image widgets. If a specific post requires a map, add a Map widget here.

To use Post mode for a specific blog post, in the side panel, click Blog , and then click Manage Posts . Click a blog in the list, or click the Edit icon to open the blog in Post mode. For changes in Post Mode to be visible online, you must republish the post.

Connect Elements

Connecting elements are what give your blog power and ease of use. These elements ensure that every blog automatically contains important details including title, author and image, and that these details appear consistently in every post.

You’ll be asked to enter the main post details as soon as you create a new post. You can change this information later, but adding it from the start keeps your posts organized. By default, post title, author and background image are connected. You can remove these connections or change them in Layout Mode, but we recommend keeping them to ensure your posts have all the information they need for SEO and to be found easily by users.

If you disconnect an element, you can reconnect it or connect it to a new element.

Changing Connected Elements in Post Mode

Change the content of connected elements in one of the following ways:

Via the Settings Menu: Click to open the post details and then edit.
Click the connected element (for example, post author) and edit the text in the popup that opens.

Changing Connected Elements in Layout Mode

You can replace connected elements, or remove them altogether, in Layout Mode. To replace the connected element, click on the blue Connected Data icon to open the Connect Data popup. From here, choose the connected element you want to use for this connection and then click Done .

To remove the connection altogether, click none. This will remove this connection for all posts in the blog, and the element will no longer appear.

All Posts (and Recent Posts) Widget

The All Posts widget (All Posts and Recent Posts; although these are listed separately in the widget library, once added to a page, they are both considered the All Posts widget) are the tools for displaying and accessing blog posts. These widgets allow visitors to navigate to posts.

Note

By default, an All Posts widget is included in the main blog page.

Customize the All Posts Widget

Content Editor

In the Content Editor , you can control what post information to show. You can also manage and add new posts from here.

To access the content editor, right click the widget and select Edit Content . Or, if you are in flex mode or Editor 2.0, the option to access the content editor is available in the floating menu. Click the element to open the floating menu, then click the option for the content editor.

The following settings are available in the content editor:

Filter by tag. You can select multiple tags. This setting will be added once there are tags (if there are not tags, this option will not be available).
Read more text. Type the text you want to appear or click the eye icon to hide the text.
Show more button. Type the text you want to appear or click the eye icon to hide the text.
Show blog name. Can enable or disable this option.
Show author and date. Can enable or disable this option.
Show thumbnail images. Can enable or disable this option.
Single line title. Can enable or disable this option.

Widget Design

To access the design editor, right-click the element, and click Edit Design . Or if you are in flex mode or Editor 2.0, select Edit Design from the floating menu to open the design panel. Click the element to open the floating menu, then click the option to edit design.

In the Design Editor you can control image size, background color, text style, number of posts to show, hover effects, and more.

You can also select the number of visible teaser lines. Teasers are short post summaries, taken from the first paragraph of the blog or the blog settings.

If there are more posts than displayed, the More Posts button appears. You can customize the button text, background, and position. You can also hide it.

Search Posts Widget

The Search Posts widget allows visitors to search for specific posts or themes in your blog so that they can easily find articles that interest them.

The widget only searches for words in blog post titles, it does not search the content of posts.

Content Editor

In the Content Editor, the Placeholder text for the search bar can be customized.

Create Blog Post

To create new blog posts:

In the side panel, click Blog .
Click New Post .
Type a Post title for the blog, and select the Post author .
Use the Post Layout dropdown menu to select a layout.
To add a main image, click +Image and select or upload an image.
Click Start .

For better SEO, schema markup is automatically generated for every newly published post.

Edit Blog Post

To edit existing blog posts:

In the side panel, click Blog .
Click Manage Posts .
Next to the post you want to edit, click the Edit icon.

To edit the post settings associated with a blog post, click the Post Settings icon. Post settings include post status, post details, and post metadata including tags.

Delete and Unpublish Blog Posts

Blog posts can be deleted or unpublished individually or in bulk.

To delete or unpublish a blog post:

In the side panel, click Blog .
Click Manage Posts .
Use the checkbox to select the desired post(s).
Click either Delete or Unpublish .

Blog Post Settings

For individual blog posts you can manage the post status, post details, post SEO settings, set a post to no-index.

Post Status

The post status is listed at the top of the section, and you can configure the post URL, and publish date for the post. Post status includes:

Post URL (Permalink). Type to change the post URL, or click Copy to copy the URL to the clipboard. The post must be published copy the URL.
Change publish date. Changing the publish date changes the order of posts in the blog.

Click Unpublish or Republish , as needed. On unpublished posts, click Publish , or click Schedule post to select a date and time for the post to be published.

Post Details

Add main post details to be connected to the layout and inherit the layout design. Post details include:

Post title. Type a short title for the blog post.
Post author. Select an author from the list. If an author does not appear in the list, search for the author to select them. Only users who have been granted blog access to the site are eligible blog authors.
Post main image. Click +Image to select or upload a main image for the post. If you need to replace an existing image, click Replace .
Post tags. Enter tags so you and visitors can filter the posts you’re looking for.
Post layout. Use the dropdown menu to select a layout for the blog post.

Post SEO Settings

Metadata improves SEO and enables search engines to understand the content of the post. Metadata displays in the All Posts and Recent Posts widgets and appears when posts are shared.

Tags are grouped into categories, so you can filter posts based on tags in the All Posts widget. You can add the All Posts widget onto multiple pages and sort the posts by their tags in the Content editor.

Post metadata includes:

Post meta-title. Type a meta-title. The ideal length is 512px, which is about 65-67 characters. We do not recommend a meta-title less than 45 characters. If you do not complete this field, the meta-title will default to your post title.
Post Thumbnail. Click +Image to select or upload an image. Alternatively, include alt text for the image which enables search engines to recognize the image content. You can type your own alt text. Repeat for each individual blog post thumbnail.
Post Description. Type a short summary of the post. If empty, text is taken from the beginning of the post.
Tags. Categorize your blog posts by adding tags to your posts. To add tags, type a tag in the field provided, and type Enter .

Set Post to No index

Toggle the no-index setting on if you would like the post to not appear in search results. Once enabled and the post is republished search engines will not be able to crawl the post.

Blog Settings

Change the thumbnail, name, title, description, and backups for your blog. You can also find your blog's RSS feed URL here. Adding a blog name, title, description and URL are important because they help with your blog SEO. The more keywords used in the name, title, and description, the more relevance your blog will have on search engines. For example, using the term "food blog" in your blog name, title, description and URL helps search engines find your blog when users search for the term "food blog."

In the side panel, click Blog , and then click Blog Settings . You have the following options:

Blog name. This name displays on the sites as the title of the All Posts widget.
Show Next/Previous post navigation links. Set the text and appearance of posts' navigation links or toggle the setting off to hide these links (these are the links at the bottom of posts to navigate to the next or previous post). The changes made here apply to all posts. By default, the style uses the site theme. Once changes are made manually here to the style, it will disconnect it from the site theme and is unable to be reconnected.The underline for the link is connected to the Theme Text in the site's Theme and is unable to be removed or added here. To remove or add the underline, adjust it in the Theme Text. The post these links are linked to is determined by the post's publish date and is unable to be changed.
Next post link. Update the verbiage or style of this link.
Previous post link. Update the verbiage or style of this link.
RSS Feed Details. This information appears in RSS feeds.
Blog Title. Type a title for the blog.
Blog Description. Describe what your blog is about so visitors know what to expect.
Blog Thumbnail. Click +Image to select or upload a thumbnail for the blog.
RSS feed URL. The RSS feed URL is auto-generated when your site is published.
When accessing the RSS feed URL, you can use the Save function in your browser to download the XML as an .rss file. This allows you to export your blog.

Blog Backup

Blog content is backed up when your site is backed up. If you restore a backup, the blog will be the one in the restored version of the site. Note that you will not see the restored version until the restored site is published. Until then, the run time and editor will look different, as with any site backup. For more information, see Backup Sites .

A post on a non-published restored version of a blog is not live until the restored site is published (unlike with regular posts, which do not require the site to be published again for the post to go live).

As always, a new backup version is automatically created when restoring a backup version.

Blog Stats

As part of our stats module, we track blog posts page views. To see blog stats, from the dashboard, click Stats , and then click Content Data .

Import Blog Posts from RSS Feeds

Import blog posts from an RSS feed. All Blog posts are imported, however, only supported elements are included in each blog post. This includes: Text (H1/H2/H3, paragraph), images, videos (Youtube or Vimeo), HTML elements, dividers and Disqus comments, and post author and post date. After the import, the imported posts are in draft mode until published by the site owner.

Note

If you are importing blog posts from RSS feeds in Editor 2.0, there are a few constraints if the posts you are migrating were created with the old text editor:

Text will not receive theme styles. However, you can add the theme styles and they will apply.
Some text formatting might be lost when you open the post for editing, but the text formatting can be re-added.

Due to performance issues the maximum number of posts you can import via RSS feed is 300 and the total posts limit is 1500 . If your blog contains more you should limit the RSS accordingly. A backup of your site is automatically created prior to the import process. If you restore a backup to a version prior to the RSS import the posts will be removed.

Note

If the old blog is deleted, images imported from the old blog are removed.

To import blog posts from an RSS feed:

In the side panel, click Blog .
Click Import Posts .
Type a valid RSS feed URL in the field provided, and click Import posts .
When the import is done, you will be notified (you will also be notified if it fails. If it does fail, the entire process fails, not just the problematic post. The failure message will have information about what failed).
(Optional) Review the imported posts.
Publish all the imported posts.

Requirements for Valid RSS Feeds

Following are the requirements for valid RSS feeds:

The RSS feed URL must be in a valid URL format.
There cannot be non-supported characters in the posts URL, which includes EN characters, numbers and supported special characters (only ASCII characters ).
There are several ways to present the content of your blog post. To ensure a valid RSS feed, you must include the full content and not just a summary.
There are no more than 300 posts in your RSS.

We recommend validating your RSS feed prior to importing. You can use W3C Feed Validator to do so.

If the RSS feed does not import into the blog, there may be issues with the RSS link that you are using or issues with the format of the RSS feed. If the import does not work, check the following:

Ensure you are using the correct URL for the import. The RSS link is NOT the link to the blog page. This should be a link to the blog RSS feed. Most WordPress feed links are in the following format: www.example.com/blog/feed
Sometimes the problem with import is that there is no access to the next page. For example, (https://xda-developers.com/feed) shows us the 10 last posts, but if you go to the second page of the feed (https://xda-developers.com/feed?paged=2), it shows the same posts on the second page. This means that the feed is not pulling posts correctly and it is not possible to import all posts.

Creating an RSS feed varies by platform, following are platform specific links:

Updating an Old Blog to the New Blog Platform

Starting January 20, 2025, all old blogs that have not been updated yet will be automatically updated.

On March 17, 2019 Website Builder released a new blog editor. Any blogs that were created before this date will have the old blog editor. You are eligible to update to the new blog platform if your site has less than 800 blog posts.

The update is irreversible, so before updating consider the following :

Blog posts automatically take on the theme settings for text, images, background page, and so on.
All post titles are heading level 3s, and left aligned.
There may be minor spacing differences in the posts, so make sure to review each post before republishing.
The date format will match the default site language. For example, if the default site language is English, the format is MM-DD-YYYY.
The word "By" no longer appears before the author name.
The number of comments is not visible at the top of each post.

To update to the new platform:

In the side panel, click Blog .
In the Blog panel, click Update Blog . This might take a few minutes. A success message will display when the migration is complete.
After updating, review the posts to ensure everything is correct.
Republish the site.
(Optional) If you use blogs in your Team Templates, we recommend updating those templates to the new blog platform as well.

Blog Troubleshooting

I have the blog tool installed, but the page the blog lives on is missing or was accidentally deleted. How do I get it back?

The main blog page is just a regular page. To restore it, follow these steps:

Add a new page to your site as you normally would. For more information on adding pages, see Add Pages .
Insert the All Posts widget onto the new page.
Customize and design the page to your liking.

This will recreate your main blog page with all your posts.

Using Accommodation Override in Travelify

Thu, 06 Nov 2025 08:58:04 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - Access the Accommodation Overrides feature to manage property settings

Module 8: The Corporate Concierge

Wed, 05 Nov 2025 13:38:56 GMT

Winning On LinkedIn

If you want to sell cheap holidays, go to TikTok. If you want to sell high-margin, complex itineraries to people with disposable income, go to LinkedIn.

LinkedIn isn't just a CV site for people looking for jobs. It is a room full of busy professionals who have money but no time. That is where you come in. You aren't just a "Travel Agent" ; you are a "Concierge" who gives them their time back.

Actionable Steps

The Headline Fix:

Stop saying "Owner at [Business Name]." Nobody cares. Change your headline to the outcome.

Bad: "Travel Agent."
Good: "Helping busy CEOs plan stress-free luxury escapes."

The Connection Strategy:

Don't sell in the first message. Connect with local business owners and send a note: "Hi [Name], I'm a local travel specialist in [Town]. Just expanding my network of local business owners. Cheers!"

Post "Business" Travel Content: Write about "How to switch off on holiday," or "Best hotels with fast Wi-Fi in London." meaningful content for professionals.

Free Online Resources

Top Tips from the Big Players

Look at American Express Global Business Travel: They post thought leadership. They talk about "The future of travel" and "Wellness." Position yourself as an industry thinker, not just a booker.

Look at individual 'Solopreneurs' : The most successful consultants on LinkedIn post personal stories about solving problems. "Saved a client £2k on a flight today by knowing this one trick..."

LinkedIn Mobile App: Use the "Voice Note" feature in messages. Sending a 20-second personal voice message to a new connection stands out massively compared to a text bot.

Canva LinkedIn Banner: Your profile banner is free ad space. Make sure it says what you do and has your contact info.
Canva.com

Your Checklist

I have updated my LinkedIn headline to focus on the result I deliver.

I have updated my banner image to look professional.

I have sent 5 connection requests to local business owners this week.

Adding a Widget to your Website

Wed, 05 Nov 2025 09:48:18 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - Learn how to add a widget to your website.

Module 9: Speed To Lead

Tue, 04 Nov 2025 12:19:54 GMT

Converting Enquiries Into Cash

Here is a brutal statistic: The first person to speak to a lead usually gets the booking.

If you receive an enquiry and wait 24 hours to reply, that potential client has already moved on to a competitor or booked it themselves on Booking.com . Your Travelgenix website is built to generate enquiries, but your job is to catch them while they are hot.

This module is about removing friction. It’s about moving from "Thanks for your email" to "Here is your booking confirmation" as fast and smoothly as possible.

Actionable Steps

The 15-Minute Rule:

Aim to acknowledge every enquiry within 15 minutes during working hours. Even a quick template text: "Got your enquiry! I’m looking into options and will call you at 2pm" stops them from shopping around.

The "Good, Better, Best" Proposal:

When sending a quote, never send just one option (they have nothing to compare it to) and never send ten (they get overwhelmed). Send three:

Good: Fits the brief perfectly.
Better: Slight upgrade, better view/room.
Best: The "wildcard" luxury option. You will be amazed how often they pick the middle or top option.

The Assumptive Close: Stop asking, "Let me know what you think." Start asking, "Shall we get this locked in before the flights jump in price?" Assume they want to book.

Free Online Resources

Top Tips from the Big Players

Look at Amazon : They invented "One-Click Ordering." Ask yourself: Is it easy to pay me? If they have to print, sign, scan, and bank transfer, you are losing sales. Use the Travelgenix payment links.

Look at Trailfinders : They are obsessed with the Phone. They know that email is for information, but the phone is for conversion. Pick it up!

Calendly (Free Basic Plan): Stop playing email tennis ( "Are you free at 2?" "No, how about 4?" ). Send a Calendly link and let them book a slot in your diary. Calendly.com

Loom: Record a 2-minute video walking them through the proposal. "Hi Sarah, I chose this hotel because..." It builds massive trust. Loom.com

Your Checklist

I have updated my LinkedIn headline to focus on the result I deliver.

I have set up a digital calendar link (like Calendly)

I have audited my payment process to make it as simple as possible.

Agent Booking Flow

Tue, 04 Nov 2025 11:14:13 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - Here you can view the Agent Booking Flow

Module 10: Buying Back Your Time

Mon, 03 Nov 2025 14:47:38 GMT

Marketing On Autopilot

The biggest trap in the travel industry? You get busy with bookings, so you stop marketing. Then the bookings dry up, and you panic-market. It’s a stressful "feast and famine" cycle.

You need to break that cycle. Consistency is the secret sauce. Your brand needs to be visible even when you are swamped with admin or sipping a cocktail on your own holiday. This is where we stop working in the business and let the tech work for the business.

Actionable Steps

The "Evergreen" Content Pool:

Create a folder of 10-20 posts that are not time-sensitive (e.g., "Why use a travel agent," "Top 5 Honeymoon spots" ). If you have a busy week, drag and drop one of these.

The Sunday Night Review:

Spend 15 minutes on Sunday evening checking your schedule for the week. Knowing your posts are sorted gives you a clearer head for Monday morning.

Use Luna:

If you are a Travelgenix user, Luna is your marketing assistant. It can schedule posts and prompt reviews automatically. It costs less than a fancy coffee a week but does the job of a marketing intern.

Free Online Resources

Top Tips from the Big Players

Look at Coca-Cola: Everyone knows who they are, yet they never stop advertising. Why? Because Recency matters. You need to be the first brand they think of when they are finally ready to buy.

Look at Starbucks: Their app creates a habit. They make it easier to buy from them than anyone else. Your "app" is your consistent email/social presence.

Trello: A great free tool to visually plan your content calendar. Drag and drop ideas into "To Do," "Doing," and "Done." Trello.com

Meta Business Suite: The native (free) tool from Facebook/Instagram to schedule posts in advance.

Your Checklist

I have updated my LinkedIn headline to focus on the result I deliver.

I have scheduled my marketing for the upcoming week.

I have explored Luna (or another scheduler) to automate the grunt work.

Email Settings (Overview)

Mon, 03 Nov 2025 10:38:06 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - Within this series of Guides we will show you how to change and configure the emails that are automatically sent from your business.

Module 11: Fire Your Worst Clients

Sun, 02 Nov 2025 15:10:39 GMT

The 80/20 Rule

The Pareto Principle (80/20 Rule) states that 80% of your results come from 20% of your actions.

In travel, this usually means:

80% of your profit comes from 20% of your clients.
80% of your stress comes from 20% of your clients (the cheap, demanding ones).

To grow, you don’t need more clients. You need better clients. This module is about ruthless efficiency. It is about identifying what actually makes you money and ditching the rest.

Actionable Steps

The Client Audit:

Look at your last 10 bookings. Highlight the ones that were profitable and easy. Highlight the ones that were a nightmare. What do the "nightmare" ones have in common? (e.g., Budget under £1k? Last minute?). Stop taking those bookings.

The "Stop Doing" List:

We all have "To Do" lists. Make a "Stop Doing" list. Stop designing fancy graphics if they don't bring leads. Stop arguing with people on Facebook. Focus on the money-making activities.

Double Down:

Identify the ONE marketing channel that brought you the most leads last month. Spend 80% of your energy there next month. Ignore the others.

Free Online Resources

Top Tips from the Big Players

Look at Apple: Steve Jobs famously returned to Apple and slashed 70% of their product line to focus on just a few perfect products. Focus = Quality.

Look at Netflix: They ruthlessly cancel shows that don't perform, even if a few people like them. They invest only in what grows the subscriber base. Be like Netflix with your marketing efforts.

Toggl Track: A free timer to track where your time actually goes. You will be shocked how much time you spend on non-billable work. Toggl.com

Google Sheets: Use a simple spreadsheet to list your clients and grade them A (Dream), B (Okay), or C (Nightmare).

Your Checklist

I have updated my LinkedIn headline to focus on the result I deliver.

I have written my "Stop Doing" list.

I have committed to saying "No" to enquiry types that cause me stress.

Email Settings - B2B

Sun, 02 Nov 2025 10:43:34 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - This Guide will walk you through the steps to making changes to your B2B emails.

Site Comments

Sat, 01 Nov 2025 16:26:44 GMT

Site Comments

Site Comments is a collaboration tool that enables your team to communicate with clients and each other while building sites. The entire review process is faster, clearer and more accurate, giving your clients better service, faster go-live, and allowing more time to scale your business. It also eliminates the need for alternative methods of communication (such as email, messages, phone calls, etc.) and creates a single channel for receiving feedback and responding to it.

Following are common use cases for Site Comments:

Internal communication between team members only (these comments can be marked as Internal - visible to team only so clients do not see them)
Collecting feedback from clients as they review the site
Making notes while building the site
During the QA process
Creating a record of comments and responses

Open Site Comments in Classic Editor

In Classic Editor, the comments bar is always on the right side of the screen. Click any of the options to expand it. Click the X to close the comments bar.

Open Site Comments in Editor 2.0

In Editor 2.0, the comments bar is in the same spot as the design panel. To open site comments, you need to click the Comments icon in the top navigation bar or you can open the comments bar by clicking the three dots icon and selecting Add comment in the floating menu for any element. Click the X to close the comments bar.

Add a Comment

To add a comment:

If you are in Classic Editor, click the plus + icon on the comments bar.
If you are in Editor 2.0: Click the Comments icon in the top navigation, then click anywhere on the canvas. Or, click the desired element to open the floating menu. Click the three dot icon and select Add comment .
Click on an element to add a comment. Hover on the element to help position the comment accurately.
Choose whether you want the comment to be internal or visible to clients and your team. Comments always retain the same visibility settings, meaning if a comment starts as Internal it will remain Internal and if a comment starts visible to the client it will stay visible to clients. To make an internal comment visible to clients, add a new comment and set it to public.
Enter your comment in the input field. You can also add an image as a comment by clicking on image icon in the bottom right corner of the comment field.
Click Submit .

Reply to a Comment

To reply to site comments:

Open the comment you want to reply to. You can reply to comments via the comment itself or in the comments log. To open the comments log, click the Comments icon in the top bar.
Click the comment text field, or click Reply in the comments log, and enter your reply.
Click Submit .

Edit or Delete Comments

Comments can be edited or deleted by the person who creates them or by a team member. Deleted comments cannot be restored and are not displayed in the comments log. There is no undo for edited comments.

To edit or delete a comment:

Open the comment you want to edit or delete.
Hover over the comment, and click the more icon.
Click Edit or Delete .

Resolve Comment

To resolve a comment and leave a record of it in the comments log click Resolve in the upper-right corner of the comment.

Comments Log

To see a list of all comments and display and reopen resolved comments, use the filter in the comments log. To open the comments log, click the Comment icon in the top navigation.

Hide Comments

To hide comments on a site, click the Hide Comments icon.

Design with Flex

Sat, 01 Nov 2025 16:10:53 GMT

Design with Flex

Flex is a mode for designing pixel perfect, responsive sections with additional design capabilities. If you are using the Classic Editor, you can enter flex mode to design. If you are using Editor 2.0, you use flex by default.

Flex Design Panel

The design panel displays on the right side of flex mode and contains your design properties for the selected element (section, column, widget, Inner Column, or advanced grid). Each element has different properties that can be adjusted in the design panel, meaning the design properties are different depending on which element is selected. The design properties include alignment, layout, spacing, sizing, and more, depending on the selected element.

To open the design panel, click an element while in flex mode, then click Design . The design panel opens on the right side of flex mode so that it does not interfere with your ability to view and edit your design. Or, you can click the Edit design icon in the floating menu. After closing the design panel, you can open it again by clicking the Edit design icon in the top right corner.

Design Panel Sections

The design panel is comprised of 5 sections: Align, Layout, Spacing, Size, and Animation and Background. Following is a description of each section and what you can accomplish.

Align

Available for single elements inside a column or Inner Column. Single elements inside a column or vertical Inner Column with vertical auto layout can be aligned left, center, right, or stretched horizontally to fit 100% of its container width.

Elements can also be aligned from the floating menu by clicking the Align icon.

Layout

Full Width

Previously named "full bleed", full width is available only for sections and can only be changed from the desktop main breakpoint. When toggled to On, it allows the content to span the entire width of the screen. When toggled to Off, the content width can span a maximum of 1920 pixels. By default, the full width setting is toggled to Off. To learn more about breakpoints, see Screen Sizes and Devices .

Align Elements

Allows you to vertically align multiple elements in a column or Inner Column at once. In the classic editor, elements can only be aligned individually and horizontally. Vertical alignment is helpful because it keeps the position of the elements consistent between all breakpoints without making additional adjustments.

Auto Layout

Allows you to select whether elements inside columns and Inner Columns are automatically aligned horizontally or vertically. By default, elements are vertically aligned. Elements can only be moved in the same direction as the auto layout alignment. For example, if elements are aligned vertically, you can only move the elements vertically and not horizontally. The auto layout helps ensure your design is optimized to match any breakpoint.

Wrap

Available for columns and Inner Columns only when Stack Horizontally is selected for auto layout. When set to Wrap, it allows elements inside the column or Inner Column to keep their dimensions and wrap as the screen width changes.

Align Rows

Available for columns and Inner Columns only when Wrap is selected for auto layout. Allows you to set the alignment of rows within a column or Inner Column. This setting does not affect the alignment of elements inside rows, just the rows themselves.

Spacing

Space Between Items

Allows you to set the space in between columns or widgets once and it applies to all columns in a section or all widgets in a column. For columns, if the auto layout property is set to vertical, the space between widgets is measured in pixels. If the auto layout is horizontal, the space between widgets is measured in percentages. This property is not applicable for elements inside Inner Columns or advanced grids.

Set Margins and Padding

Margins are the space between the element's border and the edge of the section, column, Inner Column, or advanced grid it is contained within. By default, the horizontal margin and padding values are linked. If you adjust the left value, the right side value will automatically update to match. If you do not want the values linked, click the link icon.

Note that inline margins for elements inside columns or inner columns can be adjusted directly on the canvas.

Padding is the inner space of the element. Click the margin or padding number to type a new value, then use the drop down menu to select the unit the space is measured in (px, %, vh, or vw). By default, horizontal spacing is measured in percentages, and vertical spacing is measured in pixels.

For example, if you select a column and set the left padding to 5 px, it will add 5 px of space between the left edge of the column and the outer edge of the elements inside the column. If, for that same column, you set the left margin to 5 px, it will add 5 px of space between the edge of the column and the edge of the section that contains it.

Reset Padding or Margin

When clicked in the design panel or floating menu, it resets the padding or margins for the selected element to zero.

Size

Depending on the selected element, you can adjust the height and width, and the maximum and minimum values. In flex mode, height can be measured in px, vh, percentage, and A. However, the height of flex columns and space between columns can only be measured in percentage.

The default size units are different for each element. For example, by default text boxes are 100% width buttons are 280px width.

For sections, you can only change the height. Section width is set by the device, while the width of the content in the section is set by the Content Width setting in Site Theme. For columns, you can only change the width height is defined by the section height or by its inner elements. For Inner Columns and widgets you can set the height and width, along with the minimum and maximum values for each. Any size unit can be used.

Animation and Background

The animation and background properties in flex mode are similar to the classic editor.

Following is a list of available triggers and animations:

Animations for Hover trigger (Editor 2.0 only)
Grow
Shrink
Move top
Move bottom
Move right
Move left
Rotate
Opacity
Grayscale
Shadow
Animations for Scroll trigger
Fade
Slide
Bounce
Roll
Rotate
Zoom
Flip
Animations for Entrance trigger:
Fade in
Slide in
Bounce in
Rotate in
Roll in
Zoom in
Flip in
Flash
Pulse
Rubber band
Shake
Swing
Tada
Wobble

Note

Parallax is available for all widgets and containers, and can be applied on all screen sizes. To enable parallax, click the image, select Edit Design , scroll to the Background section of the design panel and open the Image Position menu.

The option to keep a background image static is not available for tablet, mobile, and Mac OS due to an iOS limitation.

Design Panel for Advanced Grids

Advanced grids have design panel properties that are not available for other element types due to the ability to create freestyle compositions and overlapping elements. We recommend you review your design at different breakpoints.

Align

Single elements in an advanced grid can be aligned and stretched in any direction because it is not constrained by auto layout.

Order

In the Arrangement section of the design panel, this property can only be used when there are multiple elements inside an advanced grid. Allows you to bring a selected element to the front, forwards, to the back, or backwards.

Rearrange Layout

Allows you to select how the columns and rows are arranged within the advanced grid to create a layout.

Customize Layout

Allows you to select how the columns and rows are arranged within the advanced grid to create a layout.

Pin

Allows you to define the element’s position within the grid. Once set, the element will stay in the same position even when the grid size changes.

Grid Location

Available for elements inside advanced grids that have been divided into columns and or rows to create a layout. It shows where the element is on the grid.

Keep Proportions

When toggled to On , it ensures the elements inside an advanced grid retain their proportions even when the size of the grid changes.

The Image widget also contains a Keep proportion toggle, which keeps its original proportions.

Size Units

Note

This content is relevant for both Flex mode in Classic Editor and Editor 2.0.

Understanding and effectively utilizing size units is crucial for creating layouts that are not only visually appealing but also responsive across various devices and screen sizes. The design panel, located on the right side of the editor canvas in Editor 2.0 or when in Flex mode in the Classic Editor, serves as the control center for design properties of selected elements, including sections, columns, widgets, inner columns, and advanced grids. This article reviews the size units available in the design panel and offers practical examples for their usage.

Additionally, Editor 2.0 allows users to configure size units from the main breakpoint (desktop), ensuring scalability across all screen sizes. Users can adjust size units on tablet and mobile breakpoints without affecting other breakpoints. For more information, see Screen Sizes and Devices .

Percentage % for Flexible, Proportional Scaling

Percentage (%) is a dynamic size unit that determines the proportion of the container (section, column, inner column, or advanced grid) occupied by the element across various screen sizes. Typically, flex element widths default to percentages. Using percentages is advised when aiming to maintain design consistency across screen sizes without the need for manual pixel adjustments at each breakpoint.

For example, setting both columns in a two-column layout to 50% width ensures they automatically scale to 50% on all screen sizes.

Percentages are beneficial for preserving relative element sizes across different screen dimensions. This means that elements scale proportionally to their parent container (section or column), guaranteeing uniformity in layout appearance.

For example, an image set to 50% width inside a column will always occupy half the column's width, regardless of the screen size. Consequently, while the column and image may appear narrower on mobile devices compared to desktops, the image maintains its proportional width. Similarly, setting the padding between columns to 4% ensures consistent spacing relative to the columns and other screen elements, adapting across different screen sizes.

Pixels (Px) for Stable, Fixed Dimensions

Pixels (px) provide a fixed unit of measurement unaffected by device size variations. For example, a button set to 250px maintains its size across mobile, tablet, and desktop devices.

However, relying solely on pixels for sizing may hinder responsiveness, necessitating manual adjustments at each breakpoint. Therefore, while pixels ensure consistency in element size, utilizing percentages is recommended to promote responsive design. This approach minimizes the need for individual pixel adjustments at breakpoints, streamlining the design process and enhancing overall responsiveness.

Viewport Width (Vw) for Responsive Scaling Based on Screen Width

Viewport width (Vw) dynamically adjusts elements based on the screen's width (viewport), ensuring proportional scaling across different devices. For example, assigning 50 Vw to an element allocates half of the screen width.

Viewport Height (Vh) - Responsive Scaling Based on Screen Height

Viewport height (Vh) dynamically scales elements in relation to the screen's height (viewport). For example, designating 25 Vh to an element reserves a quarter of the screen's height for that element. This is especially beneficial for full-screen backgrounds (100% Vh) or elements that necessitate synchronization with the screen's height.

Automatic (A) - Content-Driven Adaptation

The automatic unit dynamically adjusts based on content height, making it suitable for text blocks and column heights, ensuring they resize according to their content. Typically, text blocks default to automatic units. This feature enables elements to expand or contract seamlessly, maintaining proportional layout design.

Understand Parent-Child Concept of Nested Elements

The parent-child concept governs the organization of elements, with primary elements like headers, bodies, menus, and footers containing at least one section. Each section, in turn, houses at least one column, serving as a container for various elements such as text, images, or widgets like Inner Columns and Advanced Grids.

Parent elements retain their design settings, allowing centralized control over their appearance. However, if a section within a parent element has specific background color settings, the parent element's background may not reflect this customization. This hierarchical structure ensures a systematic approach to website organization, facilitating efficient design workflows and coherent content presentation.

Select and Navigate within Flex Elements on the Canvas

The hierarchy of elements follows a default structure: sections contain columns and columns contain widgets. This hierarchical arrangement ensures that you cannot add a widget directly to a section without it being nested within a column. There are multiple ways to select an element (section, column, or widget):

Direct Selection of Objects in the Editor Canvas: Users can interact directly with elements on the editor canvas, making it easier to identify and modify specific components without the need for extensive navigation through panels or menus. Upon selecting an object, the design panel with all the relevant design options for that element will appear on the design panel on the right.
Floating Menu Breadcrumbs: Users can navigate back to parent containers using breadcrumbs in the floating menu. When selecting a specific element, users can simply click on the blue breadcrumbs at the top of the element to return to its parent container.
Top of the Design Panel Breadcrumbs: The design panel also includes navigation options at the top in the form of breadcrumbs. These breadcrumbs enable users to quickly jump between different sections or elements within the canvas.
Layers Panel: When an element is selected, the layers panel highlights the layers associated with that element. Simultaneously, the editor provides visual feedback, aiding in navigation within the canvas.

Flex Sections

Flex sections are rows with two default flex columns that create a basic layout. Once you add a section, you can add, remove, or rearrange additional columns, Inner Columns, or advanced grids to create your desired layout. Then you can add widgets to that layout.

Add Flex Section

To add a section:

Hover between rows, and click +Add Section. Or, right click to open the context menu, click Add , then select Flex section .
In the side panel, click Flex Sections.
Select the desired flex section.
Click Save .

Note

The option to keep a background image static is not available for tablet and mobile due to an iOS limitation.

Save Flex Section

To save a section:

Hover over the desired section and click Flex Section in the upper left corner of the section.
Click Save as Section , then click Select only this row.
Type a section name, select the category the section will be saved under, and select the permissions for the section.
Click Start Creating .
Click Done .

Delete Flex Section

To delete a section, right click to open the context menu and select Delete . Or, click the delete icon on the floating menu.

Flex Columns

Once you’ve added a section to your site, you can add columns to contain widgets within the section. All sections contain columns by default, but you can still add additional columns.

Note the maximum number of columns is 8.

Note

When you add an element to a column, the position is determined by auto layout settings. To change the auto layout direction, open the design panel and in the Layout section, select horizontal or vertical for the auto layout.

Add Flex Column

To add a column:

Click to select an existing column.
In the floating menu, click the three horizontal dots icon (), then select Add column . Or, click the plus icon on either the left or right edge of the column.

Duplicate Flex Column

You can duplicate a column and it will be added to the right of the original card. You cannot add columns that exceed 100% of the width.

To duplicate a column:

Click to select a column.
On the floating menu, click the Duplicate icon. Or, you can right click the column to open the context menu and select Duplicate .

Delete Flex Column

You can delete a column to remove it from the section. However, each section must contain at least one column, meaning you cannot delete the last column from a section.

To delete a column:

Click to select the column.
In the floating menu, click the Delete icon. Or, you can right click the column to open the context menu and select Delete .

Add Widgets in Flex

You can add widgets to columns, Inner Columns, or advanced grids in several different ways. If you are already in flex mode, you can add widgets directly from the side panel by clicking Widgets , then selecting the desired widget.

Note

If you are using flex mode in the Classic Editor, you cannot drag and drop a widget into a flex column from the side panel.

To add a widget:

Click a column, Inner Column or advanced grid to select it.
Click the plus icon in the middle of the column, Inner Column, or advanced grid. Or, click the plus icon in the floating menu.
Select a widget.

You can also add widgets from the layers panel.

To add a widget from the layers panel:

Click to select a column.
In the side panel, click Layers .
In the layers panel, hover over the column, Inner Column or advanced grid you want to add a widget to and click the plus icon.
Select a widget.

Flex Alignment and Spacing

Alignment and spacing can be used together to help you achieve your designs.

Alignment

Align Multiple Elements

When designing with Flex, you can save time by aligning multiple elements within the same section, column, or inner column at the same time.

To align multiple elements:

Select the section, column, or inner column and click the alignment icon in the floating menu.
Select the desired alignment.

The design panel offers additional alignment options such as changing the direction of auto layout, stretching, and more.

To align elements from the design panel:

Right click the desired section, column, or inner column and select Edit design .
In the Layout section of the design panel under Align elements , select the desired vertical and horizontal content alignment.

When aligning text from the floating menu or design panel, it aligns both the text and the div tag .

Align Single Elements

While it is possible to align multiple elements at once, sometimes you only need to change the alignment of one element inside a flex column without affecting the other elements.

To align a single element:

Select the desired element.
In the floating menu, click the alignment icon and select the desired alignment. Or, right click the element and select Edit design . This opens the design panel where you can select the alignment from the Align section.

Spacing

Space between elements

You can set the amount of horizontal or vertical space between columns within the same flex section or widgets inside a column, Inner Column or advanced grid.

To set spacing between elements:

Right click the desired section, column, inner column, or advanced grid and select Edit design .
In the Spacing section of the design panel under Spacing between elements , type or use the slider to set the percent value of horizontal space or the pixel value of vertical space you want to exist between elements in the Spacing between items field.

You can reset the padding for both sections and columns by clicking the Reset padding icon in the floating menu.

Create Overlapping Elements in Flex

Flex sections create a layout and automatically align objects, which helps you easily and quickly design beautiful sections. However, when you have a more complex design with overlapping objects or freestyle composition, you need to use an advanced grid. Advanced grids allow you to place elements in a freestyle composition without automatic layout. Due to this, we recommend you check your design on all breakpoints.

To create overlapping elements:

Click to select a flex column.
In the floating menu or in the flex column, click the plus icon ().
In the flex elements section, select Advanced grid (previously named containers). To ensure you follow best practices, drag the edges of the advanced grid so that it spans the entire flex column width.
In the Layout section of the design panel, select a premade grid from Rearrange layout . Or if you want to create your own grid, use the Columns and Rows drop down menus from Customize layout to add columns and or rows.
In the floating menu, click the plus icon, then select the desired widgets and arrange them in the advanced grid.
Click to select an element and in the Arrange section of the design panel, select Bring to front , Bring forward , Send backward , or Send to back .

We recommend checking your design at each breakpoint when using advanced grids. With overlapping elements you might need to adjust the design on certain breakpoints.

Inner Columns and Advanced Grid Widgets

In web design, choosing the appropriate layout system significantly influences the user experience, especially when integrating widget layout elements such as Inner Column and Advanced Grid into a site.

Inner column widget is recommended for:

Modular Layouts: Perfect for creating modular layouts where content flows linearly, making them ideal for navigation menus, cards, or list-like layouts.
Responsive Design : Excels in creating responsive designs that adapt seamlessly to various screen sizes and devices, ensuring optimal alignment and readability. Notably, they offer precise control over the wrapping behavior for each item in the container, ensuring content remains legible and well-organized.
Dynamic Content : Well-suited for handling dynamic content that may vary in length or size, allowing designers to control item behavior and sizing within a container dynamically.
Nested Layouts : Inner Column nesting capabilities make them suitable for creating complex nested layouts. Designers can nest more inner columns within the outer container as needed, providing flexibility and adaptability in arranging content hierarchies. Similarly, Advanced Grid offers the ability to nest widgets, inner columns, and even additional Advanced Grids within its layout structure.

Advanced grid widget is recommended for:

Complex Layout Structures : Indispensable for creating intricate layouts with multiple rows and columns, providing precise control over element placement and sizing.
Non-Linear Designs : Perfect for designing non-linear layouts where elements need to be positioned independently of their source order for creative compositions and asymmetrical arrangements. This means elements can be placed and arranged based on design requirements.
Responsive Web Design : While requiring careful planning, Advanced Grid provides robust tools for creating responsive designs. Designers can define specific layout adjustments such as column reordering, item spanning, and grid gaps at different viewport sizes, ensuring optimal presentation across various devices.

When should I use an inner column widget vs advanced grid widget?

Inner Columns are best suited for modular layouts, especially when you need precise control over individual items within a section or when you want an automatic layout. However, note that while Inner Columns maintain section integrity, moving widgets within them is less flexible compared to Advanced Grids.

Inner Columns allow control over rows or columns individually, ideal for one-dimensional layouts. Advanced Grids enables manipulation of both rows and columns simultaneously, providing comprehensive control over the entire layout structure, ideal for two-dimensional layouts.

Advanced Grid (CSS Grid) may have a marginal edge in handling complex layouts by optimizing DOM structure, rendering efficiency, resource loading, responsiveness, and minimizing HTTP requests. Inner Columns, while effective, may involve more nested HTML elements, potentially leading to slightly slower rendering times compared to Advanced Grids.

You can also use both inner column widget and advanced grid widget in the same section and throughout the site to achieve desired designs. This involves striking a balance between the overall layout structure and the finer details of content organization.

Parent-Child Relationships Between Widget Elements

Understanding parent-child relationships is fundamental in leveraging Inner Columns and Advanced Grids effectively. In these layout systems, the column housing elements acts as the parent, while the elements within, such as additional widgets, are regarded as children. This relationship dictates how elements are positioned and aligned within the layout, ensuring coherence and structural integrity in your web design.

It's important to note that you do not always need to add inner columns. Often, a single column can suffice for many use cases. Inner Column allows easy placement of elements either horizontally or vertically. The requirements include a section to act as the flex container and a column to house Inner Columns with both types of columns serving as flex items, representing the parent and child element respectively.

Advanced Grid allows placement or elements in both vertical and horizontal directions. The requirements include a section to act as a container and an Advanced Grid to declare the grid layout on the parent element or container, making all its children become grid items.

Module 12: Consistency Compounds

Sat, 01 Nov 2025 15:29:33 GMT

Building The Habit

We have covered websites, SEO, social media, and sales. But the most important lesson is this: Marketing is a muscle, not an event.

You don't go to the gym once for 9 hours and get fit. You go for an hour, 4 times a week. Business is exactly the same. The winners in this industry aren't the ones with the flashiest websites; they are the ones who show up, day in and day out, for two years.

You have the Travelgenix platform. You have the tools. Now you just need the habit.

Actionable Steps

Eat The Frog:

Mark Twain said if you have to eat a live frog, do it first thing in the morning. Do your marketing task (post/email) before you open your inbox. If you wait until "later," the day will run away from you.

Time Blocking:

Block out two 30-minute slots in your calendar purely for "Business Growth." Treat these slots as seriously as a doctor's appointment. No cancellations.

Find A Buddy:

Find another travel agent and agree to check in on Fridays. "Did you send your email?" Accountability works.

Free Online Resources

Top Tips from the Big Players

Look at Gymshark: They built a billion-dollar empire just by showing up on social media every single day and building a community. Consistency creates community.

Look at Peloton: They use "Streaks" to keep people cycling. Don't break the chain. If you blog weekly, keep the streak alive.

Tomato Timer (Pomodoro): Work for 25 minutes, take a 5-minute break. It’s the best way to get through boring admin tasks. Pomofocus.io

Habitica: A gamified way to track your habits. It turns your daily tasks into an RPG game. Fun and effective. Habitica.com

Your Checklist

I have blocked out my "Marketing Time" in my calendar for the next 4 weeks.

I have found an accountability partner or joined a business group.

I have completed the Travel Business Accelerator! (Time to celebrate!)

Email Settings - Customer Forgotten Password

Sat, 01 Nov 2025 10:49:12 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - Learn to make changes to your Customer Forgotten Password email.

Custom Code

Sat, 01 Nov 2025 09:34:26 GMT

Custom Code

The editor is flexible in that it allows you to both modify existing code or add your own. Doing this allows you to extend the functionality of the platform and provides you with additional features. For example, you can add a custom calendar widget or even a third-party custom contact form for taking payments on your site.

 Warning

Developer mode is not available when you are editing the site in flex mode in the Classic Editor. You must exit flex mode to access Developer Mode.

How to Add Custom Code

There are several ways you can add custom code: via developer mode or the HTML widget. Following are instructions on how to access both.

Note

Custom code that is intended to be visible in the site should be added using a HTML widget. Custom code that is not visible should usually be put in the header. In general, it is always best to first follow the directions provided by the code's writer before adding it to your site.

Developer Mode

Developer Mode gives you access to edit and change your site's HTML and CSS. Adding custom code allows for advanced customization that is not possible with the drag and drop editor, however this should only be performed by advanced users with a solid understanding of web development code.

To access Developer Mode:

Click Developer Mode in the navigation bar. Alternatively, right-click on a widget and select Edit HTML/CSS , and then click Dev Mode in the lower left.
After adding your code, use the Save and Preview buttons to see your work.

HTML Widget

The HTML widget is the easiest method of adding custom code to your site. Depending on where you place your HTML widget, it will either appear on all pages of your site or just a single page. If you place the HTML widget in either the header or the footer, it will be placed on all pages of the site at the same time. This is because every site shares the header and footer. If you place the HTML widget anywhere else, it will appear only in the body.

To add an HTML widget:

In the side panel, click Widgets .
Search for HTML , then drag and drop the widget into a column or row on your site and then paste in your code.

Custom Code in the Header

You can place code in the site-wide header or the header for an individual page.

Note

Consent management apps are not able to prevent code from running prior to consent when the code is placed in the header HTML. This is because we optimize the structure and order of how content loads, based on performance best practices on the site. We place scripts and CMP banners lower on the page, in order to improve the performance of primary content. Because of this, it is recommended to place code in the body-end when using a consent management app.

Site-Wide Header

To place the code in the site-wide header:

In the side panel, click SEO & Settings .
Click Header HTML .
Head HTML. Add content to the head section field.
Body End HTML. Add custom HTML/Javascript just before the closing tag of the <body> element for each page in the site.
Paste your code, then save.

Single Page Header

To place the code in the header of a single page:

In the side panel, click Pages .
On the page, you want to add it into, click on the settings icon ().
Click SEO .
Scroll down to Header HTML .
Paste in your code here and save.

My Code is Disappearing When I Place it in the Head Section

It is common for pixel tracking codes to disappear when placed in the header. The head section <head> does not accept any code that is <img> , <iframe> , and more. It normally only takes <link> , <script> , and <meta> .

If you have to paste code that's not being saved in the head section, paste it in the header or in the body-end.html. To do so, follow the steps in the Custom Code After the Opening Body Tag section of this article.

Custom Code After the Opening Body Tag

We currently do not have a feature to place code directly right after the opening body tag. However, you can paste code directly into the body-end.html file. There are two ways to do this, in developer mode or in settings.

To paste code directly into the body-end.html file in developer mode:

Click the Developer Mode icon in the top bar.
Click Site HTML / CSS to expand the selection.
Click body-end.html .
Paste your code into the last line here.
Click Save and Done .

To paste code directly into the body-end.html file in settings:

In the side panel, click SEO & Settings .
Click Head HTML .
Paste your code into the Body End HTML field.
Click Save .

Custom Code in Elements or Widgets

Many elements, including rows, columns, and widgets offer the ability to access its HTML/CSS.

If you are in Classic Editor using flex mode or in Editor 2.0:

You can edit the CSS of flex containers (section, column, inner column, and advanced grid). If you are in Editor 2.0: You can also edit the CSS of headers and footers.
The design panel might not reflect all custom code changes. This can cause style differences between the design panel and inline elements.

To add any code to any element or widget:

In the Classic editor, right-click your widget or element to bring up the context menu.
If you are in flex mode in the Classic editor or Editor 2.0: Click to select the flex container, header, or footer.
Click Edit HTML/CSS . If you are in flex mode in Classic Editor or Editor 2.0, click the three dot icon in the floating menu, then select Edit CSS .
Edit or add code here, as needed.
Click Update .

The browser may need to be refreshed to see the change.

CSS Limitations in Editor 2.0 and Flex Mode

The current style update mechanism does not support CSS at rules. If you want to use CSS at rules in Flex Mode or Editor 2.0, you need to add them via developer mode, which can be accessed by clicking the developer mode icon in the top navigation bar.

The following at rules are only supported in developer mode:

@import: Used to import external stylesheets.
@media: Defines style rules for different media types/devices.
@font-face: Allows custom fonts to be loaded and used.
@supports: Applies styles based on feature support.
@keyframes: Defines animations.
@page: Used in paged media, such as printing.
@namespace: Declares a namespace for XML documents.
@charset: Specifies the character encoding.
@counter-style: Defines custom counter styles.
@document: (Obsolete) Applied styles to specific URLs.
@layer: Used in CSS Cascade Layers.
@property: Defines custom properties with specific types and initial values.

CSS Classes for Flex Elements (Editor 2.0 and Flex Mode)

In Editor 2.0 and flex mode: You can add CSS classes to flex elements (section, column, inner column, and advanced grids). Using CSS classes can save time when styling elements. For example, instead of using the design panel to change a single column padding and size, you can create a CSS class and apply these style changes to any number of columns.

The same class can be applied to multiple elements on the same page, and multiple classes can be applied to the same element.

Note

You must have access to developer mode to use this feature.

To add or edit a CSS class:

Select the desired flex element (section, column, inner column, or advanced grid).
From either the floating menu or context menu, select Add CSS Class Name .
Type a new CSS class name or select an existing class name from the dropdown menu. You can select multiple classes.
(Optional) If you have not already added the CSS class to the code, click open Dev mode .
Click Done .

Add Tracking Code to Contact Form

To add tracking code to a contact form:

Navigate to the page your contact form is on.
Click your contact form to open the options.
Click Submission .
Click Tracking .
Paste your conversion tracking code here.

Custom Code Recommended Guidelines

Following are recommended guidelines to follow when working with custom code and Developer Mode.

General Guidelines

Always create a backup of your site before adding custom code.
Before placing code in the header, test on a separate test site first. You can do this by making a duplicate of your site to test custom code on.
For code that needs to be placed on a page, create a test page and place the code there.
Preview uses HTTPS, while your live site may not. This will often break custom code.
Make sure you stay within the columns. Our responsive sites are based on a row-column structure. This means that each row contains columns which ultimately hold the content. When adding or editing your own HTML, make sure it is inside a column.

Developer Mode specific guidelines

Make sure you stay within the columns. Our responsive sites are based on a row-column structure. This means that each row contains columns which ultimately hold the content. When adding or editing your own HTML, make sure it is inside a column.
Leave the classes in place. The editor relies on the many classes that are added to elements. If you see an existing class (usually starts with dm), leave it in place. If you remove classes, the Site might not look the same when you go to preview it.
Notice the class sizes. Columns have a size value that is added as a class, such as large-6 or small-12. This determines the size of columns inside that row. You'll want to leave these in place, as they are the core of sizing the row on different devices.
Avoid editing extensions if possible. In the HTML, you will see placeholders of elements on the page already. If you can, avoid editing these, especially the data-values held within them. Editing these can break the widgets once you head back to the editor.

Troubleshoot Custom Code

If you have added custom code to your site that's impacting its performance or preventing you from editing it, it is most likely due to the code not being formatted correctly or not being HTTPS compliant.

Following are troubleshooting solutions for issues you may encounter while working with custom code.

Restore a Backup of Your Site

Restore a backup of your site to a point before the custom code was added (even if you haven't created a backup, the editor creates one for you when you publish or enter developer mode).

To restore a backup:

In the side panel, click SEO & Settings .
Click Site Backup .
Click the Restore link next to the backup you want to restore.
Confirm your selection by clicking Restore .

Specific Error Messages

Following are specific error messages and what they mean:

DUPLICATE_ID . Every element must have a unique ID.
INVALID_ELEMENT_LOCATION . All elements must be in a column which must be in a row.
BAD_PROPORTION . Columns in a row must add up to 12.
INVALID_CLASS_FOR_ELEMENT . A Website Builder class has been added to an invalid element.

Code is Not Working

If you have code that's not working on the site, it's most likely due to the code not being formatted correctly or not being HTTPS.

If you have any links in your code (http:// or //) and your site is using HTTPS or you're in the preview, then you will have to change that so that it's https:// instead. The reason for this is because the non-HTTPS code will not work in an HTTPS loaded connection (site preview, editor, etc).

Unable to Open the Editor

If you are unable to access the editor when your site loads initially, try accessing your editor on a new page by entering a different URL in your editor link, such as https://my.Website Builder.co/home/site/XXXXXXX/about. When you get there, you can delete and re-add the page that is causing problems, or access developer mode to fix the issue on the site's code.

Or, if the editor is broken, try to force open the editor by using the keyboard shortcut for the element inspector. For Mac the shortcut is Command + Option + C . For PC the shortcut is Ctrl + Alt + C

Load the Non-Secured Version of the Editor

Load the non-secured version of the editor to load scripts that were not embedded via a secure connection. To do so, log into http://my.Website Builder.co?nossl

Page Speed Issue

Page speed optimization affects how certain scripts are run. We run PageSpeed optimization on most pages, which can cause issues with your custom code.

To determine if your custom code is being affected by a page speed issue:

Duplicate the page with your scripts.
Change the URL to "testing_scripts."
Publish and then check the page on your live site.
If your code works on that page, contact support to turn off page speed optimization for your site.

If you are using a script, you can also try making sure your script runs asynchronously—it is not guaranteed, but it sometimes can solve the issue with scripts not executing properly in the browser.

To enable async on scripts, alter your code using the following:

Old code: <script src="https://example.com/script.js"></script>
New code: <script src="https://example.com/script.js" async defer></script>

Outer and Inner Spacing

Sat, 01 Nov 2025 09:11:23 GMT

Outer and Inner Spacing

Outer spacing and inner spacing are the space around an element. Outer spacing is also know as margin, and is the space outside of the element's borders. Inner spacing is also known as padding, and is the space inside these borders. When you adjust the outer spacing and inner spacing of an element, you change its placement and appearance. This can make your site look more customized and professional.

To adjust the outer and inner spacing around an element:

To access the design editor, right-click the element, and click Edit Design . Or if you are in flex mode or Editor 2.0, select Edit Design from the floating menu to open the design panel. Click the element to open the floating menu, then click the option to edit design.
Click Spacing .
To change the outer spacing (margin), click and edit the numbers in the outer box. You can also click on one of these numbers and use the slider to adjust the size.

To change the inner spacing (padding), click and edit the numbers in the inner box. You can also click on one of these numbers and use the slider to adjust the size.

If you are using Editor 2.0: Click in the respective boxes to edit the margin and padding values. The horizontal margin and padding values are linked. If you change one, the other will automatically update. They can be unlinked by clicking the link icon.

Note

If you see odd spaces that you cannot remove, be sure to check all parts of the widget, including the column in which it is located.

Inline Margins (Editor 2.0)

For elements inside a column or inner column, you can quickly adjust the element’s margin by dragging the edges of the element on the canvas in the same direction as the column. This means left and right margins can be adjusted in horizontal columns and top and bottom margins can be adjusted in vertical columns.

Considerations

When adjusting inline margins directly from the canvas, the margins will be unlinked. When adjusting margins from the Design panel the margins are linked, meaning if you change one the other margin will automatically update to match.
When adjusting inline margins the same size unit (px, %, vh, vw) set in the design panel will be kept unless the value is 0 in which case it will reset to px.

Flex Mode and Editor 2.0 Size Unit Options

In flex mode and Editor 2.0, there are additional measurement options:

px (pixels). Provides a fixed unit of measurement unaffected by device size variations.
% (percentage). A versatile unit that scales elements proportionally based on the size of their container.
vh (viewport height). Dynamically scales elements in relation to the screen's height (viewport).
vw (viewport width). Dynamically adjusts elements based on the screen's width (viewport), ensuring proportional scaling across different devices.

To change the size unit:

Open the design panel of an element.
Navigate to the Spacing section.
Click into one of the boxes.
Click the current size unit.
Click the desired size unit.

Manage Elements

Fri, 31 Oct 2025 14:48:37 GMT

Manage Elements

You can show or hide elements.

Show or Hide Elements

You can see all of the hidden widgets on a page by clicking the Unhide Elements icon. In Classic Editor, the Unhide Elements icon is at the bottom of the left panel under SEO & Settings . In flex mode and Editor 2.0: The Unhide Elements icon is in the Layers panel next to the hidden element.

The Unhide Elements icon only displays if you have hidden elements in your site.

Note

When using the Unhide Elements feature, it only unhides or shows them on the device/screensize you are currently editing.

Hide Elements (Editor 2.0)

You can hide an element per device(s) from the context menu or floating bar.

Hide Element from Floating Bar

To hide an element from the floating bar:

Click the element to open the floating bar.
Click the three horizontal dot icon.
Select Hide from , then select one or multiple devices. Note that if you hide the element on all devices or the device you are currently working from, the menu will disappear because the element is hidden.

Hide Element from Context Menu

To hide an element from the context menu:

Right click the element to open the context menu.
Click Hide from , then select one or multiple devices. Note that if you hide the element on all devices or the device you are currently working from, the menu will disappear because the element is hidden.

Unhide Elements (Editor 2.0)

If an element is hidden on all devices or the breakpoint you are currently on, it can only be unhidden from the Layers panel. If an element is only hidden on some devices, it can be unhidden from the floating bar or context menu.

Unhide from Layers Panel
To unhide an element from the Layers panel, click the crossed out eye icon next to the desired element. Note that unhiding an element from the Layers panel only unhides the element for the current breakpoint.

Unhide Element from Floating Bar

To unhide an element from the floating bar:

Click the element to open the floating bar.
Click the three dot icon and select Hide from .
The devices that the element is currently hidden on are in orange and have a strike through the device icon. Click the desired device to unhide the element.

Unhide Element from Context Menu

To unhide an element from the context menu:

Right click the element to open the context menu.
Click Hide from .
The devices that the element is currently hidden on are in orange and do not have a strike through the device icon. Click the desired device to unhide the element.

Site Theme

Fri, 31 Oct 2025 12:18:08 GMT

Site Theme

The Site Theme panel lets you make changes that affect your entire site. You can customize your site's text, buttons, images, background, and navigation widgets from the design panel. This allows you to quickly and efficiently make sweeping visual changes, reducing design time and keeping your site's style consistent across pages.

To open the Site Theme panel, in the side panel, click Theme . When the Site Theme panel is open, the canvas is automatically minimized to 50% view so that the entire canvas is visible while adjusting the site theme settings. If you want to return to 100% canvas view, click the drop down in the top bar and select 100%. The ability to zoom in or out is also available in preview mode.

Note

Changes that you make to specific widgets or pages will override themes set in the Site Theme panel. We recommend you first decide on a site theme, and then make customizations to parts of your site that you want to stand out or look different than the rest.
Prior to March 2023, Site Theme was previously named Global Design.

Theme Text

This section lets you control text for your site, both for text and headings of all sizes (H1 to H6). Change the style and look of the text on your entire site. You can change font type, size, and also choose settings for normal text, links, and titles.

Changing the font size, style, color, and other edits will affect future paragraphs, and other text types as well as current widgets connected to Site Text that have not been manually changed.

Configure Theme Text

To configure theme text:

In the side panel, click Theme .
Click the arrow next to Text .
Click the desired text type. The options are:
DFLT. This will set the theme for all text in widgets that are not assigned to a heading or to the paragraph style such as the navigation widget. Link text color and underline can also be set here. Additionally, you have the option to customize the appearance of links for different states, including the Default Link State, Link On-hover, and Link Clicked.
PAR. This will set the theme for the text widget.
Heading and subheadings H1-H6.
You can change the following per text type:
Font
Font size. This is set for desktop/tablet and mobile, separately.
Scale text. (Editor 2.0 only) When enabled, the text scales based on the parent container's width. This can be helpful if you do not want a line break in a heading. Widgets with text that are connected to the theme will inherit this setting, however the setting can be overridden per widget.
Font color
Font format
Text direction
Font weight
Line height
Letter spacing
All caps
Text shadow

Making changes in the Theme text area changes all text in the site that is not overridden by individual, custom style changes. When manual edits are made to individual elements it overrides the site theme and any changes made to the site theme will no longer affect the style of these elements. This is at the individual style settings of a certain site element, for example, if you only changed the color of the text in a particular H1 widget on the canvas:

And then changed the font size of H1 in the site theme, the H1’s font size will still change in the H1 widget.
And then changed the color of H1 in the site theme, the H1 that had been changed will not update with the color change.

Update Theme Text

You can update theme text in the text settings by clicking Theme , then selecting Text . Or, you can click a text widget to open the context menu, click the heading selection drop down, and select Update theme . This opens the theme text settings where you can make updates.

Fonts Library

The editor features a variety of fonts for your use. Set a theme text font or choose to differentiate your text by using multiple different fonts on your site.

To view available fonts and see what they look like:

In the side panel, click Theme .
Click Text .
Select a font from the Font drop down menu.

Theme Colors

Colors allow you to define a color palette and link the individual colors to any or all widget with color settings. The color of any element that is linked to the theme colors will automatically be updated when the linked color is changed in the theme colors settings. This allows you to quickly make color changes, which helps reduce design time and ensures your site's style is consistent across pages.

Account owners automatically have Editor permissions and can edit, view, and use theme colors. Team members and clients who do not have Editor permissions can view and use theme colors, but they cannot edit them.

Configure Theme Colors

You can configure up to 20 theme colors.

To configure theme colors:

In the side panel, click Theme .
Select the arrow next to Colors .
Click the Plus icon next to Primary , or whichever setting you need to define.
Type the HEX or RGB value of the desired color, or use the eye dropper tool to select a color.
(Optional) You can generate colors from your logo. Click to open the primary color, then open the Brand tab and click + Add Logo (if you added a logo to your Business Info in the Content Library, it will appear here). After adding your logo, a set of colors is generated.

If you need to remove or replace the logo, click the three dot icon next to your logo and select either Remove or Replace Image . Note that you need Content Library & Business Info permission to upload, remove, or replace the logo.

Repeat these steps as necessary for each theme color. Next, you need to connect the colors to widgets on your site.

Automatically Configure Theme Colors

If the site or template doesn't have colors already connected, it can be done automatically. The automatic theme colors generator scans your site and detects the most frequently used colors. It generates a list of colors to select from, and once selected, those colors become your theme colors and are connected to your site widgets.

To automatically configure theme colors:

In the side panel, click Theme .
Select the arrow next to Colors .
Click Set Theme Colors.
Click Connect it for me or I'll connect it myself .
(Optional) If you selected I'll connect it myself, click the Plus icon next to each color in the design panel and select the colors individually.
Select which of the generated colors you want to use.
Click Save & Connect Colors .

The colors will populate in the Colors section of the Site Theme panel.

Connect Theme Colors to Widgets

To connect a widget to a theme color:

Click a widget to open it’s settings menu.
Open the color settings and select one of the theme colors listed at the top.
Repeat as necessary for other elements.
(Optional) If you need to edit one of the theme colors, click the pencil icon and the theme colors settings will open where you can edit the desired color.

Once a widget is connected to theme colors it will automatically update when the linked theme color is updated.

Rename Theme Colors

To rename theme colors:

In the side panel, click Theme .
Click Colors .
Hover over the desired color name and click the pencil icon.
Type a new name.

The new name is automatically saved and will appear when hovering over the color in the color picker.

Remove Theme Colors

You can disconnect any widgets connected to individual theme colors.

To disconnect a widget:

In the side panel, click Theme .
Click Colors .
Click the three horizontal dot icon () next to the Colors text and select Remove theme colors .
Select which colors to remove, then click Remove Selected Colors .

Site Buttons

This section lets you define the style of primary and secondary button widgets on your site. Select one of our button layouts and set the text, background color, border, hover state, corners, and shadow styles.

To hide the Back to Top button on mobile, enable the toggle in the Site Layout section.

Theme Images

This section lets you control the style of the image widgets on your site. You can change the image layout, add or edit the border style, rounded corners, or shadow effects.

Theme Rows and Columns

Note

This information is specific to the Classic Editor, and not relevant for Editor 2.0 (formerly known as the All-Flex Editor.).

This section allows you to define the theme for row and column design in terms of background color and default spacing. Edits that will be made on individual rows or columns will override the theme row and column settings.

Theme Background

This section lets you control Background style for your site. Choose between using a color or image as your background. Choose a custom background image from the photo gallery or upload your own images to add a unique site design. Changes also affect the desktop and tablet.

Customize Site Background

To customize your site background:

In the side panel, click Theme .
Click the arrow next to Backgrounds .
Click Default Background .
Click either the Color or Image tab or select a color for the site background or upload an image.
(Optional) Click the Do not optimize this image toggle to prevent optimization (this setting will appear after an image has been selected).

Customize Background Per Page

To customize the background per page:

In the side panel, click Theme .
Click the arrow next to Backgrounds .
Click Background per page .
Select a page from the drop-down menu, and select image or color for the specific page.
(Optional) Click the Do not optimize this image toggle to prevent optimization (this setting will appear after an image has been selected).

Width & Spacing (Editor 2.0)

Note

This information is specific to the Editor 2.0, formerly known as the All-Flex Editor.

From the Theme panel, you can adjust your site layout, which includes setting page width and default section spacing.

To access site layout settings:

In the side panel, click Theme .
Click Width & Spacing .
Click the desired section to expand it.

Page Width

You can set the default page width for sections not set to full width (previously called “full bleed”) on desktop. Adjusting the default page width can help ensure the best readability and design for the site for how it will be displayed. For example, some websites are displayed on a tv screen or screens larger than the average desktop computer.

To set default page width:

In the side panel, click Theme .
Click Width & Spacing .
Click to expand the Page Width section.
Select either 1200 px , 1440 px , or Custom . If you select Custom, use the slider to select pixel width or enter a value in the field. The custom value can be between 960px to 1920px, or between 50 vw to 100 vw.

Section Spacing

You can set the default padding for new, blank sections added to your site. If desired, you can override the theme section spacing in the section’s design panel.

Important considerations:

Sections added to the header retain the default header spacing, regardless of what is set in the theme’s section spacing.
Note that sections created prior to this feature release (August 5, 2025) do not automatically inherit the Section Spacing padding, however they can be reconnected by opening the section's design panel and clicking Reset to theme spacing in the Section Spacing drawer.

To set section spacing:

In the side panel, click Theme .
Click Width & Spacing .
Click to expand the Section Spacing section.
Click in the respective boxes to edit the padding values. The horizontal padding values are linked. If you change one, the other will automatically update. They can be unlinked by clicking the link icon. Note that section spacing is set per breakpoint.

If necessary, click Reset padding to reset all values to zero.

If you modify an individual section's padding, it overrides the theme settings. You can reset it back to theme Section Spacing settings by opening the section's design panel and clicking Reset to theme spacing in the Section Spacing drawer.

Site Layout

Note

This information is specific to the Classic Editor, and not relevant for Editor 2.0 (formerly known as the All-Flex Editor.).

Control the site layout navigation on desktop, tablet and mobile. For the desktop version, you can choose from two widths: 960px or 1200px.

Changing your navigation's layout often affects the behavior of your header and sometimes the rest of your site. If your header suddenly looks incorrect after changing the layout, try a different layout.

Sidebar Layout for Desktop

Note

This information is specific to the Classic Editor, and not relevant for Editor 2.0 (formerly known as the All-Flex Editor.).

You can change your desktop site layout to a sidebar layout. Sidebar layout displays the header on the side of the site (either left or right) and is a great design tool to give a unique look to your site. The sidebar header also acts as a sticky header so it will always be displayed on the screen and you can also add widgets into the sidebar like any other row.

Note

When you switch from a traditional site layout to a sidebar layout, the header keeps the logo, and all the widgets you had will be removed (similar to switching the header layout on the top header layout). The background color will be changed according to the layout you selected.
The shrinking header is not available for the sidebar navigation. The sidebar is always displayed on the site regardless of the site scrolling.
On screens smaller than 1090 pixels width, the content of the sidebar except the first image will be hidden and an expand menu icon will display. You can customize the color of the trigger button that appears in the design editor.

To change your site layout to a sidebar layout:

In the side panel, click Theme .
Click the arrow next to Site Layout .
Select the sidebar layout, You can add rows, drag and drop widgets into the sidebar header and customize it.

To edit the design of the sidebar header, hover over the sidebar, and click Sidebar at the top right corner. You can choose one of the multiple sidebar header layouts to apply to your site, display it on the left or the right side of the screen, define its width, and more.

Canvas Actions and Options

Fri, 31 Oct 2025 11:48:51 GMT

Canvas Actions and Options

You can easily edit and access options for any widget, column, or row with just a click of a button. This functionality allows you to customize your site efficiently, whether you're moving elements, adjusting settings, or adding new content. With intuitive drag-and-drop features and quick access to editing tools, you can create a versatile and engaging website with ease.

Context Menus

Everything in the editor has the option to open up a context menu. To open the context menu, right-click any widget or space in the editor.

Example context menu:

Anchor Tags and Links

Anchor links let you send visitors to a specific sections of the page, making it easier for them to get from place to place on a longer page or to a specific section that you would like to reference. Anchor links are very useful for letting users skip past content that may not apply to them, keeping them focused on what is important to them.

Note

Anchors cannot be added to content in the footer or header.

While anchors can be added to dynamic pages, they can only be linked to from within the same dynamic page. For example, if an anchor is added to an element on a dynamic page, you won’t be able to link to it from the homepage (it won't show as an option).

Add Anchors

To add an anchor on your page:

Right-click an element to open the context menu.
Click Set As Anchor .
Type an Anchor Name . To add the anchor to the site's navigation, select Add to Site Navigation (by default, this option will be checked; un-check it to prevent it from being added to the site navigation). The option, Add to Site Navigation , won't be available for dynamic pages.
Click Add .

Note

If an anchor is added to site navigation, it will appear in the list in the Pages area located in the side panel. For information on managing it in the Pages area, see Pages .

Link to an Anchor

To add a link to an existing anchor:

When creating a text or button link, select the Anchor option (located in the link picker that opens when adding a link)
Select the page the anchor is on, and select the anchor from the drop-down.

Delete or Edit an Anchor

To delete or edit an existing anchor:

Right-click widget or row with the anchor to open the context menu.
Click the gear icon, then select Edit Anchor .
Click Delete anchor or edit the anchor as necessary.
If you edited the anchor, click Update to apply the changes.

Warning

If an anchor in the site navigation (located in the Pages area of the side panel) has sub-pages, deleting the anchor will also delete the sub-pages.

Floating Menu Bar

Note

This information is specific to the Editor 2.0, formerly known as the All-Flex Editor.

Elements in Flex sections and Editor 2.0 have floating menu bars that offer different options depending on the widget or element. The floating menu can also be used when trying to select a prior level layer (for example, if you click on a column, you can only select the section layer. The top layer is a section, followed by a column, then an element, and so on).

Example floating menu:

To select a prior layer, click on an element to bring up the floating bar, then hover on the element's name (it should expand to show its prior layers), and click on the desired layer.

Select Container or Layer

If you are having trouble selecting a container (column or row) in the editor, click a widget and click Select Container when in Classic Editor to select the Column or Row.

In Editor 2.0, click Select Layer to select the Column or Section.

Clear Padding

Note

This information is specific to the Classic Editor, and not relevant for Editor 2.0 (formerly known as the All-Flex Editor.).

To remove extra space around columns or rows in your site, click Clear Padding . This is useful if you are trying to tighten up the space around your content.

Copy and Paste

You can copy any widget or container and paste it anywhere else on your site.

Rearrange Elements

Some elements, such as rows, sections, and columns, right-click the element, and then click the navigation arrows at the top of the context menu.

Note

Not all elements will have this option.
Changes may affect other devices. It is recommended to review the other devices after making changes.

Rearrange Widgets

To rearrange widgets, click and drag them to another column or row in your site. Once you click to drag, a blue box will indicate where it will be placed after letting go of your mouse.

Snap to Align

Note

This information is specific to the Classic Editor, and not relevant for Editor 2.0 (formerly known as the All-Flex Editor.).

While resizing elements within the same column, the editor attempts to Snap to Align them to be the exact same size. You will notice that as you resize, the widget will jump ahead or behind to snap to location. This should make it easier to make elements the exact same size.

Snap to Grid

Note

This information is specific to the Classic Editor, and not relevant for Editor 2.0 (formerly known as the All-Flex Editor.).

The Snap to Grid system can help you lay elements in the pages of your site with professional precision. This system allows you to align elements horizontally and vertically within columns and rows. Rulers appear when moving an element in its row or column, or when resizing the element. The aligned elements are marked with a colored border. An element may be aligned to more than one other element, depending on the specific use-case.

Note

Alignment is supported by the views of the three different devices (desktop, tablet, mobile).

Resize Widgets and Containers

Note

This information is specific to the Classic Editor, and not relevant for Editor 2.0 (formerly known as the All-Flex Editor.).

You can resize most widgets and containers by hovering your mouse over them and interacting with the handles around the widget or container. The white handles add margins, either vertical or horizontal, to move an element. The blue handle, located in the lower right, resizes the element.

Move element

Resize element

Email Settings - Customer Registration Verify Account

Fri, 31 Oct 2025 10:57:27 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - Learn how to make changes to your Customer Registration Verify Account email.

Screen Sizes and Devices

Fri, 31 Oct 2025 10:34:07 GMT

Screen Sizes and Devices

Breakpoints (also called screen sizes) are pixel ranges that correspond to the width of different devices, such as desktop, tablet, and mobile. When the width of a device is within a breakpoints predefined pixel range, the layout of the site is adjusted so the content and design is optimized for that device size and orientation. For example, if I am viewing a site on a desktop computer I can view the full site menu, but when I view the site on my mobile device, I see a hamburger menu instead.

Following are the breakpoints offered in the editor:

Desktop (1025px-1399px). This is the default breakpoint.
Wide desktop (1400px and up). This is only available in flex mode in Classic Editor.
Tablet (768px-1024px)
Mobile (767px and below). We always recommend checking mobile breakpoint changes on a mobile device, instead of resizing a desktop screen.
Mobile landscape (468px-767px). This is only available in flex mode in Classic Editor.

If you make design, layout or content changes to the default desktop breakpoint, the changes are automatically applied to the other breakpoints. If you change content, such as adding a widget, editing text, or adding or deleting a section, the change automatically applies to all other breakpoints, regardless of which breakpoint the change was made on. For example, if you add a widget on the tablet breakpoint, the widget will be added on all other breakpoints as well.

However, if you make changes to the position or size of an element on specific breakpoints, the changes will not apply to other breakpoints. For example, if you change the size of an element on the mobile breakpoint, the change will only apply to the mobile and mobile landscape breakpoints and no other breakpoints.

Overrides Per Screen Size (Flex Mode and Editor 2.0)

Note

This content is relevant for both Flex mode in Classic Editor and Editor 2.0. To identify your current editor version.

There are certain times when you need to override a breakpoint. For example, on the main breakpoint an image is to the right of a paragraph, but on mobile you need the image to be on top and the paragraph below.

The following are changes you can make to an element and override the main breakpoint:

Alignment
Position
Size
Spacing

Once you override a breakpoint, you cannot reverse the change by changing the style in the main breakpoint on the same object.

Hide on a Certain Screen Size (Flex Mode and Editor 2.0)

Note

This content is relevant for both Flex mode in Classic Editor and Editor 2.0. To identify your current editor version.

You can hide certain elements on specific breakpoints from the layers panel or from the element’s floating menu. For example, you can hide an image on mobile devices and it will not affect other breakpoints.

Note

If you hide an element that has other nested elements within it, all nested elements will also be hidden on that breakpoint. For example, if you hide a flex column it will also hide the widgets within that flex column.

To hide an element on a specific breakpoint:

Switch to the breakpoint you want to hide the element on by clicking the view in the top navigation.
Click the element you want to hide.
Click the three horizontal dots icon () on the floating menu and select Hide on this breakpoint. Or in the layers panel, click Hide on this breakpoint next to the element.

Hide on a Certain Screen Size (Classic Editor)

Note

This information is specific to the Classic Editor, and not relevant for Editor 2.0 (formerly known as the All-Flex Editor.) To identify your current editor version.

Almost everything in the editor, with the exception of the header and footer, can be edited on a per-device basis by making the content specific to that device.

To edit content per-device:

Copy the content that you would like to be device-specific. Right-click the widget, click copy , then click paste .
Right-click on one of the widgets, select Hide on device , then select the device where you want the widget to be hidden. For example, setting a button to Hide on Desktop removes the button from the desktop, but displays the button in the tablet and mobile sites.
Click on the original content and select Hide on device , then hide the content on the device(s) on which you do not want to change this content. For example, if you set your copy button to Hide on Desktop , you would set the original button to Hide on Tablet and Hide on Mobile . This way, you will have two different buttons; one showing on your desktop and a different one showing on your tablet and mobile.
If you want the content to be different on all three devices, you can copy it again (so you have a total of three copies of the same content) and have a different button displayed on each device.
You now have two (or three) identical, but different pieces of content, each displayed on a different device. Any further changes made to this content will only affect the device on which it is set to show.

Hidden content may still show in the code of the live site (after publishing/republishing). This is expected and due to the technology used. When you hide a widget, section, or any content in the editor on a specific device, we hide it using CSS Media Queries. What this means is that the HTML (although hidden on the website) still exists within the web page when a viewer looks at the content. This can sometimes cause a problem where an audit tool that scans the website will identify this hidden content, even though you thought that it was removed from the page.

Switch Between Device Views

Responsive websites work on desktop, tablet, and mobile. For this reason, our responsive editor lets you preview the site in each of these views while editing. This lets you check how your site looks on different devices before you publish, ensuring that your customers have a positive experience no matter what device they are using to view the site.

To switch device views, click on one of the device buttons in the top navigation bar:

The different device views are not separate versions of your site. Deleting an element in one view (for example, mobile), removes that element from the entire site (desktop, tablet, and mobile). Instead of deleting, right-click on the element and select to hide an element on a specific device.

Device previews do not always reflect precisely what you see on an actual device. Features like fonts, size of the device window, user interface and browser behavior can all cause these previews to be inaccurate to various degrees. For the most accurate version of the site, check on a real device.

Edit by Device (Classic Editor)

Note

This information is specific to the Classic Editor, and not relevant for Editor 2.0 (formerly known as the All-Flex Editor.).

Edits made to one device appear on all devices. For example, when a row is deleted on the tablet view of your site, the row will also be missing on the desktop and mobile views of your site. This is because content can be shared across all devices. However, you may want to differentiate which content appears on which devices. You can use our edit by device features to accomplish this, and serve your visitors content that is appropriate for the device they are accessing your site from.

When making edits to a specific device, it is often necessary to switch views.

Edits That Do Not Affect Other Devices

Many settings will indicate which devices they affect. For instance, a setting may say Change affects desktop and tablet along with an icon that represents the devices.

There are several edits in the editor that can be changed without affecting mobile. These are:

Spacing (Margins and padding)
Positioning
Width
Height
Site/Page background
Font size (it will not affect text that has been edited in mobile before)
Changes to the header and footer on tablet view do not affect the desktop and mobile view

Every other edit you make in the each device view will affect other devices.

Widget-Specific Changes

While some widgets work fine across all devices, there are some drastic differences between devices which creates a need for a different set of features or design preferences per device.

Below is a list of widgets with design suggestions and notes for tailoring certain widgets on certain devices.

Background Images

Due to drastic differences in aspect ratios between devices, it's important to take special care with how you design images in your website. For example, a full page background on a row might look great on a desktop device, but horrible on a mobile device. This might be because desktop devices are more suited to larger width images, while mobile is the exact opposite. You can set a different Page background per device in the site theme settings. It's recommended to use a wide background image for desktop, and a narrow one for mobile or tablet.

Slider Widget

As with the background image, the images you selected for the desktop version of the slider widget may not look as great for tablet or desktop. It's recommended to either:

Adjust the frame size for the slider to fit on mobile, or
Hide the slider on desktop, and create a version specifically for mobile instead.

Images and Icon Widget

The image widget's size is not automatically adjusted in the mobile version. It's important to check your mobile devices where the image widget is used to make necessary adjustments to fit.

Hover Effects on Mobile or Tablet

Compared to desktop devices, tablet and mobile devices do not have a hover effect at all. Any hover layout or option is disabled on tablet/mobile devices.

Maps Widget

The Map widget has device specific options for when it will show as a button or a map.

Contact Form Widget

Contact forms will always appear one input per line on mobile.

vcita Widget

The vcita online scheduling widget has an option to only show a button, on the device of your choosing.

Responsive Tablet (Classic Editor)

Note

This information is specific to the Classic Editor, and not relevant for Editor 2.0 (formerly known as the All-Flex Editor.).

Due to Apple’s release for iPads (iPadOS) , iPads display the same view as desktop. However, you can switch to Responsive desktop-tablet layout to ensure all customizations are visible on live sites.

Responsive layout shows the top navigation header on larger desktops and switches automatically to the hamburger menu header when the screen size is 1024px and below. The small screen layout may be customized, if needed.

Note

Most sites will automatically have this feature enabled and the toggle noted below will not be available.
For sites that this hasn't been toggled on, once toggled on, the option to toggle it off will be removed.
The mobile view of a site created in the classic editor, including the header, is determined by the device used, not by the size of a browser window. As a result, resizing your desktop browser to simulate a mobile viewport will not accurately represent how the site or header looks on actual mobile devices. To see the true mobile presentation of the site, including the header, it is best to view them directly on a mobile device.

To use responsive site layouts:

In the side panel, click Theme .
Click Site Layout .
Under Desktop click the Responsive Layout toggle. You have the following options:

Select a site layout for above 1024 px.
Select a site layout for 1024px and below.

After switching to responsive site layouts, you can switch views in the top navigation to show Large Desktop (above 1024px), Small Desktop/Tablet (1024px and below), and Mobile.

Important Notes about Responsive Tablet

Following is additional information about the responsive tablet:

CSS is the same for both Large Desktop and Small Desktop/Tablet breakpoints, and you will not see a Tablet CSS.
Transitions are smoother and not based on User Agents.
If you have hidden elements on your site, make sure they are visible before turning on Responsive Layout. To fix, turn Responsive Layout off, unhide all hidden elements. Then you can turn Responsive Layout on and re-hide any hidden elements.
Personalization no longer shows a tablet device. Selecting desktop also affects tablet views.
Note the following tablet customizations automatically display the desktop layout, and there is no need to customize them:
Photo gallery layouts
Tablet personalization rules
Animations

Email Settings - Hotlist

Thu, 30 Oct 2025 11:01:31 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - Learn how to make changes to your Hotlist email.

Email Settings - Order Confirmation

Wed, 29 Oct 2025 11:05:43 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - Learn how to make changes to your Order Confirmation email.

Email Settings - Styling

Tue, 28 Oct 2025 11:10:07 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - Learn how to make changes to the styling of your system emails.

Launching Your Site Checklist

Wed, 22 Oct 2025 11:24:21 GMT

Launching Your Site Checklist

Building a site is a project. A project where you are often working with a designer, content writer, and developer all at the same time. It is no easy task to juggle the spacing you wanted to adjust, the logo you need to re-upload, the contact number you had to change and more. To make sure everything is in place, refer to our list below.

Template

The work on your site starts with selecting a template. A lot of creative design work was already done by our specialists. The templates come with consistent styling from images and layouts to spacing and line-heights. There are still some extra steps you can take to make sure the template functions efficiently.

Layouts

Your template includes the matching header, footer and navigation, but you have a multitude of options to change it. Depending on why you created a site, you can pick a social media focused header, a call-to-action buttons based header and so on. You can have different layouts between desktop, tablet and mobile views.

To change the layout of your site, in the left panel, click Theme , and then click Site Layout .

Images and Colors

All of our templates have a vibrant color palette and rich array of images, so all that is left to do is re-color the site in your branding colors and pick the images that reflect your niche. When doing so, do not forget to make sure you have adapted all elements of the template to your style.

Make sure to visit every page and double-check that the color of the text elements and backgrounds are correct. Switch to desktop, tablet, and mobile view as you go.

To change images, in the left panel, click Theme , and then click Images .

Page Backgrounds

Replace the default page backgrounds that come with the template. You can set up individual background images per page, so make sure to change not only the main background image, but also individual page backgrounds.

To change the site background, in the left panel, click Theme , and then click Backgrounds .

Consistent Branding

If your site accompanies your business or organization and you already have a branding package, make sure the site reflects that.

Fonts

If your company also has printed materials, such as brochures, leaflets, or business cards for promotion, use the same fonts and colors of your site. When it comes to fonts, our rich built-in library will cover you for the majority of widely-used fonts. If the font is not available, you can use Google fonts or even embed your custom font on the site using @font-face technology.

To change the theme font, in the left panel, click Theme , and then click Text .

Logo

Make sure your logo is in the header of your site. For most templates, you will just need to update the default logo of the template with your own one. Check both the header and the footer of your site.

For some templates, you have the option to upload a larger image on desktop and a crispier, smaller version of it on mobile. This means that you need to update the logo separately for each device layout.

Favicon

Favicons are a great way to make your site stand out on your users’ browsers. It is always a great idea to upload a smaller version of your logo as a favicon. If your logo is too big, just upload a small icon that matches the general design of your site in colors.

To upload a favicon, in the left panel, click Settings , and then click Site Icons . Click +Image next to Favicon .

SEO Optimization

For every site that you build, Website Builder makes our best effort to have your pages load quickly. We automatically resize the images for your site and optimize the code. When publishing a site, the sitemap is submitted to Google and Bing to make sure it is indexed. Complete the following to continue optimizing your site.

To see all SEO settings, in the left panel, click SEO & Settings , and then click SEO .

Image Optimization

We automatically resize and compress images and show device-suited versions of the image. However, not every image can be optimized to the full potential by modern optimization tools. For instance, no compression tool will optimize the image that comes in 4000x7000 pixels. Since the majority of your users will not have such wide displays, simply upload smaller images.

Meta Tags for Search Engines and Social Media

To ensure the preview of your page on social media and search engine snippets look good, remember to set the following:

Site Title and Description
Social Media Image
Page Titles and Descriptions
Blog Post Descriptions

Alt Text

Search Engines cannot see the images on your site, but they do crawl the alt text you put on them. This is a great place to use some of the keywords for your site.

To add alt text to an image, click the image in the editor, and on the Content tab, type the Alt text in the field provided.

Alt text is especially relevant for pages with a lot of images, but not a lot of content. Text is the main way to communicate with search engines, so make sure not to miss such an opportunity.

Note

Make sure that the alt text matches the image. Otherwise, you will hurt your SEO instead of helping it.

Build Links

Before you publish your site, when your sitemap is not yet generated and Google did not yet crawl your site, is the best time to check that there are no broken links or missing pages.

URL Redirects

If you had a site before and are now are switching to the Website Builder,make sure your new site has a corresponding page for each of the pages on the old site to preserve the SEO ranking of the pages. If you want to get rid of certain pages, create a URL redirect from a missing page to an actual page on your site.

To configure URL redirects, in the left panel, click SEO & Settings , and then click URL Redirect . Click Add new redirect .

404 Errors

To create a custom 404 page, in the left panel, click SEO & Settings , and then click 404 Page .

SSL Certificate

Since July 2018, Google started to penalized sites without SSL certificates. SSL certificates are free and can be installed with one click. After you install the certificate, do not forget to force our visitors to open the site through HTTPS connections.

Promote Your Message

If you set out building a site with the goal of bringing more attention to your business or cause, put it in the spotlight with the help of our tools.

Call to Action Buttons

If you have a business or promo site, make sure to place call-to-action buttons in the header, footer, or homepage of your site for maximal exposure.

Personalization Rules

Place relevant links on the popups or notification bars through personalization rules. This way, you can make sure the hottest leads will definitely see your promo materials.

Contact Forms

It takes a lot of effort to deliver your message online, so make sure you hear the feedback! Do a quick test on your contact forms to make sure you receive the emails. For more information about contact forms, see Contact Forms.

Legal Aspects

Forgetting to add a legal page could potentially have far-reaching consequences. Ensure you have the following:

Cookie notification
Privacy page
Opt in fields on contact forms

Check the legal requirements of the country your target audience is from in order to customize the cookie notifications and privacy page.

System Requirements

Wed, 22 Oct 2025 11:04:09 GMT

System Requirements

Following is information about system requirements to use Website Builder platform.

Supported Browsers

Following are the supported browsers for the versions of the editor.

Desktop Version of the Editor

The desktop version of the editor is officially supported in the latest version of the following browsers:

Google Chrome
Mozilla Firefox
Microsoft Edge
Safari

Note

The editor and published sites are not supported in Internet Explorer.
Browsers built on Chromium version 99 and below will receive a 403 error when visiting sites.

Tablet Version of the Editor

The tablet version of the editor is officially supported in the latest version of the following browsers:

Google Chrome
Safari

Mobile Version of the Editor

The mobile version of the editor is officially supported in the latest version of the following browsers:

Google Chrome on Android
Safari on iOS

Desktop Version of Runtime

The desktop version of live sites are officially supported in the two most recent versions of the following browsers:

Google Chrome
Mozilla Firefox
Microsoft Edge
Safari

Tablet Version of Runtime

Modern tablets use the two most recent versions of the following desktop browsers:

Google Chrome
Mozilla Firefox
Microsoft Edge
Safari

Note

Modern tablets use desktop browsers, meaning some tablet browsers default to show the mobile version. To change this, enable Request Desktop Site in your browser settings.

Mobile Version of Runtime

The mobile version of live sites are officially supported in the two most recent versions of the following browsers:

Google Chrome
Safari

Supported Operating Systems (Mobile and Tablet)

Tablet Version of Editor

The tablet version of the editor is officially supported in the latest version of the following operating systems:

Android
iOS

Mobile Version of Editor

The mobile version of the editor are officially supported in the two most recent versions of the following operating systems:

Android
iOS

Browser Considerations

If an issue you are experiencing in a certain browser cannot be replicated in a different browser, make sure the main browser you are working with has been updated to the latest version.
Display may vary between browsers. For example, fonts do not always render in the same way between browsers. This is not something that can be controlled inside your editor and has to do with the ways browsers function.
Beta versions of supported browsers are not supported.
If there are issues with the editor in a certain browser, make sure they aren't caused by extensions that have been installed in the browsers.
In order for editor to function properly in the browser, JavaScript must be enabled.
TLS 1.2 and higher is supported.

Keyboard Shortcuts

Wed, 22 Oct 2025 10:33:11 GMT

Keyboard Shortcuts

Keyboard shortcuts are combinations of keys that perform certain tasks when pressed simultaneously. Usually, these tasks require the use of a mouse, such as right-clicking to copy a widget. Learning to use the editor's built in keyboard shortcuts can save you time, and make the process of editing your site much quicker.

When using a Mac, substitute Ctrl with the Command button. For example, to access Preview on a PC, type Ctrl+Alt+P. On Mac, type Command+Alt+P.

In-Editor Shortcuts

The following keyboard shortcuts are available in the editor:

Preview. Ctrl+Alt+P
Open Dev Mode. Ctrl+Alt+C
Open Original Site (if site is imported). Ctrl+O
Copy Element. Ctrl+C (while hovering over element).
Paste Element. Ctrl+V (Paste copied element above currently hovered/selected element).
Undo. Ctrl+Z
Redo. Ctrl+Y
Site backup. Ctrl+S

Text Editor Shortcuts

The following keyboard shortcuts are available when editing text:

Bold. Ctrl+B
Italicize. Ctrl+I
Underline. Ctrl+U
Align Text. Ctrl+R, E, L
Remove Text Formatting. Ctrl+0

Developer Mode Shortcuts

The following keyboard shortcuts are available in developer mode:

Find. Ctrl+F
Find and replace. Ctrl+F + Ctrl+F
Alt+Space. Enable suggestions while typing
Save. Ctrl+S
Duplicate selected line. Ctrl+Alt+UP
Move Line Up. Alt+Up
Go to line #. Ctrl+L
Toggle comment. Ctrl+/

Flex In-Editor Shortcuts

The following keyboard shortcuts are available in flex:

Duplicate. Ctrl+D
Copy. Ctrl+C
Paste. Ctrl+V
Undo. Ctrl+Z
Redo. Shift+Ctrl+Z
Move element backwards. Ctrl+[
Move element forward. Ctrl+]
Move element freely on the canvas. Keyboard arrows, 1px per click
Move element freely on the canvas. Keyboard arrows+Shift, 10px per click
Site backup. Ctrl+S
Open Search. Ctrl+K
Preview Mode. Ctrl+P
Publish. Ctrl+Shift+P
Open widgets panel. Ctrl+Shift+F
Open site preview with current device. Ctrl+Alt+T

Progressive Web App (PWA)

Wed, 22 Oct 2025 10:06:48 GMT

Progressive Web App (PWA)

A Progressive Web App (PWA) is a web application that enables you to deliver a native app-like experience to users on mobile so that they have a fast, smooth, and engaging experience with your site.

PWAs load instantly, respond quickly to user interactions, and feel like a natural app. They do not need an app store for installation and enable users to re-enter the site instantly, even when a device is offline.

Note

PWAs can only be enabled on HTTPS sites. For more information, see SSLs (HTTPS) .
PWAs are supported on Chrome for Android. If PWA is enabled, the browser automatically asks the user if they want to add the site in the home screen.
You can also add PWA on IOS devices running version 11.3. However, since the "add to screen" automatic message by the browser is not yet available, users will have to add PWA manually. For more information on how to do this, visit Apple Support .

To activate PWA feature:

In the left panel, click SEO & Settings , and then click Progressive Web App (PWA) .
Click the Activate Progressive Web App toggle.
(Optional) Click the Serve pages markup from cache first toggle. This setting changes our service worker caching strategy (for runtime sites); instead of checking in the network first, it will get the page first from cache (as long as it is not republished). Cache first (toggle on) can be best if you know the site and its assets are not going to change much, as it will quickly load the cached information and more easily be available to customers offline. Using network first (having that toggle off) is best when the data must be as fresh as possible.
(Optional) Click the Enable mobile browsers to prompt to install the site as an app . When this is toggled on, you can configure the following settings:

Name. This is the name displayed on the splash screen and the “Add to home screen message.” It can be up to 60 characters long.
Short Name. This is the name used when there is not enough space to display the full name; for example, on the mobile home screen. This name can be up to 60 characters, but we suggest that you make it as short as you can.
Icon. This is the icon that appears on the mobile home screen and the splash screen when the app is loading. It must be at least 192 pixels width and in .png format.
Splash screen background color. This is the color that appears while the site is loading.

When a user accesses a site enabled with PWA from their mobile device, they will see an Add to Home screen button displayed below the site. Once added to the home screen, the icon will be displayed on their device for quick access to the site (similar to an app).

The user can now re-enter the site using this icon, even if the device is offline.

Core Web Vitals Best Practices

Wed, 22 Oct 2025 10:00:56 GMT

Core Web Vitals Best Practices: Site Performance and Optimization

The recommendations below will not only assist with Core Web Vitals but also enhance the overall SEO health of the site.

Note

Related resources:

Move heavy/custom widgets to below the fold

Custom widgets aren’t always slow to load, but if they require calls to external APIs or 3rd party tools, they may be. Heavy widgets are widgets that, by definition, require external API calls or 3rd party code to load fully. For example, the Map widget, Twitter feed widget, Video widget, any Facebook widget, etc.

Note

The "fold" of a website refers to the portion of the webpage that is visible without scrolling. It's the content you see right away when you first load the page. Anything you have to scroll down to see is considered "below the fold."

Avoid having multiple custom/heavy widgets on the same page

Custom and heavy widgets can have different load times from each other, and this can decrease LCP and overall page loading experience.

Tip

For custom widgets, ask your developer to improve how content is rendered and fetched with techniques such as async loading, fetching data off the main thread, and more.

Use no more than 2 font families on your sites

Fonts are automatically downloaded and embedded within the HTML of your page (up to a max of 50KB of fonts), speeding up how fast your browser displays fonts. This helps to prevent CLS and font flashes commonly seen on loading pages.

Tip

Also try to keep the number of weights to a minimum.

Only load a single image above the fold and place background videos below the fold

Images and background videos are typically the largest asset that browsers download on a site. When there are a lot of images, large images (ones that take up most of the page width) or videos, there can be a delay in LCP and an increase in CLS because the browser has to download the elements before they can be rendered.

If you do need multiple images above the fold, reduce the size of the image to that of an icon or thumbnail.

Tip

Move background videos and slideshows lower on the page. If you want to use a slideshow, limit it to 3 images or less.

Summary

Core Web Vitals can have a big impact on how sites are ranked by Google, and promise to do great things for user experience.

Core Web Vitals FAQs

Wed, 22 Oct 2025 08:18:47 GMT

Core Web Vitals FAQs

Lighthouse and Core Web Vitals Comparison

Tue, 21 Oct 2025 16:08:50 GMT

Lighthouse and Core Web Vitals Comparison

Google’s Lighthouse and Core Web Vitals are two different methods for measuring your website's performance and user experience. There are several differences in how Lighthouse and Core Web Vitals measure website performance, what metrics are used, what constitutes a passing score, and which tools you can use to run each report. This article compares the two approaches so you can make an informed decision about when to use each one.

How Performance Scores are Determined

Lighthouse

Lighthouse measures the performance, accessibility, SEO, and other best practice quality indicators of your web pages. To do this, Lighthouse uses lab data that is generated in a fixed testing environment. This lab data is used to simulate visits to your web page with a fixed CPU speed, 3G internet connection, and a Moto G4 mobile device. The use of a slightly underpowered CPU, slower internet connection, and less powerful smartphone reflects the real world conditions of users visiting your site.

Core Web Vitals

Core Web Vitals are a set of three metrics that attempt to measure and summarize the overall user experience of visiting your web pages by focusing on loading speed, interactivity, and visual stability. These metrics use field data, which is real-world data anonymously sent to Google from actual users when they visit a specific page.

We recommend that you rely on Core Web Vitals data as much as possible because real-world aggregated data is a better indicator of performance than point-in-time data based on a controlled set of lab conditions. And, the score you receive on Core Web Vital's metrics can make a difference in how prominently you appear within Google’s own search engine results pages for your targeted search queries.

Metrics and Scores

Both Lighthouse and Core Web Vitals use different metrics to generate their reports. Each set of metrics have optimal thresholds that dictate whether or not a page is considered passing.

Lighthouse

Lighthouse uses six different metrics to generate its report:

Largest Contentful Paint (LCP). Measures your page’s loading time and checks how long it takes for the largest above the fold element (image, text, and so on) to load. The optimal threshold is less than 2.5 seconds.
Cumulative Layout Shift (CLS). Measures the visual stability of a page load by focusing on unexpected layout shifts not caused by a user interaction. Sometimes when a page loads, elements shift around unexpectedly and frustrate users. For example, you might load a page and start reading a paragraph, only for an image to load that pushes the paragraph down the page. The optimal threshold is less than 0.1 layout shift.
Total Blocking Time (TBT). Total amount of time that a page is blocked from responding to user input. These inputs include mouse clicks or keyboard strokes. The optimal threshold is less than 0.2 seconds.
First Contentful Paint (FCP). The time elapsed until the first piece of content loads on the page. The content must come from the page’s DOM (Document Object Model). The DOM includes standard page content like images and text. The optimal threshold is less than 1.8 seconds.
Speed Index. Measures the entire loading process for the visual parts of a web page by capturing a video of the page loading and checking the difference between frames. The total duration measures how long it takes to go from a blank screen to a complete page. The optimal threshold is less than 3.4 seconds.
Time to Interactive (TTI). How long it takes the page to become fully interactive so that it reliably responds to user inputs. The optimal threshold is less than 0.1 seconds.

The Lighthouse performance report converts raw scores into standard 0-100 values then uses a weighted average to calculate your website’s total performance score. A passing score for any individual metric or the total performance score is anything above 90.

Core Web Vitals

Core Web Vitals measures CLS and LCP in the same way as Lighthouse and uses the same optimal thresholds. In addition, Core Web Vitals also measures First Input Delay (FID), which measures the time it takes from the user's first interaction, such as clicking a button, until the browser responds to that action. The optimal threshold is less than 0.1 seconds. FID is similar to Lighthouse’s TBT metric and has the same optimal threshold. For a page on your website to be considered passing it needs to achieve the optimal threshold for each metric at the 75th percentile.

Note

Core Web Vital scores are calculated using aggregated field data from many users over a 28-day period. This 28-day period is important to remember because if you score badly and then make some improvements, you’ll need to wait for Google to identify those improvements.

Tools

If you want to get a Lighthouse report, the most user-friendly ways are to use the Lighthouse extension for your Chrome web browser or to visit Google's Web Dev Portal and enter your URL. Other options include Chrome Dev Tools , Page Speed Insights , and using the command line.

A number of tools measure Core Web Vitals, including Chrome User Experience Report (CrUX), Google Search Console , and PageSpeed Insights . The quickest and simplest way to check any URL’s Core Web Vitals is through PageSpeed Insights.

Site Configuration Files

Tue, 21 Oct 2025 15:29:36 GMT

Site Configuration Files

All published Website Builder sites include a default sitemap.xml, robots.txt, and llms.txt files. Custom files, including other types, can also be uploaded to the root of your website for further customization.

 Warning

As of December 2023, Google deprecated the ability for sitemaps to be automatically submitted. To ensure prompt indexing, it's advised to manually submit your sitemap using Google Search Console. Alternatively, consider using our app designed to assist with this process, Google Search Console.

Default Sitemap.xml and Robots.txt Files

To access the sitemap.xml and robots.txt files:

Open your published URL and add the desired file (either sitemap.xml or robots.txt ) at the end (e.g., https://www.example.com/sitemap.xml or https://www.example.com/robots.txt ) .
Enter the modified URL into your browser.
Save the file or link as needed.

Note

Only published sites have these files.
These files are note able to be edited, though a custom one can be uploaded, see the section, Replace Default Files, in this article for more information.

Sitemap.xml Specific Information

A sitemap lists all of the URLs for your site, including eCommerce category pages and product URLs (for both native and third-party stores), as well as blog posts and dynamic page records.

The sitemap cannot be edited, though a custom one can be uploaded.

Warning

As of December 2023, Google deprecated the ability for sitemaps to be automatically submitted. To ensure prompt indexing, it's advised to manually submit your sitemap using Google Search Console (for more information, please visit Improve your performance on Google Search ). Alternatively, consider using our app designed to assist with this process, Google Search Console.

Note

Only published sites have sitemaps.
Pages that are set to not index (located in the page's SEO settings) will not appear in the sitemap. If the entire site is set to not index in the site's settings, the sitemap will be empty (see Site Settings for more information).
If your sitemap contains non-secure URLs (HTTP instead of HTTPS), consider requiring visitors to use a secure connection (HTTPS).To enable the Force visitors to use secure connection (HTTPS) setting, in the side panel, click SEO & Settings , and then click the Site SSL tab. For more information on SSLs, see SSLs (HTTPS ) .

LLMS.txt File

A LLMS.txt file is a simple text file that provides LLMs, such as ChatGPT, with a structured overview of a website's most important content. The file includes a list of the site's URLs, along with brief descriptions, making it easy for LLMs to scan and understand.

Website Builder creates and updates a LLMS.txt file for every site that is published. The file is in markdown format, and contains a list of pages that are available in the site, with descriptions and URLs. All sites will have this via www.sitedomain.com/llms.txt.

The following pages are included in the file:

Regular pages
Dynamic pages
Blog posts
Translated pages
Native store category pages
Native store product pages

Replace Default Files or Add Custom Files

To override the default files (sitemaps and robots.txt files), ensure the Source URL matches the file names (sitemap.xml and robots.txt) exactly. Supported file types include .xml, .txt, and .json.

Warning

Keep in mind the Website Builder platform does not validate custom files, so even if a file is corrupt, it will still be served.

Note

Only site configuration file types are supported (for example .txt and .xml).

From SEO Settings

To upload from the SEO Settings:

In the side panel, click SEO & Settings and select SEO & Settings .
Locate the Custom sitemap, robots.txt, and other files section, then click Go to URL Redirect (you will be directed to the URL Redirect screen with the File option pre-selected).
In the Source URL field , enter the file path you would like the file to have. For example, if you enter in ads.txt , the path for it on the live site will be www.mydomain.com/ads.txt.
Click + Upload file .
Ensure the Redirect type is set to 2xx OK (Redirect) and click Add .
Publish or republish your site to make the changes live.

From URL Redirects

To upload in URL redirects:

In the side panel, click SEO & Settings and select URL Redirect .
Click Add New Redirect .
In the Source URL field , enter the file path you would like the file to have. For example, if you enter in ads.txt , the path for it on the live site will be www.mydomain.com/ads.txt.
Select the File option. If you don't see the File option on the URL Redirect screen, access it initially from the SEO settings and upload a file. Once done, you can continue uploading additional files directly from the URL Redirect screen.
Click + Upload file .
Ensure the Redirect type is set to 2xx OK (Redirect) and click Add .
Publish or republish your site to make the changes live.

Revert Back to Website Builder Generated Files

If you wish to revert to using Website Builder's default sitemap or robots.txt files:

In the side panel, click SEO & Settings and select URL Redirect .
Locate the file you want to remove and click Delete .
Publish or republish your site for the changes to take effect.

IndexNow

Tue, 21 Oct 2025 14:37:55 GMT

IndexNow

Website Builder sites automatically support and use IndexNow , a protocol that ensures your website’s most recent content is immediately crawled and indexed by supporting search engines instead of passively waiting for web crawlers to find it. Currently, Bing and Yandex support this new protocol. Without IndexNow, it can take anywhere from several hours to several weeks for search engines to index new or updated content. While waiting for search engines to index your content, it will not be discoverable via search. This delay can cause you to miss out on opportunities to engage with your online audience.

Note

Just because your content is indexed faster doesn’t mean you’ll rank better in search results. You still need to create original, high-quality, SEO-optimized content and follow best practices for web content if you want to achieve the top positions in search engine results pages.

How IndexNow Works with Website Builder Sites

You don’t need to do anything to begin leveraging the benefits of IndexNow, your Website Builder site will do it for you automatically. This saves you time and makes it accessible for those who do not have the technical skills to interact with IndexNow’s API.

Website Builder supports the IndexNow API for you by:

Discovering which pages have updated content and submitting only those to the IndexNow API.
Fulfilling IndexNow security measures by generating a unique token per website and submitting that to search engines. This ensures that no one can spoof updated content for your site.
Automatically submitting updated content on your site.

If you don’t want your context indexed by search engines, you can turn off indexing in the page settings of each page. For instructions on how to do this, see Single Page Management .

General Data Protection Regulation

Tue, 21 Oct 2025 14:30:58 GMT

General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) Compliance Information and Resources

What is the GDPR?

The General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) is a regulation in the European Union (EU) designed to strengthen and unify privacy and personal data protections for all individuals within the EU.

Who does the GDPR affect?

The GDPR applies to organizations located within the EU, as well as organizations located outside of the EU that offer goods or services to, or monitor the behaviour of, individuals within the EU. It applies to all companies processing and holding the personal data of individuals residing in the EU regardless of the company’s location.

‘Personal data’ is any information that can be used to directly or indirectly identify a person. It can be anything from a name, photo, email address or bank details to posts on social networking websites, medical information or a computer IP address.

Website Builder & the GDPR

Website Builder takes seriously personal data protection and the right to privacy and welcomes the GDPR and its missions of strengthening personal data protection and privacy.

How has Website Builder addressed GDPR compliance?

Commitment to privacy & data security is a long-term commitment, not a one-off project. Website Builder remains committed to data security and privacy and we will help provide the tools you need in an ever-changing landscape of regulation and real-world threats.
We have enabled the following new features:
You can now easily create a Privacy page to enable you to communicate information about processing the personal data of your users in a clear and transparent way.
You can create a Privacy page to enable you to communicate information about processing the personal data of your users in a clear and transparent way.
Your contact forms can now include convenient to collect consent from site visitors to process their form responses.
The right of your users to be forgotten can be realized with the help of the form responses tab in your site dashboard.
Minimization of data collections and pseudonymization of analytic data.

Is Website Builder DPF Certified?

Yes, Website Builder is DPF certified.

Core Web Vitals

Tue, 21 Oct 2025 13:56:16 GMT

Core Web Vitals

Google’s Core Web Vitals are experience metrics that measure how well a site is performing and how good of a user experience it provides. In June 2021, Google released an improvement to their user experience metrics called Core Web Vitals that focus on loading speed, interactivity, and visual stability. These Core Web Vitals are: Cumulative Layout Shift (CLS), First Input Delay (FID), Largest Contentful Paint (LCP), Interaction To Next Paint (INP), and Time to First Byte (TTFB).

Core Web Vitals are important because they are a common set of metrics and benchmarks that are used across many Google services and have a direct impact on search rankings. By measuring and optimizing your site for Core Web Vitals you also improve the overall user experience of your site.

The Core Vitals

CLS

CLS measures the visual stability of the content on a page by counting the sum total of all individual layout shift scores for every unexpected layout shift that occurs during the entire lifespan of the page. A layout shift happens when an element changes from its starting position due to resources loading later in a page's lifecycle and pushing content below it down the page. For example, a user is online shopping and right as they try to click the add to cart button an ad loads above the button and pushes it down. This layout shift causes the user to accidentally click the ad instead of the add to cart button. A low CLS can help ensure your users have a positive experience on your site and can quickly accomplish what they came to do.

FID

FID measures the delay in interactivity and responsiveness. This is the time from when the user interacts with your content by clicking a link, tapping a button, or pressing a key to when the browser processes that interaction. FID only counts the delay, not the time it takes to process the event or how long it takes the UI to update. A delay typically happens because the browser is busy loading the rest of the page content and cannot respond to the user’s interaction yet. A short FID can help increase the chance that the user remains on the page and interacts with your content. Currently, most websites perform well on FID measurement.

Note

Zooming and scrolling are not measured for FID.

LCP

LCP measures the time it takes for the largest visible element on the page to load relative to when the page first started loading. As different elements load, the LCP can change. The browser stops measuring LCP when the user begins interacting with the page, since interactions typically change what is visible to the user. A fast load speed can reassure the user that the page is useful because they are able to quickly begin viewing content.

Elements that can be the LCP:

<img>
<image> inside an <svg>
<video>
Element with a background image loaded using the url() function instead of a CSS gradient
Block-level elements that contain text nodes or other inline-level text elements children

Note

As Google expands their Core Web Vitals, they have indicated <svg> and <video> might be included as elements used to measure LCP in the future.

INP

INP refers to how the page responds to specific user interactions that are programmed into the overall INP metric measured by Google Chrome’s lab data and field data. INP is designed to provide a representation of the overall interaction delay of a page. It does this by working from a sample of the single longest interactions that happen when a user visits the page. For example, if a page has less than 50 total interactions, INP takes into consideration the interaction that has the absolute worst delay. The measurement of INP is a representation of how long a user has to wait in order to interact with the entire page. This is a direct contrast to FID (First Input Delay).

INP is concerned with the following types of interactions:

Any mouse click of an interactive element.
Any tap of an interactive element on any device that includes a touchscreen.
The press of a key on a physical or onscreen keyboard.

Google’s web.dev documentation explains that a good INP value is around 200 milliseconds or less.

Note

INP replaced FID in March 2024. If you receive a notice from Google reporting your site has INP issues, please review your site to ensure it is following the current best practices

TTFB

TTFB measures the length of time that it takes for the first byte to be transferred by the server.

TTFB has long been suspected as a driver of significant performance gains, which means that it’s a priority that SEO professionals should be optimizing as part of their SEO process.

How to Assess Core Web Vitals

When measuring Core Web Vitals you can use lab or field data. Lab data is gathered from tools that simulate a page load and interaction. Field data is gathered from real user’s interaction with your website. It is recommend to use real-world metrics such as Real User Monitoring (RUM) instead of lab tests so that you can optimize your site more accurately. Google’s CRuX data set can be used to measure your website and is a great choice because it is what Google uses to measure Core Web Vitals.

Both CLS and LCP can be measured in the lab or in the field. FID can only be measured in the field because a real user needs to interact with the content. We strongly recommend you test every page on your website.

The following tools can be used to measure Core Web Vitals:

 Field tools:

Chrome User Experience Report (recommended)
PageSpeed Insights (only if there's enough CRuX data ; if there isn't, this is a lab tool)
Search Console (Core Web Vitals report)
Web-vitals JavaScript library

Lab tools:

Note

Google's WebPage Test tool is no longer an industry recommended tool.

Ideal Scores

For a page on your website to be considered passing it needs to achieve all the following metrics at the 75th percentile:

CLS. 0.1 layout shift score or less
FID. 0.1 seconds or less
LCP. 2.5 seconds or less

Currently, only 20% of websites pass all three metrics.

Site Performance and Optimization

Tue, 21 Oct 2025 13:09:40 GMT

Site Performance and Optimization

Site speed, loading times, and performance scores are elements that contribute to SEO in a couple of ways. While these factors are a small fragment that search engines consider, their impact on site visitors is potentially more significant. Faster websites tend to reduce bounce rates and increase engagement, which are key factors in SEO. Therefore, although search engines like Google may not rank sites based on these optimizations, the improved visitor interaction they facilitate can positively impact search engine rankings.

Testing for Optimization

Testing for optimization can be challenging. Most testing tools use a simulated environment. While these tools can give an idea of what visitors might experience, they don't provide real-world data. It's important to understand that the results from these tools are approximations and may not fully reflect actual user experiences. Therefore, scores from these tools may not accurately predict how SEO is being affected.

For the most accurate assessment, complement simulated testing with real-world performance monitoring using tools like Google Search Console.

The most accurate testing tools using simulated environments are Google’s Lighthouse and PageSpeed Insights. Both tools leverage Lighthouse technology to provide detailed performance insights.

Note

Google's WebPage Test tool is no longer an industry recommended tool.

Google's PageSpeed Insights and Lighthouse

While not the primary focus, we prioritize real-world performance, our sites can score highly on Google's PageSpeed Insights and Lighthouse if best practices are followed. This is partly because these tools test some of the same metrics as Google's Core Web Vitals.

These tools examine many technical details of how webpages are built and check to see if they adhere to best practices that enable quick loading. The most important aspect these tools evaluate is how the website code is structured. Google ensures that the code is organized in a way that allows the browser to load the content as quickly as possible.

How Optimization is Monitored

If there isn't a tool that tests in a real-world environment, how is optimization monitored? This is where Google's Core Web Vitals come into play. Once a site has around 2,000 unique visitors in a month, a set of metrics are tracked to evaluate performance.

Because it uses real-world data, Core Web Vitals is the most accurate method for monitoring optimization. This approach provides insights based on actual user experiences, making it a reliable indicator of site performance.

Website Builder focuses on these metrics not just for scoring purposes, but because they best reflect what site visitors are experiencing.

Built-In Optimization

Out-of-the-box, Website Builder sites are developed for optimization, focusing on real-world interactions and, ultimately, Google's Core Web Vitals.

While Website Builder sites can score well with tools that test in a simulated environment, these simulations are not the primary focus of our optimization efforts. Although these tools can provide useful information, they may not accurately reflect the built-in optimization.

The out-of-the-box optimizations serve as the building blocks for Website Builder sites. While we provide a solid foundation, the way sites are designed and built can significantly impact their optimization. For instance, placing a video at the top of a page or adding scripts in the head HTML can affect site performance.

Optimizing is an ongoing practice at Website Builder. We will continue to stay up to date and implement changes to ensure continuous improvements.

What Can Not Be Changed

While Website Builder strives for the most optimized sites, some components cannot be changed due to the nature of drag-and-drop editors.

These components should have minimal impact on site performance.

The components that are not able to be changed are:

Leverage browser caching
Minify HTML / CSS / JS
Optimize CSS delivery

FAQ and Troubleshooting

My page speed or loading time is slow. How do I fix it?

While Website Builder works hard to ensure sites perform at their best, you should be aware of the implications of adding scripts and custom code to your site as they have the potential to decrease page speed.

There are ways to avoid performance costs when adding scripts. We recommend learning about the scripts you add to your site in order to optimize its performance. Google has helpful resources, such as: web.dev .

How do I Increase Google's PageSpeed Insights or Lighthouse?

While Website Builder wishes every website we run would always rank high, it’s not something we can promise. This is because our customers can add their own code, content and designs to the website, so we don’t have full control over what they can or can’t add. For this reason, there are some scenarios in which Website Builder websites will not score in the high 90s.

Below is a list of errors/issues we see Google PageSpeed reporting to us and solutions for fixing them.

Note

There are issues reported by Google that cannot be fixed:

Leverage browser caching
Minify HTML / CSS / JS
Optimize CSS delivery

Render-Blocking JavaScript and CSS in Above-the-fold Content

If you place a map element at the top of your website, a store front above the fold, custom code/script in the header, or embed a custom iframe into a Website Builder website above the fold.

Solution:

Move the map element to the bottom of the page.
Move the store element lower on the page.
Tip
Add an image and helpful text above the store element, so that the store itself is not in the "above the fold" area of the website.
Place the code in the body-end.html file or make sure the script is loaded asynchronously (see Note below).
Tip
To enable async on scripts, alter it as follows:
Old Code: <script src=”https://example.com/script.js”></scrip>
New Async Code: <script src=”https://example.com/script.js” async defer</script>
Please note, while we can offer suggestions, we are not able to assist with custom code.
Move embedded iframe lower down the page or remove it completely.

Images not Optimized

Images may not be optimized due to size or file type, which can negatively impact page speed.

Solution:

Website Builder’s image optimization works only on JPG and PNG images. If you are uploading a TIFF, GIF, or other image formats, Website Builder might not be able to optimize it. If this is the case, we recommend running the image through an image optimization tool. These tools can typically be found doing a quick search for "image compression tool".
Resize large images by downloading, resizing in photo editing software, and re-uploading

Warning

While Website Builder optimizes images to make sure they're compressed at a smaller size, Website Builder doesn't actually resize your image for you in the desktop version of your site. In these cases, you will need to resize in photo editing software and re-upload.

Third Party Website Not Leveraging Browser Cashing

If you include custom code in your website, it will often load from a 3rd party website. If this website does not enable caching, then Google will find this and recommend enabling browser caching.

Solution: Contact the third-party service to request that they implement this change on their server.

Page Too Large

If you have a lot of content on one page, it can load slowly even after we run the optimization tool on your site.

Solution: Consider using less images or dividing up your content and moving to other pages.

Why is Content I have Hidden Showing in Audits?

Website Builder is moving our websites to fully responsive design technology that uses CSS media queries to change the layout, hide content or display different elements based on screen size. This is standard across the web of how content is hidden for smaller or larger screen sizes.

When you hide a widget, section, or any content in the Website Builder editor on a specific device, we hide it using CSS Media Queries. What this means is that the HTML (although hidden on the website) still exists within the web page when a viewer looks at the content.

This can sometimes cause a problem where an audit tool that scans the website will identify this hidden content.

Why Hidden Content isn't an issue with search engines)

Google (and other popular search engines) are able to identify if certain content is hidden and not index it. Google uses a mobile-first index, where they crawl the website using a mobile device. So, you should make sure that the mobile layout has all of the content you expect Google to be able to index and discover.

 When Hidden Content is an Issue

If a deceptive tactic is used to hide content, it can be detrimental to SEO. An example of a deceptive tactic is placing repeated keywords on a site for the benefit of ranking and hiding them by setting the font size to 0 or camouflaging the text (making it the same color as the background) to make it not visible to the site visitor. Search engine algorithms are smart enough to recognize this and potentially penalize sites that use it.

This is a deliberate act carried out by a person, Website Builder technology would not do this and is not capable of it.

SEO: Key Concepts and Tools

Tue, 21 Oct 2025 09:44:37 GMT

SEO: Key Concepts and Tools

Search engine optimization (SEO) is the process of affecting the visibility of a website or a web page in a search engine's "natural" or "organic" search results. In general, the earlier and more frequently a site appears in the search results list, the more visitors it will receive from the search engine's users. SEO may target different kinds of searches, including image search, local search, video search, academic search, news search and industry-specific vertical search engines.

While SEO techniques and strategies need to adapt to the latest search engines algorithms, what makes up SEO should remain mostly consistent.

Note

Google now factors Core Web Vitals in their search engine ranking.

General SEO Overview

There are four components to SEO:

Content

This is what is visually able to be seen, your text as well as images (what visitors are able to see on your website).

Note

If content is hidden, it will still show up in the HTML of a site as there currently isn’t a way of removing it. Search engines should be aware of this and ignore hidden items (for instance if there are multiple H1 tags, but only one can be seen by visitors, search engines should only detect the visible H1).

Structure & Organization

How the site as a whole and the individual pages are organized and structured.

Pages . This would be the placement of heading tags and images, as well as the organization of the content on the page.
Heading tags . In technical terms, heading tags are headings and subheadings that are denoted as important text with HTML tags. There are six tags: H1-H6.
Whole site . This pertains to how the pages are organized and presented as well as how visitors will navigate your site. This also includes how and where internal links are utilized.

Back-end Information

What search engines see and potentially utilize. Following are some common backend elements:

Site title and description
Page titles and descriptions
Favicon
Page URLs
Keywords (search engines do not use meta keywords to impact website ranking; their use is optional)
Alt text
Sitemap
Schema
Page speed

There is a little bit of overlap here as some elements (such as a page title and URL) can technically be seen by visitors, but aren’t included on the actual site.

Search Engines Algorithm

Ultimately, all sites are at the discretion of these algorithms and they do change frequently. An SEO expert would be a great resource for recent updates and changes.

Built-in SEO Settings & Tools

Website Builder sites offer a variety of settings and tools for SEO. For more information, see the following articles.

Site SEO Settings

Single Page Management

Does Website Builder have better SEO than other platforms?

When it comes down to it, the platform does not matter as much for SEO as does the content. As long as you have access to the site header to insert any special SEO tags and easy access to the other SEO settings (such as the site title and keyword information), then any site you build regardless of if it is on the Website Builder or not has the potential to rank high in SEO.

FAQs and Troubleshooting

How do I Set SEO Terms?

There are two places to set site SEO terms, see the following articles for more information:

Tip

Search engines do not use meta keywords to impact website rankings. Their use is optional.

Is there somewhere where I can see a summary of my site's SEO?

Yes, the Site Overview has a summary of your site's SEO health.

Google results are showing a different Meta name or description than what is in the page or sites settings

Google may change meta information for search results at its discretion, in an effort to provide searchers with the most relevant information.

Built-in Site Optimization

Tue, 21 Oct 2025 09:23:40 GMT

Built-in Site Optimization

Out-of-the-box, Website Builder sites are developed for optimization, focusing on real-world interactions and, ultimately, Google's Core Web Vitals.

Optimizing is an ongoing practice at Website Builder. We continue to stay up to date and implement changes to ensure continuous improvements.

Here’s an overview of the built-in optimizations that occur automatically. While this list highlights many key processes, it's not exhaustive.

Image Optimization
Video Optimization
Lazy load images
Lazy load heavy widgets
CDN Static Resources
Defer non-critical CSS
Minify CSS
Extract Critical CSS
Avoid invisible text during font loading
Optimize WebFont loading and rendering
Reduce WebFont Size
Reduce JavaScript payloads with code splitting
Minify and compress network payloads
Preload critical assets to improve loading speed
Serve static assests with efficient cache policy
Preconnect to required origins
Initial server response time is short; <250 ms
Avoid multiple page redirects
Preload key requests
Avoids enormous network payloads (files larger than 5mb)
Minimize third-party usage
Third-party code blocked the main thread for 180 ms
Avoid large layout shifts
Use passive listeners to improve scrolling performance
WebP images (all images have a WebP generated version)
Brotoli compression
Continued improvements of lazy loading for new widgets
Improvement in how custom widgets load
Videos with auto compress
Moved nearly all assets to CDN
Concatenating CSS files (fewer requests)
Continued Critical CSS improvements

Site SEO Settings

Tue, 21 Oct 2025 09:10:05 GMT

Site SEO Settings

Search engine optimization (SEO) is the process of improving the visibility of a website or a web page in a search engine's un-paid search results. Sometimes this is called "natural" or "organic" traffic. The better your site's SEO, the more likely it is to rank well in search results.

Note

Google now factors Core Web Vitals in their search engine ranking.

Improve your site’s visibility to search engines and boost organic traffic by filling in the site’s SEO fields. This makes it easier for search engines to know what your sites are about so they can be displayed higher on search result pages (SERPs).

To edit your overall site's SEO:

In the side panel, click SEO & Settings , and then click SEO . You have the following options:

No index for the entire site. Tell search engines not to crawl your site so it won't appear in search results.
Site meta title. This is displayed by search engines in their preview of your site. It is important for both SEO and social sharing. Try to limit this to 60 characters.
Site meta description. Give an overview of the content and information the site provides. Search engines uses this to display as a description for the site. Try to limit to 160 characters.
Note that it is best practice for each page of your site to have a unique title and description. For this reason, we recommend entering your page title and description individually in the Page Settings menu.
Site Keywords. These are terms related to your site (for example, pizza delivery, for a pizza shop). Separate keywords with a comma.
Note that search engines no longer use keywords to impact website ratings. All keyword usage should be considered optional.

No Index for the Entire Site

If you do not want your site or any of the pages to show in search results, set your site to No Index. This will tell search engines to not crawl your site.

Site Meta Title

This is the most important tag for your site SEO. This tag tells people and search engines what your page is about. The site title appears in the title bar of the web browser and in search engine results.

The title tag should contain important keywords to help search engines determine what your page is about. Also, real people will be reading the site title when deciding whether or not to click on a search result, so make sure to make it people-friendly.

This field can be connected to the Content Library via Connected Data. For more information, see Dynamic Content .

If you have a multi-language site, the site title cannot be translated.

Site Meta Description

The site description may be used by search engines when they display the content of your site on their results page. So, while this field is not important for search engine rankings, it is very important for compelling users to click through to the site.

This description is your opportunity to advertise site content to people and let them know exactly whether your page contains the information they are looking for. Create a concise and compelling description that people will want to click on.

This field can be connected to the Content Library via Connected Data. For more information, see Dynamic Content .

If you have a multi-language site, the site description cannot be translated.

Site Keywords

Major search engines do not use keywords to determine your site's ranking. In fact, on Bing.com, your site can be penalized for having overly "spammy" keywords. However, some smaller free directories and search engines may still use them to help categorize sites. All keyword usage should be considered optional.

Site SEO Hierarchy

It is important to keep in mind that the homepage SEO settings and any specific page SEO settings take precedence over the global site SEO settings. Global site SEO settings are used for any pages that do not have page-specific content in the SEO settings.

It can take up to 4-12 weeks for Google to update with any changes. You may be able to shorten the time frame by asking Google to crawl your site for changes (you must have your site added to Google Search Console ).

Lazy Loading and Fonts

Lazy loading of images and widgets improves page speed by loading images and widgets when they become visible on scroll. You can also enable an option to display default system fonts so visitors can start reading instantly while site fonts are loading.

Note that sites may blink when fonts are loaded.

To enable lazy loading and fonts, click the Lazy loading of images &widgets and Show default system fonts while custom fonts are loading toggles.

Privacy Settings

Tue, 21 Oct 2025 08:38:15 GMT

Privacy Settings

With the help of the Privacy Settings page, you can ensure that your users are well-informed about the type of data and cookies information collected when they visit your page. The main tools you can enable in Privacy Settings are the privacy page and cookie notification.

Privacy Page

A privacy page helps to make sure that site visitors understand what kind of information is being collected, how it is done, safeguarded, what the rights of the user and site owner are, and more.

The privacy page is not added to your sitemap.

To add or update the privacy page on your site:

In the side panel, click Settings , and then click Privacy Settings
Click the Customize Privacy Page toggle.
This will prompt you to customize the text of the Privacy page. If your site did not have a privacy page until now, one will be automatically created. If you are ready to change the default text of the page, click Customize .
For your convenience, all elements that need customization are highlighted in red.
Make the necessary changes and when you republish the site, the privacy page will be added or updated.
Any additional changes can be made at any time by clicking Customize .
The default link for the privacy page is [yourdomain]/privacy , but can be changed to any custom link in Privacy page URL field.

Note

To add this link to your site navigation, add a new page, set the new page to an external URL and paste the privacy page URL in the field provided. For more information, see Pages .

To revert the changes you have made on the default privacy page, click Reset to original page .

Cookie Notifications

Some countries, particularly those in the EU, require websites to notify visitors that they use cookies. This ensures your site is compliant with local law and can be polite to security-minded visitors.

To enable Cookie Notifications on your site:

In the left panel, click SEO & Settings , and then click Privacy Settings .
Click the Activate cookie notification toggle.
Every visitor to your site will see a notification that the information about their site visit is collected in the form of cookies.
Click Preview notification in order to preview the cookie notification on all devices. Where the cookie notification appears differs between editor versions:
Editor 2.0: The cookie notification is sticky and displays at the top of the page without covering page content.
Classic Editor: The cookie notification displays at the bottom of the page to assist in optimizing Core Web Vitals.
Note : Do not use the Notification Bar personalization action after enabling the Cookie Notification. The Cookie Notification takes priority and covers the notification bar.
You can choose to use default text for the cookie notification or customize it. The text field is free text and you may add any text or links to it.

Site cookies & tracking

Disable the use of cookies sent to site visitors by the site. This disables platform analytics, including Google Analytics and the default platform analytics, and also prevents personalization rules from adding cookies.

Note

Third-party services (or widgets that include them) such as Facebook and Twitter still set cookies, as they are required to load the widgets.

To disable the use of cookies, in the left panel click Settings , click Privacy Settings , and then click the Enable cookie tracking on this site toggle (by default, this setting is on).

Disabling tracking cookies will stop stats collection for your site, as well as any tracking code you have added (for example, Facebook tracking pixels).

Check the legal requirements in the country of your target audience regarding cookie notifications, the form of the notification, and relevant links to add to the text of the notification.

Security Measures

Tue, 21 Oct 2025 08:16:07 GMT

Security Measures

The list below represents Website Builder’s Technical and Organizational Measures as of July 29, 2024. Website Builder reserves the right to revise these technical and organizational measures at any time, without notice, so long as any such revisions will not materially reduce or weaken the protection provided for personal data that Company processes in providing its various services. Website Builder shall take the following technical and organizational security measures to protect personal data:

Organizational Measures

Information security governance
The company is ISO 27001:2022 certified.
The Company has appointed an Information Security manager who reports directly to a Company senior executive.
A set of information security policies and standards are documented, approved and regularly maintained.
Company has Cyber insurance.
An Incident Response plan is documented and routinely tested to assure an effective response and shortest recovery in case of a security incident.

HR control
All company's employees undergo routine security awareness training sessions.
Background checks for new employees are in use where lawful under local law.
Company's employees are committed to compliance with the principles of privacy protection and information security.
Employees with access to personal data are subject to confidentiality based on non-disclosure agreements (NDA) or equivalent clauses.
Upon termination, employee access rights are revoked and a reminder about their security obligations is made.

Information Security training and awareness
Company sets security related goals as company goals and acts to raise awareness to information security and privacy issues.
Periodic security and privacy training and awareness sessions are carried out for all employees.

Technical Measures

Network and cloud security
Company’s cloud environment is hosted and supported by AWS. For further information regarding physical security please refer to AWS security controls .
Data at rest and in transit is encrypted with industry grade encryption algorithms.
Use of firewalls (both network and application) and authentication systems.
Administrative access to cloud infrastructure is secured with strong passwords + 2FA enabled and remote access via VPN and SSH tunneling.
Full segregation of production network and cloud assets (VPC) from test and dev environments.
The use of intrusion detection systems, both network-based (NIDS) and host-based (HIDS).
All TCP outbound communication is TLS encrypted.

Confidentiality of processed personal data
Personal data stored and processed by the company is suitably secured according to best business practices commensurate with similar companies in similar industries.
Access to client personal data is limited to a need-to-know basis.
Strong Passwords are enforced, stored passwords are fully hashed and encrypted.
Anonymisation/Pseudonymisation of personal and/or sensitive data wherever applicable in accordance with technical or business needs to provide the service and/or comply with the law.
Company will not provide users’ PII and/or business data unless proper verification of the identity of the account owner is established.
Customer Data will only be stored for as long as Company and the Customer has an active agreement and as long as it serves the purposes for which the data was collected.
Secured process for deletion of personal data by the end of the retention period and/or on-demand.
Subprocessors undergo a vendor information security and privacy review based on the sensitivity of data and/or the personal data they access and are required to comply with vendor security requirements.

Security, Integrity, and availability of processing systems
Company laptops are equipped with anti-malware and anti-virus software.
Company laptops are equipped with a management solution which enforces the company's laptops security policy.
Regular vulnerability scans of open source packages (SCA), code (SAST), web-application (DAST), and cloud infrastructure.
Software updates process (i.e patch management) in place to fix identified vulnerabilities in a timely manner in accordance with risk assessment.
The use of logging, monitoring, and alerting systems.
Advanced systems to mitigate denial of service (DoS/DDoS) attacks.

Restore systems and data availability in the event of physical or technical incident
The use of high-availability cloud-computing zones in multiple geo-locations.
Disaster recovery (DR) procedures are well documented and regularly reviewed and updated.
Regular backups are securely stored in a separate cloud environment and could be restored as needed.

Evaluating the effectiveness of technical and organizational measures
Periodic and on-demand penetration-tests.

URL Redirects

Mon, 20 Oct 2025 15:31:00 GMT

URL Redirects

URL redirects enable you to efficiently redirect URLs on your site to specific pages, ensuring visitors land on the correct content and preserving your search engine ranking. This feature supports redirects to regular site pages, external URLs, and custom pages like dynamic pages and blog posts, using advanced techniques such as wildcards and variables for flexible redirection with a single URL rule.

Note

When migrating to Website Builder from a different platform or hosting service, redirects are not needed if the URLs remain unchanged. However, if there are any differences in the URLs, such as the old URL path being /about.html (a previous URL standard) and the new path being /about , a redirect will need to be added.
While redirects can be set up to redirect to a different domain, the original page must be on the same domain. For example, you cannot create a redirect from www.a-different-domain.com to www.your-Website Builder -site.com (the domain that is or will be assigned to your Website Builder site).

Considerations

Transitioning to a new responsive site may impact search engine rankings temporarily. Use URL redirects to redirect old page URLs to new responsive URLs, maintaining search engine visibility.
Existing pages take priority over redirects. If the old page's URL still exists, the redirect will not direct users to the new page.

Terminology

Wildcards : Define URL rules based on URL structure using single (*) or double (**) asterisks to match text segments. Example:
Single asterisk matches text between the current slashes. For example, /category/*/home will redirect to /category/xyz/home or /category/abc/home but it will not redirect to /category/b/c/home .
Double asterisk matches any text in multiple slashes. For example, /category/**/home will redirect to /category/b/c/home .
Variables : Define a URL rule applicable to multiple pages sharing a similar structure but different content. Placed between the source URL and target URL, they facilitate efficient redirection. For instance, this is useful when converting store product URLs from one format to another. Variables are enclosed within curly brackets {} in both the source and target URL rules, requiring identical spelling for proper functionality.

Example:

If you have an old store product URL of /product/p-23245-umbrella and the new URL is /product/umbrella , the source rule would be /product/p-*-{productname} and the target rule URL would be /product/{productname} .

Path : The part of the URL that identifies a specific resource within the domain. For example the path in www.domain.com/about is about .

Set Up URL Redirects

Before configuring a URL redirect, we advise removing the old pages from your site. If the old page or URL remains, the URL redirect will not function as intended.

To set up redirects:

In the side panel, click SEO & Settings and select URL Redirect .
Click Add New Redirect .
Enter the original path in the Source URL to redirect from.

Only the path is needed rather than the full URL. For example the path in www.domain.com/ about is about . If the full URL (for example www.domain.com/about ) is entered, the redirect will not work.
If needed, utilize wildcards (*) and variables ({}) such as {product} for efficient redirection across multiple pages. See the section in this article, Terminology for more information.

Choose the Destination:
Destination Page : Select a page within your Website Builder site.

Note

When redirecting to an anchor on the site, use the Destination - Custom URL option and place the full URL in the field (for example, www.domain.com/#about-us).

Destination - Custom URL : Enter an external or relative URL.

Note

If you used a variable in the Source URL field, use the same variable in this field too. The variable must be spelled the same way in both. You can also redirect to relative URL like blog and dynamic page, for example /blog/post- 1 .

Use the Redirect Type drop down menu to select the type of redirect. Following are the options:
301 redirect. Permanently moved (most common).
302 redirect. Temporarily moved.
Click Add .

Import Multiple Redirects from CSV

You can import multiple URL redirects from a CSV file, with each CSV file accommodating up to 200 redirect URLs and supporting the use of wildcards and variables. To access the option for uploading a CSV file to import multiple redirects, you must first add at least one single redirect.

To import multiple redirects from CSV:

Download the CSV template using this link provided (the template is also available in step 4): redirects-import-template-csv .

In the side panel, click SEO & Settings and select URL Redirect.
Click Import Multiple Redirects .
If your CSV file is ready, click Upload CSV . If you skipped step 1, download the template by clicking Download CSV template first to ensure the correct structure is followed.

 Note

The uploaded CSV should be in the same structure as our template, where the first column is the old URL and the new column is the new URL.

Select your CSV, and click Open .

CSV Upload Guidelines

The CSV should be in the same structure as our template, where the first column is the old URL and the new column is the new URL.
Only enter the URL path, not the full URL. For example, if the old URL is www.domain.com/about , enter /about . Similarly, for the destination page, if the URL is www.domain.com/about-us , enter /about-us
The URL path in the Destination page URL column must match exactly as it appears in the editor. If it does not, it will not be imported.
If a redirect for an old page already exists in the editor, the redirect in the CSV will overwrite it.
If the Redirect Type is left blank, it will default to 301.
Ensure that you use a standard URL path format (for example /about-us ).
A forward slash ( / ) can be placed in the Destination Page URL when redirecting to the homepage.
When redirecting to an anchor on the site, use the full URL (for example, www.domain.com/#about-us).

Example CSV:

Additional Tips

URL Redirects are beneficial for consolidating multiple sites into one responsive site or transitioning to a new domain. They are also crucial for relocating specific pages to a new domain
Ensure visitors understand redirection to avoid confusion or phishing concerns.

Redirect with URL Parameters

Specific URL redirects do not apply to URL parameters, which are components following the '?' or '#' in a URL. Website Builder treats URLs with parameters as identical, regardless of the parameter values.

For example, the URL http://www.sitename.com/page1 is considered the same as http://www.sitename.com/page1?url_referrer=blank by Website Builder 's system.

If you have configured a 301 redirect for "page1," it will also redirect any "page1" URL with a URL parameter. If you need a specific URL redirect for a URL parameter, please check with your DNS host to see if this is something they can set up for you.

URL Redirect Troubleshooting

What can cause a URL to not redirect?

Check the old URL to make sure there are no extra parameters or spaces at the end of the URL.

Why did I get the error message "You can only add deleted or non-existent pages"?

This might be due to a still existing page, a blog post, or even a popup. To check, enter the old URL at the end of the new URL.

Schema Markup

Mon, 20 Oct 2025 14:41:31 GMT

Schema Markup

Schema markup, as it’s used today on the web, enables robots that crawl your website to more easily understand the content on the page in a language that makes sense to them. Schema does this by giving a structured way for robots/crawlers to define the types of information and data present on the page.

Schema is an open-source initiative by the web community to help define commonly represented things with a structured, predictable system. You can read the many types of schema at schema.org .

Types of Schema Markup

There are 1000s of different types of schema that exist on the schema.org website. One common misconception about schema is that it’s intended to represent everything that could be searched for on the web—but this is not true. Schema.org only attempts to find a structured way of representing the most common things that are used or searched for on the web.

The best way to figure out what types of schema you should use is on the search gallery pages of Google and Bing . The most common ones are:

Local business/organization : This tells Search Engines facts about the business, such as hours they’re open, address, phone numbers and more. Note that the builder only generates schema for one location. If you need to add multiple locations, disable the generated schema and add it manually.
FAQs : A list of questions and answers about the website or content on the page.
Product : This is great for eCommerce websites, where products are marked up with the price, quantity in stock, reviews and other important details.
Breadcrumbs : Breadcrumbs give search engines a better way to understand how a specific page fits into the overall structure of the site.

We recommend only implementing schema that is supported by search engines. This recommendation comes from the fact that you can easily waste hours implementing schema for 100s of things across a site—but that delivers little value overall. If you focus on what search engines support, you will be saving time and effort.

Add Schema Markup to Your Site

The following four steps need to be taken to implement schema markup on your site:

Generate the schema markup.
Embed the schema markup on that specific page.
Test it with Google or Bing structured data testing tool.

Schema markup is added to your sites business information. If you would like to review it, click Content in the side panel, then select Business Info .

1. Generate Schema Markup

There are many tools that you can use to generate the schema markup for your page. The following are a few different tools you can use to generate your schema markup.

Google's Structured Markup Helper . This tool allows you to choose the type of schema you want to create and then helps you visually select the data from the webpage you want to grab it from. This is great if the website is already live and you want to simply select the data on the website. That being said, it is a bit clunky to use.
Merkle's Technical SEO Schema Generator . This is one of the best tools to use. You can quickly select the type of schema you want to generate and then it’s easy to use text fields to fill in that data.
Rank Ranger's Schema Generator . This is another simple tool to generate schema quickly by entering a range of text input boxes.

Note

There are different ways to represent schema such as RDFa, Microdata, and LD+JSON. We recommend focusing on LD+JSON because it is the easiest to read and update, as well as as the most modern solution.

To generate the schema for your page:

Go to the schema generator of your choice. For this example, we are using Merkle's Technical SEO Schema Generator .
Select the type of schema markup you want to generate from the drop-down. For example, Local Business.
Complete all fields listed, and then click Copy in the top right corner.

2. Embed Schema Markup on a Page

To embed the schema markup on a page in your site:

In the side panel, click Pages .
Next to the page you want to add the schema markup, click the Settings icon, and select SEO .
Click or scroll to Header HTML , and paste your schema markup in the box provided.
Republish the site to make sure the updated schema is live.

Warning

The schema markup should only be added to the pages where the content that you used to create the schema is represented. Adding schema to every page of the site can confuse search engines as to what the schema is actually representing.

3. Test Schema Markup

After you’ve added the schema and republished the site, you should test your schema markup.

To test your schema markup, go to Google’s Structured Data testing tool , type the exact page URL , and then click Run Test . The test returns the exact schema that Google sees when it crawls your page.

Facebook Tracking Pixels

Mon, 20 Oct 2025 14:06:11 GMT

Facebook Tracking Pixels

You can add Facebook Tracking Pixels to your responsive site to track events. Create your Facebook Tracking Pixel code in the Facebook Pixel tab .

Add Facebook Tracking Pixel

To access the Body end HTML section, in the left panel, click Settings , and then click Head HTML .
Paste the <script> part of the code provided by Facebook into the Body end HTML section, and then click Save . The code should look similar to the one below.

Note that all of the above code is just an example - do not copy this directly into your site. Please be sure to obtain the correct code from Facebook Pixel Code.

Paste the <noscript> part of the code provided by Facebook into the Body end HTML section as well, and then click Save .

Considerations for Facebook Tracking Pixels

Similar to Google Tag Manager, Facebook recommends to place the noscript code in the beginning of the body section. This is a workaround they suggests to get around limitations of old web browsers which do not load header code.
Website Builder has completed extensive testing and the body-end.html section of developer mode works for adding the noscript code.

Warning

Consent management apps are not able to prevent code from running prior to consent when the code is placed in the header HTML. This is because Website Builder optimizes the structure and order of how content loads, based on performance best practices on the site. We place scripts and CMP banners lower on the page, in order to improve the performance of primary content. Because of this, it is recommended to place code in the body-end when using a consent management app.

SSLs (HTTPS)

Mon, 20 Oct 2025 13:53:01 GMT

SSLs (HTTPS)

Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) or Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure (HTTPS) provides a secure connection to your website, ensuring data integrity during transfer and building visitor trust. All websites can obtain an SSL certificate using Let's Encrypt, an open-source Certificate Authority offering free certificates. To generate an SSL certificate, your website must have a successfully pointed domain.

 Note

There is not a way to provide an SSL certificate for content that is hosted on a different server.
TLS 1.2 and higher is supported.
Third-party SSLs are not supported.

Why Implement HTTPS?

Implementing HTTPS for your website is crucial for security, credibility, and legal compliance. HTTPS encrypts data transmitted between users' browsers and your site, ensuring confidentiality and integrity of sensitive information like login credentials and payment details. It builds trust with visitors, as they look for the padlock icon indicating a secure connection. HTTPS can also improve SEO rankings and comply with evolving browser standards that label HTTP sites as "Not Secure." Given these benefits and the growing expectation of secure browsing, HTTPS is essential for security, credibility, and legal compliance, making it a standard practice for all websites.

Generate an SSL Certificate (Add HTTPS)

Once your site is published and configured with a custom domain (the Website Builder records need to have fully propagated, which can take anywhere from 5 minutes to 48 hours), the SSL should start generating automatically.

Unexpected issues may prevent it from automatically starting. In these situations, the SSL can usually be manually generated, although the Website Builder records will still need to have propagated.

To confirm it has started or to manually generate it, in the side panel, click SEO & Settings , and then click the Site SSL tab:

If it has started generating or has already generated, it will have a green check mark and either indicate In progress or Complete.

Note

If the SSL certificate indicates approved in the editor, the certificate may not be visible in the browser for up to 2 to 3 hours.

If it hasn't started generating, click Generate certificate . The process, handled by Let's Encrypt, may take up to an hour. An approval email will be sent to the account owner once it's complete.
If Generate certificate is showing not available, this indicates the editor is not able to detect the Website Builder DNS records. For troubleshooting, see FAQs and Troubleshooting .
Ensure the Force visitors to use secure connection (HTTPS) setting is toggle on (it should be by default). Any visitor will be redirected to the secure connection once this is enabled.

Note

SSL certificates require domain names within a 64-character limit (including WWW).
Avoid adding AAAA and CAA records, which can prevent SSL certificate issuance. Please ensure you do not have these records configured.
An SSL certificate is never deleted unless a person clicks Remove certificate .

Recreate an SSL Certificate

To recreate your SSL Certificate you need to remove the old one and generate a new SSL Certificate.

There can be multiple reasons you might need to recreate your SSL certificate. For example, if you previously set up your domain using a method involving a CNAME and 301 Redirect and have changed your DNS settings to reflect a CNAME and two A Records, you will need to recreate your SSL certificate. Or, when you initially generated your SSL certificate, it might have been generated only for www.domain.com and not domain.com . This would make the site secure only on https://www.domain.com and not on https://domain.com . In this case, you'll also need to recreate your SSL certificate.

Warning

DNS records that contain AAAA record (IPV6) or CAA will not work. The AAAA or CAA records need to be removed in order to add the SSL certificate.

To remove and recreate an SSL:

In the side panel, click SEO & Settings , and then click the Site SSL tab.
Click Remove certificate .
Click Generate certificate .

SSL or HTTPS for the Store

Your store (Native Store and Third Party Store) uses HTTPS to ensure secure transmission of sensitive information. You don't need an additional SSL certificate for checkout—it's already secure.

Use Custom or Third Party Code in SSL Sites

Due to HTML standards, HTTP or non-secured content cannot be displayed in HTTPS or secure sites. This means that any custom code which relies on loading content from an HTTP server will not work in an SSL Site. If you need to use code which normally loads from an HTTP server, we recommend either:

Requesting HTTPS-friendly code from your code provider.
Disabling HTTPS for your Responsive Site.

As our editor displays by default on an HTTPS connection, one good way to test whether or not code will work in the final site is to see if it works in the editor. If it does not, it is equally unlikely to work in a live HTTPS site.

Details About Secure Connections and SSLs

You will need to recreate your SSL certificate if you switch your DNS settings from CNAME and 301 Redirect to CNAME and two A Record methods.
Certificates are valid for three months and automatically renew two weeks before expiration to ensure ongoing security.
A small lock icon will appear in your Dashboard once your site is set up with a certificate, indicating a secure connection.
Website Builder employs HSTS Policy (HTTP Strict Transport Security) to protect against protocol downgrade attacks and cookie hijacking.
The site's secure connection uses the DV (Domain Validated) certificate.
Our SSL implementation does not support Internet Explorer on Windows XP but is compatible with Chrome and Firefox.
Not compatible with Android 2.3 and earlier devices.
We've added logic to the platform that makes sure we don't redirect traffic to HTTPS for these devices. If a user on an incompatible browser attempts to load the HTTPS version of the site, a security error/warning will appear. However, if the user visits the HTTP version of the site, the site will simply not load the HTTPS version.
Currently, our SSL solution does not support internationalized domain names (names with non-Latin characters, i.e www.bücher.de)

FAQs and Troubleshooting

My site still doesn't have an SSL certificate.

There could be many reasons for this, the most common being:

There's a CAA or AAAA record in the DNS (these interfere with SSLs and would need to be removed).
The changes made in the domain's DNS settings to add the Website Builder records (one CNAME and two A records) hasn't fully propagated (changes to your domain typically take less than a few hours to fully propagate. However, it may take up to 48 hours).
The domain is using Cloudflare's DNS and proxy is on. The proxy will need to be turned off to generate the Website Builder provided SSL.
The Force visitors to use secure connection (HTTPS) setting was accidentally toggled off. To verify the Force visitors to use secure connection (HTTPS) toggle is on, in the side panel, click SEO & Settings , and then click the Site SSL tab.

Only one version of the site (domain.com or www.domain.com) is showing as secure.

There are a few reasons this could happen:

Instability in the DNS records during SSL generation.
Solution: remove certificate and recreate it.
The 'WWW' wasn't included in the domain when it was assigned to the site.
Solution: verify 'WWW' is included with the domain, if it isn't, change the URL to include it.
To update the domain:
In side panel, click SEO & Settings , and then click the Site Domain tab.
Click Change site URL .
In front of the default domain, type or past in www. (for example, www.domain.com).
The SSL may need to be recreated after adding the 'WWW'.

I can't add an SSL, the "Generate certificate" button is disabled.

If the Generate certificate button is disabled, this indicates Website Builder's DNS records are not able to be detected. See the section, How to verify DNS records, in this article.

Can I use another provider's SSL?

There is currently no built-in option to use an SSL from another provider.

How can I make a print of the SSL certificate or save it?

While there isn't an option to print or save the SSL, a screenshot can be taken of it with its information.

How to access the certificate may be different for different browsers. Here are the steps for Chrome:

Navigate to the desired site.
In the address bar, click the icon next to the URL.

Click Connection is secure .
Click Certificate is valid .

How to verify DNS records

To check the DNS records go to www.whatsmydns.net and in the dropdown, select CNAME, A, CAA, or AAAA.

For CNAME , complete the field using your whole URL (for example, www.domain.com). Ensure the search returns s.multiscreensite.com. If you see red Xs, or do not see the correct record, this means that the record was not set up correctly or the domain host is not propagating.
For the A record, complete the field using the naked domain (for example, domain.com). Ensure the search returns only 100.24.208.97 and 35.172.94.1. If you see red Xs, do not see the correct records, or see additional records, this means that the records were not set up correctly or the domain host is not propagating.
For CAA and AAAA records, complete the field using the naked domain (for example, domain.com). Ensure both of these return x's and not records. If records appear, these are the records that will need to be removed.

If you have verified that all DNS settings are correct, but they still appear incorrect when using a tool like www.whatsmydns.net , please contact your DNS provider.

What if the DNS records can't be detected when I publish my site?

If the DNS records are not detected, you can still publish your site but you will need to manually generate the SSL certificate later.

We strongly recommend you check that DNS records are detectable before attempting to generate an SSL certificate. If you exceed 5 attempts, you’ll reach the Let’s Encrypt (our SSL provider) limit and will need to wait a week before trying again. For details on how to check the DNS records, see the section in this article, How to verify DNS records.

Load Site in an iframe

Mon, 20 Oct 2025 13:30:31 GMT

Load Site in an iframe

You may want to allow your site to be embedded in an iframe on a different case (for example, to create a template page with your sites). Allowing a site to be loaded inside of an iframe in another site may allow malicious actors to use your site and brand to trick visitors into clicking the wrong link or submitting data to outside sources. Only enable this option if you want the site to be loaded in an iframe.

Warning

By default, the ability to load your site in an iframe on another site is disabled. We recommend not changing the default unless it is mandatory for your specific site. Sites created before April 5, 2020 are permitted to be displayed in an iframe.

To enable the ability to load the site in an iframe:

In the left panel, click Settings , and then click Site SSL .
Click the Allow site to be loaded in an iframe toggle.

Security Settings

The following security settings have been implemented to inform browsers that the site should not load inside of an iframe:

x-frame-options : SAMEORIGIN
content-security-policy : frame-ancestors 'self'

The x-frame-options setting is the original version, while content-security-policy is a newer setting that is not fully supported by all browsers, yet. These tell browsers that the site should not be loaded within an iframe.

These settings are implemented by default to implement the best security practices out of the box. Allowing sites not to load within an iframe by default is a small step to prevent sites from being used for ClickJacking . ClickJacking is where a malicious user loads the site inside of some frame, while using the design of the site to try and get users to pass personal information that can be intercepted or collected.

Connect and Sync Your Google Business Profile

Mon, 20 Oct 2025 13:21:24 GMT

Connect and Sync Your Google Business Profile

Google Business Profile (GBP) is a free tool offered by Google to help you manage and boost the online visibility of your business on Google Search and Map by allowing you to customize your business information, such as address and phone number, to create a comprehensive listing. Additionally, for customers searching for your business or similar businesses on Google, GBP showcases customer reviews and photos which can attract potential customers. By connecting your website with GBP, you can streamline updates, ensuring consistency between your website's Business Info and GBP. This not only saves you time but also maintains the accuracy of your business data.

Warning

Google has very specific restrictions in order to sync to Google Business Profile. Please review the Important Information section in this article for details.

Note

The syncing mechanism exclusively operates between the Business Info section in the Content Library and the site owner’s Google Business Profile.
While Local Business Schema and Google Business Profile are related in the context of online business information, they are distinct. Local Business Schema enhances visibility in search results through markup language, whereas Google Business Profile manages online presence on Google.

Supported Fields

You can synchronize the following data between the Content Library and Google Business Profile:

Important Information

Google has very specific restrictions in terms of what information is necessary in order to sync to Google Business Profile as well as the formatting of this information. Please keep these limitations in mind when updating business data in the site’s Content Library when syncing to Google Business Profile. If you do not follow the requirements set by Google you will run into errors in syncing the data.

Limitations and Requirements:

Business name is mandatory.
An address, a phone number, or a site URL at the very least is required.
Phone numbers should have correct format.
You can have up to 3 phone numbers.
You can't change the address to a different country.
Google must be able to find the address in order to accept the data - therefore, it is recommended to stick to the exact formatting for addresses to avoid any errors.
Google limits the number of times you can update your business profile (within a certain time period) - we recommend limiting the number of updates you make for this reason. You will otherwise run into errors in syncing the data with Google. Once you pass the limit you will be restricted from updating the profile, therefore we recommend to make all changes in bulk when syncing.

Initial Setup

To sync the Content Library to the Google Business Profile:

In the side panel, click Content .
Click Business Info .
In the banner, click Connect to GBP to initiate Google’s OAuth consent flow.
After successful authentication, you will encounter one of two options:
A Google modal or a dropdown with an option to select the business you wish to connect.
A link to Google with instructions on how to create and claim a GBP if you have not already done so.
In case of data discrepancies between the Content Library and GBP, choose the initial source of truth to sync data by pulling from one system to another:
Selecting Google will update the Content Library GBP’s data. Subsequently, the default sync will continue from the Content Library to GBP.
Upon connecting GBP, a visual indication confirming synchronization between the Content Library and GBP will appear in a banner within the Content Library.

Whenever you (1) publish the site, (2) publish the Content Library, or (3) click on Sync with Google, the Business Info in the Content Library will publish and push the updated data to the Google Business Profile.

Auto Sync

By default, the toggle allowing continuous syncing between Content Library and GBP systems is off. However, you can enable the toggle to synchronize data every twelve hours. This means that Business Info in the Content Library will update by pulling data from Google, potentially overwriting unpublished changes made in the Content Library.

Note

Business Info will be automatically published to the live set when it is pulled from Google.

To enable continuous sync between the Content Library and Google Business Profile:

In the side panel, click Content .
Click Business Info .
In the banner, click Additional Options and select Settings to access the continuous sync toggle. Enable the toggle.

Banner Navigation

After connecting the Content Library and the Google Business Profile, the Content Library will display a banner containing important information, including:

Sync status (e.g. success state and fail state)
Timestamp of the last successful sync
Link to open the GBP console
Button to push Business Info data from Content Library to GBP
Button for additional options, including:
Pull Business Info data from GPB to Content Library
Link to support article
Settings button (i.e. continuous sync toggle)
Disconnect Google account

Disconnecting a Google account will disconnect GBP from the site and keep the existing data present in the Content Library.

Troubleshooting

I received a This app is blocked error

The issue was caused by a security change on Google's end that we had to comply with.

To fix it:

Navigate to myaccount.google.com/connections .
Search for Website Builder.
Click Delete all connections you have with Website Builder .
Go back to the editor, and try to connect again.

Google Tools

Mon, 20 Oct 2025 12:45:29 GMT

Google Tools

Website Builder supports Google Analytics.

Google Analytics

Your site has a integration into Google Analytics that makes it easy to have website visitors tracked in Google Analytics (and other Google Tracking Tools).

The integration into Google Analytics is based upon Google’s Global Site Tag technology, also known as gtags. This supports several Google-owned tracking technologies. This means you can include your ID for the following Google properties:

AdWords Conversion ID (AW-*)
Flood Light / Double Click Tracking ID (DC-*)
Google Global Measurement ID (G-*)
Google Analytics Property ID (UA-*)

Add Google Analytics

If you have not already, you need to create a Google Analytics account, create a property, add a data stream, and set up data collection within your Google Analytics account. To learn how to do this, see [GA4] Set up Analytics for a CMS-hosted website .

To add Google Analytics to your site:

In the side panel, click SEO & Settings , and then click the Google Tools tab.
Type your Google Analytics code. Note that while Google frequently makes updates, our field is always up-to-date in what it needs to connect to Google.
Click Enter on your keyboard to confirm.

The Google Analytics integration implements IP anonymization by default. This means that Google now, by default, does not track or store IP addresses. To learn more, see Google's documentation .

Troubleshooting

Why are site visits not being recorded?

Following are several reasons your analytics might not be working properly:

Your site is not published. Google Analytics only tracks on live sites.
You are using an ad blocker that is preventing Google Analytics from recording your visit.
It has been less than 24 hours since you set up the integration. Sometimes it takes Google Analytics up to 24 hours to start tracking.

Set a Default Site Language

Mon, 20 Oct 2025 11:16:03 GMT

Set a Default Site Language

If you are building a site in a language other than English, the Site Language feature allows you to translate certain elements into your target language. Simply select your target language and the built-in text on several widgets will be translated into your target language automatically. The widget text has been pre-translated and cannot be customized.

Note

This feature should not be mistaken for the Add and Manage Multiple Languages , which translates all text on the site using Google Translate.

To configure your site language:

In the left panel, click SEO & Settings , and then click Site Language .
If you are changing the default language to a language that has already been added to your site, click the dropdown menu next to the default language and select from the existing languages. If you want to add a default language that was not previously added to your site, click Manage Languages and select a new language.

The following languages are supported:

Note

If you select a language that is not supported, the default widgets will be in English.
Language tags in the source code will be updated according to the chosen language.

Text in the following widgets are affected by this feature:

This feature only translates the texts listed above. These texts cannot be edited.

Creating a Gift Voucher Widget

Mon, 20 Oct 2025 10:56:03 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - Create and configure Gift Voucher Widgets in Travelify

Booking Rewards

Mon, 20 Oct 2025 10:55:56 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - Configure Booking Rewards in Travelify Platform

New Paragraph

Add and Manage Multiple Languages

Mon, 20 Oct 2025 10:48:36 GMT

Add and Manage Multiple Languages

Increase your website's reach and engage a broader audience by configuring a multi-language site. This feature allows you to provide translations of your content in multiple languages. When you add a new language, a duplicate version of your site is created to host the translation. You have the option to translate your site manually or utilize the convenient built-in Google Translate feature. However, it's essential to review the entire translation before publishing to ensure accuracy.

We use ISO 639 to represent our languages.

Warning

Once a site has been translated, any content added to a specific language version will not sync with other language versions. Therefore, we recommend adding multiple languages as the final step, once you have finished building your site.

If you need to make updates after translation, refer to the Re-translate a Page section of this article for instructions.

Limitations and Considerations

The following features are currently not available in multi-language configurations:

Personalization Rules .
Blog Posts .
Page SEO titles, descriptions, and keywords are not automatically translated, however you can manually translate them. These fields are important for SEO, so make sure you translate them manually for each language.
Alt-text (on images).
Dynamic business content . Text connected via Connect Data will not be automatically translated. To translate this text, disconnect the widgets from the Content Library and translate them manually.
Language flag . The language flag cannot be changed directly. To use a different flag, you must delete the current language and add the language with the desired flag.
Google Calendar widget cannot be translated. The calendar structure, including months and days, will remain in the site's default language. Ensure that the selected calendar appears in the language specified in its Google Calendar settings.
Adding external links to navigation . Once you add a language to a site, you cannot add external links to the navigation.

Considerations

The total number of pages a site with multiple languages can have is around 200, so if a site has 100 pages, only a single language can be added.
Adding multiple languages to your site can enhance its accessibility, but it's crucial to be cautious about the quantity. Excessive languages may lead to the following:
Performance Impact: Too many languages might slow down your site and affect user experience.
Possible Errors: Such as editor error messages, page rendering issues, and/or broken links.
Maintenance Challenges: Managing content for numerous languages can be time-consuming.
The language flag cannot be changed directly. To use a different flag, you must delete the current language and add the language with the desired flag.
By default, the multi-language feature uses Google Translate to automatically translate your site content into the new language. While this service is free, Google Translate may not always provide the most accurate translations. Therefore, it's important to review and edit the translated content on your site. If you prefer to manually translate your entire site, disable the Use automatic translation toggle when adding languages. Note that once languages are added, automatic translation cannot be undone.
When translating content in Accordion and Tabs widgets, certain styles such as rich text are not preserved after being translated and need to be added again.
Folders added to the Pages area after languages are enabled can not be translated.

Add a New Language

Warning

To add languages to your site:

In the side panel, click SEO & Settings and then click Site Languages . Or, if you already have additional languages enabled, click the flag icon on the top navigation bar and click Manage Languages .
Click + Add language , and choose one or more languages from the available options. Please note that some languages may have multiple country flags (e.g., Spanish).
Click Done when finished.
(Optional) By default, the Use automatic translation toggle is on. Automatic translation uses Google Translate to automatically translate your site content. While this service is free, Google Translate may not always provide the most accurate translations.
If you prefer to manually translate your entire site, disable the Use automatic translation toggle when adding languages. Note that once languages are added, automatic translation cannot be undone.
Click Save .
This step is dependent on which editor the site is using:
Classic Editor: A new row with the language selector widget will appear at the top of the site, and you will be prompted to position it. Ensure that you review the position on all devices.
After clicking Done , the new languages will be added to the site. Any changes made to the location or design of the selector must be applied separately to each language.

Note

On mobile, the widget will be located in the expandable menu rather than the header.

Editor 2.0: The language selector widget will be added to the header along with the new languages. No further action is needed, unless you would like to customize the widget or its location.

The language selector widget will be added to the header along with the new languages. No further action is needed, unless you would like to customize the widget or its location.

Note

Any changes made to the location or design of the language selector widget must be applied separately to each language.

Edit Site in Added Languages

To select a different language version, click on the flag of your default language in the top tool bar and select the language you would like to edit from the drop-down.

Any changes you make to any language version (for example, changing text, images, or adding/removing widgets) will not be reflected in the other versions of your site.

Manage Languages

To manage languages:

In the side panel, click SEO & Settings and then click Site Languages .
Click Manage Languages .
The following options are available:

Disable languages. To disable a language, toggle the switch next to the language.
Delete languages. Click the X next to the toggle and then click Delete to confirm.
Add additional languages. Click + Add Language
Change default language. Open the dropdown menu next to the default language and select a new default. Only previously added languages appear in the dropdown.
If a secondary language does not have the same pages as the default language, you cannot switch the default language to the secondary language.

Note

If you update the default language, the following will also update to reflect the new default language:

Language selector in the SEO manager
Language dropdown on the top bar of the editor
The left panel shows the selected default language pages first

Language Selector Widget

When languages are initially added, a language selector widget is placed in the header of all language versions, allowing visitors to switch between languages.

On mobile, the widget will be located in the expandable menu rather than the header (Classic Editor).

This language selector functions like any other widget, meaning it can be deleted or replaced with additional widgets as needed.

In the widget's design editor, there are several layout options to select from (with Classic Editor, only available on desktop). Including options with and without a flag .

Re-translate a Page

During re-translation, the updated page will automatically inherit the content and design from the default language's page. If re-translating from the default language, all site languages will be updated. However, re-translating from a secondary language will only update that specific language version.

To re-translate a page:

In the side panel, click Pages .
Click the gear icon next to the desired page and select Redo Translations . If you are updating from a secondary language, the button copy is Update this Translation .
Confirm that you want to proceed.

A backup version of your site is created automatically in case you need to revert your changes.

Add Pages and Popups to Existing Languages

New pages can be added from the default language only. If you want to display a specific page in a specific language, add it to the default language first and then hide the page in the navigation menu.

Note

Personalization rules are not supported in Multi-Language sites.

To add a page to other languages:

Add the page to the default language and configure the design and content as desired.
Once the page is complete, switch to each of the site's languages separately.
In the side panel, click Pages .
Click into the drop down menu at the top (it should say Translate another page) and select the page you want to translate.

Multi-Language Sites with Stores

Sites with third-party stores can be configured with multi-languages (available on Advanced Stores and higher), though the store won't automatically translate.

Sites with Native Stores can also be configured with multi-languages.

Dynamic Pages on Multi-Language Sites

The following is important information related to using dynamic pages on multi-language sites:

Dynamic Pages on multi-language sites are managed from the primary language.
Creating a dynamic page or converting a regular page to dynamic is only available form the primary language.
Converting a dynamic page to a regular page from the primary language converts all pages to regular pages on all languages.
Converting a dynamic page to a regular page from a language other than the primary one only affects the specific language page.

The following are some best practices:

Add a dynamic page or convert a page to dynamic on the primary language. After connecting all the widgets, add that page to the other languages by clicking Translate in the settings menu, or by going to the other languages and clicking Translate Another Page on each one.
This will add the dynamic page to the other languages, but it will remain connected to the same collection. Click the settings icon and select Replace Collection . This allows you to replace the connected collection but keep all the fields connected.

Multilanguage FAQs and Troubleshooting

Site Settings

Mon, 20 Oct 2025 09:52:50 GMT

Site Settings

Most of the general options for your site are available in the Settings tab in the left panel. From here, you can backup your site, edit your site's SEO and more.

Site Icons

Home screen icons, share icons, favicons, and startup images allow you to customize, brand, and polish your user's experience on the site and make it easier for a user to pick your site out from a bunch of tabs or links on their home screen. For more information, see Site Icons .

Site Domain

The site URL is how visitors see your site. You are assigned a default, public URL until you decide to add your own domain.

By default, when the site is unpublished, the settings are mostly grayed out. Publish your site to reveal more settings, such as the ability to edit the site URL.

Preview

This preview shows your site, including unpublished changes, as it appears in the editor. Site preview is a great way to share your work with others and preview your site on multiple devices before launching.

To get the site URL for sharing, click Copy next to the preview URL

Unpublish Site

When you unpublish a site, it is no longer visible online and cannot be accessed by users until it is republished. Unpublishing does not affect your site billing subscription.

To unpublish your site, click Unpublish .

Site SSL

Site SSL is where you can set up a secured HTTPS connection for your site. HTTPS is great for boosting your SEO and for giving visitors confidence when visiting your pages.

This solution leverages the Let's Encrypt project, which is an open source Certificate Authority that provides free certificates. This solution does require that you have a domain pointed at your site successfully.

To turn SSL on:

Publish your site.
Turn on SSL.

Load Site in an iFrame

To enable your site to be embedded in an iframe on another site, click the Allow site to be loaded in an iframe toggle.

SEO

SEO is what gets your site to first page on Google. You can change settings here to help get a little boost on search engine optimization.

These settings are different from individual page SEO settings. Page SEO overrides global SEO changes made in site settings.

Google Analytics

Adding Google Analytics to your site enables you to get deep insights into your customers and users through the Google analytics dashboard.

To install Google Analytics, you must first set up Google Analytics on Google's platform . Once you've done that, get your tracking ID and enter it into the Google Analytics tab.

Note

We offer a native integration into Google Analytics, however your website will not load Google Analytics unless you set up the integration with your own Google Analytics ID.

URL Redirect

The URL Redirect feature lets you redirect specific URLs on your site to specific pages.

Header HTML

The header HTML is a location for you to add your custom scripts, meta tags and other pieces of code which belong in the <head> section of your site.

Only certain types of code can be placed in the header HTML. Incorrect code will be removed.

Warning

Backup site

Create a backup of your site that you can restore to at anytime. This allows you to revert changes or restore back from critical mistakes done on the site.

To create a backup, in the left panel, click Settings , and then click Backup Site . Type a new version name for the backup and click Save .

For more information about site backups, Backup Sites .

Site Language

If you are building a site in a language other than English, the Site Language feature allows you to translate certain elements into your target language.

Privacy Settings

404 Page

Customise the 404 page for your site. The 404 page is used in case an invalid or unreachable URL is entered as an internal link of the site domain; that is, in lieu of any page that can not be rendered. If a site visitor tries to access a non-existent page on your site, they will see your customized 404 page as opposed to the generic 404 page that we provide by default.

Note

To hide the footer on the 404 page, you must access developer mode and add custom code. To access developer mode, click the Developer Mode button in the navigation bar, look for the 404 page, and then click page.css .

To customise the 404 page:

In the left panel, click Settings , and then click 404 page .
Click Customise page . The 404 page will not display under the Pages menu or the Pages drop-down at the top left of the editor.
Editing the 404 page is similar to editing any other page on your site. You can drag in any widget or section, and edit content and design. However, to navigate back to the rest of your site, you need to go back to the Home page from the pages drop-down at the top of the page.
To preview your 404 page, click Preview page . You can always revert back to the original 404 page by clicking Revert to original page .

Note the following:

Clients need to have full editing capabilities in order to edit the 404 page.
For multi-language sites, the 404 page will be the same in all languages and can only be customized in the default site language.
Page background can only be edited using Background for all in the Global Settings because it is not an individual page.

Currency Exchange Rates

Sun, 19 Oct 2025 11:19:11 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - This Guide will walk you through manipulating currency exchange rates.

Add Custom Offers to your website using Travelify & Duda (Step 2)

Sat, 18 Oct 2025 11:03:49 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - Now you've created your Custom Offers in Travelify, learn how to add them to your website

Changing Deposit Display Settings

Fri, 17 Oct 2025 12:43:23 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - Learn how to change the positioning of your deposit banner in search results

Backup Sites

Thu, 16 Oct 2025 16:25:21 GMT

Backup Sites

Backups save images, files, content—everything on the site is backed up except eCommerce data.

You can save copies of your site called backups. Backups allow you to restore to them at any point in time. While our system automatically creates backups each time a site is published, it is recommended to create manual backups of your site periodically instead of relying on the automated backup system in place.

In general, it is a good idea to create a backup:

After you are satisfied with the look of your site.
After you have finished a hard-to-do task (such as importing several pictures, coding, and so on).
Before adding any custom code or doing any big changes to the site.

There is a limit of 50 automated backups and 50 manual backups that can be stored. New manual backups override earlier manual backups, thus your earliest manual backup is deleted when you create a new one. This is also the case for automatic backups; the earliest automatic backup is deleted when a new one is created. Automated backups get deleted out of the backup list often because of how it is structured. If you want to keep an automated backup, simply restore to an automated backup, and then create a manual backup from that.

Automated Backups

Automated backups are created after:

Republishing
Adding or removing the multi-language feature
Restoring a backup
Deleting a site
Accessing developer mode
Resetting a site
Changing a site layout

Create Manual Backups

To create a manual backup:

In the side panel, click SEO & Settings , and then select Backup Site .
Type a New Version Name for the backup.
Click Save .

Restore From Backup

To restore from a backup:

In left panel, click SEO & Settings , and then click Backup Site .
(Optional) Click Preview next to the backup version you want to restore. The preview will open in a new tab. Note that the preview backup feature is not available for sites with third party store installed.
Click the Restore link next to the backup you want to restore.
Confirm your selection by clicking Restore .

Delete Backups

To delete a backup:

In the left panel, click SEO & Settings , and then click Backup Site .
Click the Delete link next to the backup you want to delete.

Blog Backups

A post on a non-published restored version of a blog will not be live until the restored site is published (unlike with regular posts, which do not require the site to be published again for the post to go live).

As always, a new backup version is automatically created when restoring a back up version.

Restoring a Deleted Site

Please be aware: Once deleted, sites can only be restored within a 30-day period. After this, restoration is not possible.

Site Icons

Thu, 16 Oct 2025 15:56:44 GMT

Site Icons

Home screen icons, share images, favicons, and startup images allow you to customize, brand, and polish your user's experience on the site, as well as make it easier for a visitor to pick your site out from a bunch of tabs or links on their home screen. If you are confused about what icons, share images, favicons, or start-up images are, please see below.

 Note

Be sure to republish your site after adding or changing any of the site icons. You may need to refresh the page or clear the cache in order to see the icon changes.

To edit your site icons:

In the left panel, click Settings , and then click Site Icons .
Click +Image next to the icon you want to edit.

Favicon

Your favicon appears next to your page title in the tab of your browser. It allows users to identify and navigate to your site easily, even if they have multiple tabs open.

Note

Allowed resolution sizes for favicons are (px): 24 x 24, 36 x 36, 48 x 48. It is recommended you use .ico file type for favicons.

Social Networks Image (Open Graph)

This is the image designated to display on Facebook, Twitter, and other social networks when sharing your site.

Home Screen Icon (Mobile & Tablet)

Home screen icons are a mobile phone version of bookmarks, and appear on iPhone and iPad devices when your site is bookmarked on the home screen. Users are able to save a home screen icon on their phone's home screen as if the site were an app. Clicking this icon on mobile devices brings users to your site.

This image should be a square and at least 57 x 57 pixels in size.

Dynamic Content: Dynamic Pages

Thu, 16 Oct 2025 15:36:14 GMT

Dynamic Content: Dynamic Pages

Dynamic Pages enable the rapid creation and updating of multiple pages using internal or external content collections, significantly speeding up the process.

A Dynamic Page links to a collection and generates multiple pages with unique content but a consistent design. You can create a new Dynamic Page, convert an existing page, or use a predefined Dynamic Page available on the platform.

Dynamic pages that are automatically connected to an Internal Collection with default content through Pages and Popups are available.

Note

If you change the collection, page widgets will stay connected to field names/labels that exist in both collections. Any fields that don't exist in the new collection will disconnect and must be reconnected. See the section in this article, Change Collections .
Dynamic pages cannot be password protected pages.
Dynamic pages are not able to be membership pages
Site comments are not supported on Dynamic Pages.

The ideal use case for Dynamic Pages is building a website that contains multiple pages with the same structure, but different content. For example:

Real Estate listings
Team pages
Recipe pages
Landing pages

Warning

If you convert a Dynamic Page to a regular page, all connected widgets will disconnect, requiring you to reconnect them if you convert it back into a Dynamic Page.

How Do Dyanmic Pages Work?

Dynamic Pages work by using the same design to dynamically generate multiple pages using data in a collection. The result is a unique page of content for each row in the dataset.

Create Dynamic Pages

It is important to note that page, row, and data limits are determined by collection type.

By default, a dynamic page is not directly navigable or discoverable on the site. When you are ready to make them available for site visitors, the records need to be added to the site's navigation or a Collection Display Widget must be added to a page.

Step 1: Establish a Dynamic Page

There are 2 options when establishing a dynamic page. You can create a new page or convert an existing page.

Note

Dynamic Pages appear on in the Pages Panel with a collection icon to indicate it is a Dynamic Page. To see the name of the collection the page is connected to, hover over the icon.
While you can create or connect a collection when setting up a Dynamic Page, it’s recommended to have a collection prepared in advance. This is unless you plan to use one of the pre-configured Dynamic Pages, which come with a ready-to-go internal collection.
Dynamic Pages do NOT appear in the site navigation, and thus are hidden by default.

Create a New Page

To create a New Dynamic Page:

In the side panel, click Pages , and then click + Add Page .
Click Dynamic Pages , select one of the dynamic page options. If you do not have a collection, there is an option to Create Collection (selecting this option will cancel the page creation).
Type a Page Name .
Select the collection you want to connect to from the drop down.
Click + Add Page .

Convert an Existing Page

To Convert an existing page:

In the side panel, click Pages , click the Page Settings () icon next to the page you want to convert, and click Convert to Dynamic Page .
Select the collection from the drop down. If you do not have a collection, there is an option to Create Collection (selecting this option will cancel converting the page).
Click Done .

Step 2: Design the Page and Connect the Data

Once the page is designed, it's time to connect the widgets and elements.

To connect to a widget or canvas element*:

Right-click on the widget or element you want to connect, and select Connect to Data .
Select the desired data using the drop down (only relevant data options are shown).
Select Done .

The Connected Data icon appears on the widget or element indicating that it is connected.

*Section backgrounds can be connected.

*The canvas elements that can be connected are:

Classic Editor: row and column backgrounds.
Editor 2.0: section backgrounds.

Note

When connecting the background of a Row or Column (in the classic version of the editor only), there may be up to three collection options:

A column/field that has a single image (an image field must exist). The multi-square icon () indicates the option is a field/column in the connected collection.
A column/field that has a collection of images for a background slider (only available for Internal or Airtable collections; an image collection field must exist).
The entire collection. This option turns the background into a slider that displays an image from each record or row in the collection (this option isn't typically selected; the collection must have an image field/column). When using this option, the background slider will be the same on all records. The multi-image icon indicates the option is for an entire collection.

Additional options may appear as well if the site has business images and/or a native store store.

Inline Binding

Inline binding is the ability to use Dynamic for a specific word or words within supported widgets. The connected text can be designed and linked just like regular text.

Note

The Content Library design overrides the text editor design for connected text.

To use inline binding for text widgets:

Type {{{ in the text editor to trigger the Connect Data pop up.
Select the label you want connected.
Click Save .

While editing, the label appears in the editor within curly brackets (for example, {{label}} ). The connected text displays after closing the editor. You can also display the connected text by clicking the Connected Data icon.

Note

Only users with Connected Data in their account see the Connected Data icon, but all users see the label in curly brackets while editing.

Alternatively, you can type the label directly into the text editor surrounded by two curly brackets to connect the text using inline binding. For example, {{content_library.global}} .

Inline Binding for the Accordion Widget

To use inline binding for the Accordion widget:

Add an accordion widget to the desired page.
Open the widget's content tab.
Select any accordion item.
In the description field text box, click the Data Binding button () in the top left of the toolbar.
From the connected data popup choose any field you want to connect.

The chosen field will be added to the description field as an inline binding item - this indicates you can add static text to the description as well and combine it with the dynamic data.

Note

Only the description currently supports inline binding. All other fields (title, image, and button) are static. If not needed, the image and button fields can be hidden.

List Type Widgets

List type widgets (noted below) can only display a full collection rather than data in a single row, with the exception of the image collection field type. The following widgets can be connected to an image collection field type: Photo Gallery, List, Accordion, Tabs, Media Slider.

List type widgets:

List
Photo Gallery
Media Slider
Tabs
Accordion
Table (display only, direct linking is not available)

Connect SEO Fields and The Header HTML

To connect SEO settings and the header HTML:

In the side panel, click Pages , then click the settings () icon for the desired dynamic page.
Click Edit Page SEO .
Click the Connect Data () icon for the desired field.

Tip

Continue to scroll to reach the Header HTML field.

Select the desired data using the drop down (only relevant data options are shown).
Click Done .

Disconnect Data

To disconnect a widget:

Right-click the widget, and click Change connection .
In the menu, select None .

For widgets that have content editing menus, if you are already in the widget content editor, you can hover on the blue icon in the top-right corner and click Disconnect .

Disconnecting a widget reverts the text and its style to the previously used style.

To disconnect SEO settings and the header HTML:

In the side panel, click Pages , then click the settings icon for the desired dynamic page.
Click Edit Page SEO .
Click the Connect Data icon for the desired field.

Tip

Continue to scroll to reach the Header HTML field.

Click into the drop down list and select None .
Click Done .

Change Collections

In Dynamic Page Settings you can change the collection. When you do this, page widgets will stay connected to field names/labels that exist in both collections. Widgets connected to filed names/labels that don't exist in the new collection, will disconnect.

For example, if you have a collection with fields named name, address and phone and you change to a collection with fields named address and phone, the widgets connected to address and phone will remain connected and display the data from the new collection, while the widget connected to name will be disconnected because it does not exist in the new collection.

To change collections:

In the side panel, click Pages , then click the settings () icon for the dynamic page.
Click Replace Collection .
Click into the drop down list and select the desired collection.

Warning

Page widgets will stay connected to field names/labels that exist in both collections. Any fields that don't exist in the new collection will disconnect and must be reconnected.

Dynamic Page Settings

Dynamic page settings are similar to those of regular pages, with the following differences:

Additional options:
Replace Collection.
Refresh Data. Refreshes the collection's data.
Go to collection.
Unavailable options:
Set as Home Page. Dynamic pages are not able to be set as a homepage.
Set Page Access. Dynamic pages are not able to be password protected or membership pages.

Dynamic Pages on Multi-Language Sites

The following is important information related to using dynamic pages on multi-language sites:

Dynamic Pages on multi-language sites are managed from the primary language.
Creating a dynamic page or converting a regular page to dynamic is only available form the primary language.
Converting a dynamic page to a regular page from the primary language converts all pages to regular pages on all languages.
Converting a dynamic page to a regular page from a language other than the primary one only affects the specific language page.

The following are some best practices:

Add a dynamic page or convert a page to dynamic on the primary language. After connecting all the widgets, add that page to the other languages by clicking Translate in the settings menu, or by going to the other languages and clicking Translate Another Page on each one.
This will add the dynamic page to the other languages, but it will remain connected to the same collection. Click the settings icon and select Replace Collection . This allows you to replace the connected collection but keep all the fields connected.

Dynamic Content: Business Info, Text, and Images

Thu, 16 Oct 2025 13:07:35 GMT

Dynamic Content: Business Info, Text, and Images

Connect site widgets to data that lives in the site's Content Library with the Connected Data feature. This enables you to have one source of truth to build websites more quickly, keep websites up-to-date and accurate, ensure site-wide consistency of important information, and more. When sites widgets are connected to fields in the Content Library, you no longer need to manually change the data in each of the widgets.

To access Business Info, in the side panel, click Content , then click the desired type of business content (Business Info, Business Text, Business Images).

Note

In order to connect widgets through Connected Data, the content must be stored in the Content Library.

Connected Data Structure

For data to be connected through Connected Data , it must have a label and content.

Label . The label is the unique indication of the content in the library that binds it to the widget on the site. While there are built in labels (for example, the labels for Logo or Social icons fields are predefined), for custom text, make sure the labels you choose are meaningful and unique. This helps you easily pick which content element should connect to which widget and help prevent changing the label in the future.

Warning

Changing the Content Library label while a widget is connected will disconnect the widget.

Content. The information (for example, text, image, phone) that is in the Content Library and once connected to a widget displays on the site.

You can populate the Content Library with two types of content: text and images. Each text section in the Business info can contain up to 4000 characters.

Some Content Library fields have predefined labels. For example, the labels for Logo or Social icons fields are predefined. Other fields, such as Collections or non-default business text fields, have custom labels you need to define yourself.

Connect Business Data

The business data you can connect to the widgets on your site is summarized in the following table:

SEO Fields in Page Settings

You can connect the SEO Title and SEO Description to any text field in the Content Library.

Note

Connected data is available for individual pages. The site SEO settings are not able to be connected.

Data Connections and Site Elements

Note

To connect data to site elements, there must be content in the Content Library. If there is no content, the option to Connect Data does not appear on the site.

Customized Text Styles:

If the text style has been customized in the Business Text area, this style will carry over to the connected widget.
To reconnect the text to the Theme Text styles, go to the Business Text area and click the Clear Formatting icon for the specific text.

Inherited Text Styles:

When you connect text data, it will inherit the Theme Text styles by default unless the style has been customized in the Business Text area.
To override the inherited text style, you can change it in the widget’s design editor.

Editing Limitations:

Please note that the inline text editing menu is not available for text widgets that are connected to dynamic content.

Connect Data to Site Elements

Note

To connect data to site elements, there must be content in the Content Library. If there is no content, the option to Connect Data does not appear on the site .

Connect a Widget or Canvas Element

To connect to a widget or canvas element*:

Right-click on the widget or element you want to connect, and select Connect to Data .
Select the desired data using the drop down (only relevant data options are shown).
Select Done .

The Connected Data icon appears on the widget or element indicating that it is connected.

*Section backgrounds can be connected.

*The canvas elements that can be connected are:

Classic Editor: row and column backgrounds.
Editor 2.0: section backgrounds.

Connect Data to SEO Settings and the Header HTML

To connect SEO settings and the header HTML:

In the side panel, click Pages , then click the settings () icon for the desired dynamic page.
Click Edit Page SEO .
Click the Connect Data icon for the desired field.

Tip

Continue to scroll to reach the Header HTML field.

Select the desired data using the drop-down (only relevant data options are shown).
Click Done .

Inline Binding

Inline binding is the ability to use Dynamic for a specific word or words within supported widgets. The connected text can be designed and linked just like regular text.

Note

The Content Library design overrides the text editor design for connected text.

To use inline binding for text widgets:

Type {{{ in the text editor to trigger the Connect Data pop up.
Select the label you want connected.
Click Save .

Note

Only users with Connected Data in their account see the Connected Data icon, but all users see the label in curly brackets while editing.

Alternatively, you can type the label directly into the text editor surrounded by two curly brackets to connect the text using inline binding. For example, {{content_library.global}} .

Inline Binding for the Accordion Widget

To use inline binding for the Accordion widget:

Add an accordion widget to the desired page.
Open the widget's content tab.
Select any accordion item.
In the description field text box, click the Data Binding button in the top left of the toolbar.
From the connected data popup choose any field you want to connect.

The chosen field will be added to the description field as an inline binding item - this indicates you can add static text to the description as well and combine it with the dynamic data.

Note

Only the description currently supports inline binding. All other fields (title, image, and button) are static. If not needed, the image and button fields can be hidden.

Disconnect a Widget

To disconnect a widget:

Right-click the widget, and click Change connection .
In the menu, select None .

For widgets that have content editing menus, if you are already in the widget content editor, you can hover on the blue icon in the top-right corner and click Disconnect .

Disconnecting a widget reverts the text and its style to the previously used style.

Disconnect Data to SEO Settings and the Header HTML

To disconnect SEO settings and the header HTML:

In the side panel, click Pages , then click the settings () icon for the desired dynamic page.
Click Edit Page SEO .
Click the Connect Data () icon for the desired field.

Tip

Continue to scroll to reach the Header HTML field.

Click into the drop down list and select None .
Click Done .

Edit Data

The content that is being synced through Connected Data can be edited directly in the pop up, in the Content Library, or in the external source (connected to the Content Library) to which it is connected. Remember to republish the site after you make the changes. The design of the connected site elements can be changed at any point.

Connected Templates

Connected Data is not just for your site, it is for each and every template you build. The more you use it in your templates, the easier it is for you to move between them and update data.

Create Connected Template

A template is turned into a connected template by connecting the widgets in the template to the Content Library. A benefit to using a connected template is each time you create a site with the template, all connected elements are automatically populated by data in that site’s Content Library. This saves you time, as opposed to manually entering content into each individual widget on your site. In addition, you only have to update content once in the Content Library and it will update across all relevant connected widgets. For example, if your business phone number changes you can update it in the Content Library once and all connected widgets that display the business phone number will be updated.

To create a connected template you need to create a template, then connect the elements in the template to the Content Library.

Step 1: Create Template

To create a template:

Log in to your account to access your Dashboard.
Click Create New Site .
At the top of the page, click Create Template .
Browse the list of templates to find one you can use as a starting point for your design. You can hover over a template and click Preview to view the template on desktop, tablet, and mobile screen sizes.
Once you know which template you want to use, hover over it and click Create & Customize .
Type a name in the Template name field, then click Create & Customize . The name you type here is what will appear in the Custom Templates section.
Customize your template in the editor by adding pages and widgets.
In the side panel, click Content , then click Business Info and enter placeholder data. Do the same for Business Text and Business Images . The purpose of adding placeholder data is to give the widgets data to connect to in the next step, Connect Template Widgets to Content Library.

Next, you need to connect the widgets in your template to the placeholder data you entered in the Content Library.

Step 2: Connect Template Widgets to Content Library

To connect data to site widgets:

Right-click the widget you want to connect to a data field.
From the context menu, click Connect to data .
In the Connect Data dialog, select the data field that you want to connect this widget to.
Any widget you successfully connect to the data in the Content Library is marked with a blue Connected Data icon.

When you are finished customizing the template design and connecting widgets, click Done in the upper right corner.

The template will be saved in the Custom Templates section of the template selection page.

Troubleshooting

If you do not see the Connected Data option in a widget’s context menu, it could be that the Content Library is empty. Make sure there is data here.
If you do not see a label you are looking for in the menu, double-check that the Content Library element you created with this label has content. You can only connect to empty labels in Template mode.
If you do not see updated data in a specific widget, make sure the widget is connected to the correct label.

Add and Publish a Blog Post

Thu, 16 Oct 2025 12:17:50 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - Learn how to add and publish a blog post on your site

Element Backgrounds

Thu, 16 Oct 2025 09:05:08 GMT

Element Backgrounds

Customize the background of elements to match the theme of your business with eye-catching and creative designs. Choose from custom background images in the photo gallery, upload your own images, use video backgrounds, or apply colors and gradients to add a unique touch to your site.

Note

Any file (text, image, video, or audio) uploaded to the system is publicly available. No personal and/or confidential information should be uploaded. To remove the file completely, delete the file from the Media Manager.

Tip

All YouTube background videos display the video title and uploader before the video starts on load. There is no way to remove these items without manually changing the CSS. Due to this change, YouTube videos are not recommended for background video.

To edit the background of elements:

To access the design editor, right-click the element, and click Edit Design . Or if you are in flex mode or Editor 2.0, select Edit Design from the floating menu to open the design panel. Click the element to open the floating menu, then click the option to edit design.
Navigate to the Background section.
Depending on the element, select Color , Image , or Video and select the desired background.
Some elements also have the option for image sliders. To create an image slider, select multiple images then click Done .
For details on color options, see Color Picker
(Optional) When selecting an image for a background, click the Do not optimize this image toggle to prevent optimization if a single image is used (this setting will appear after an image has been selected).

Background Image Sliders

Some containers offer the option to add a background image slider.

To create a background slider:

To access the design editor, right-click the element, and click Edit Design . Or if you are in flex mode or Editor 2.0, select Edit Design from the floating menu to open the design panel. Click the element to open the floating menu, then click the option to edit design.
Navigate to the Background section.
Click Image .
Click on the + sign and select multiple images rather than a single image from the image picker.
Click Done .
(Optional) Once the slider is created, you can set slide settings such as slide transition style and slide speed from the row design menu.
(Optional) Any of the other background image options such as Background Overlay, Positioning, and display style can be applied to the slider.

Background Image Configuration

Once an image or image slider has been setup, additional configuration options will become available.

While the options can vary, the two most common ones are:

Image Display Styles: these are the various ways you can control how the image or images are displayed within the container. These options allow you to adjust how an image fits, repeats, or stretches to cover the area. There are four options:
Cover : Stretches the image to cover the entire area without losing its aspect ratio (since it's covering the area of the container, parts of the image may be cutoff).
Full image : Displays the full image. While the image won't be cutoff, there may be bars that show up on either side or above and below the image, depending on the size of the container.
Tile : Repeats the full image at its original size in a tile pattern to fill the area. If the image is larger than the container, it will not repeat.
No repeat : Displays the full image at its original size without repeating it. If the image is larger than the container, it will be cut off. If it's smaller than the container, there will be space around the image.
Image Position Type (Editor 2.0 and flex mode only): Select from Default, Static, or Parallax. Note that Static position will not work on iOS devices.
Position : This setting determines where the image is placed, such as at the center, top, bottom, left, or right of the container. The position setting works in conjunction with image display options to control how the image is displayed. Background image position is set per screen size in Editor 2.0 and flex mode.

Video Backgrounds

Use Video Backgrounds to quickly add a video from YouTube, Vimeo or Dailymotion. Video backgrounds can catch a visitor's eye with moving content and add a stylish modern look to any site.

Tip

To add a video background to a container:

Have a video ready to upload or a video's shareable URL that is uploaded on YouTube, Vimeo or Dailymotion.
Right-click the element you would like to add this background to, then click Edit Design .
Navigate to the Background section.
Click the Video tab. You have the following options:

Click Upload Video and select the video you want to upload. You can upload up to 200MB in all formats. You can upload video from your device, Facebook, Instagram, Dropbox, Google Drive or record a video using your webcam.
Paste the URL of the video you would like to use into the YouTube, Vimeo or Dailymotion URL textbox.

Note

YouTube videos are not supported on mobile as they do not auto-play on iOS devices

Considerations

YouTube videos are not supported on mobile as they do not auto-play on iOS devices.
iPhones with a battery on low power mode will not auto-play videos on a site, and instead will show a play button.
Background videos will not play sound.
Videos can take time and bandwidth to load, and can distract users from important links or text on your page, so use videos sparingly.
Consider adding an overlay with a higher opacity of the video background to make the effect more subtle.
When adding a Dailymotion video that is part of a playlist, make sure to only add the direct link to the video (and omit the playlist parameter, which looks something like this:?playlist=x1x2f3). If your video’s URL has this parameter, just remove it. For example: https://www.dailymotion.com/video/x60ktex?playlist=x5x6f2 would be https://www.dailymotion.com/video/x60ktex

Troubleshooting and FAQs

Color Picker

Thu, 16 Oct 2025 08:21:32 GMT

Color Picker

Color Picker is the function of your editor that lets you manage color scheme of text, background, overlays and more. You can choose a color from the color palette, input a HEX or RGB value or even create a custom gradient. Recent colors feature will help you keep your color scheme consistent and maintain a professional look and feel on your site.

Color style

Before you pick the color scheme, you need to choose where you want to use single color or a gradient.

If you are using single color option, you can pick a color from Recent colors tab or jump to Choose another color .

Gradient background will be an available option for row, column and widget backgrounds and image overlays. To apply a gradient, with the color picker open, click the drop down above the color palette (it may say Color ), select Gradient , then make sure to:

Pick 2 colors of the gradient stops
You can reverse the colors to adjust the stops positioning
Choose gradient direction
Center option will generate radial gradient
Side options will create linear gradient

Note

Gradients are not able to be saved in Theme Colors .

Theme Colors

Theme colors allow you to define a color palette and link the individual colors to any or all widget with color settings. The color of any element that is linked to the theme colors will automatically be updated when the linked color is changed in the theme colors settings. This allows you to quickly make color changes, which helps reduce design time and ensures your site's style is consistent across pages.

Saved Colors

Save colors that are frequently used across your site by adding them to the Saved Colors list in the color picker.

To add a color to the saved colors, click the Saved Colors tab on the color picker and click the + icon. To remove a color from the Saved Colors list, right-click the color and select Remove .

You can save up to 48 colors and gradients in the Saved Colors list.

Recent Colors

When picking a color, the recent colors menu shows a sample of colors that were recently used in your site. This allows you to quickly pick colors that are already on your site.

Choose Another Color

Select a color's hue using the color palette on the right or the color panel. Alternatively, you can enter the HEX or RGB value of the color you want in text box below the vertical color gradient.

To match a color perfectly from anywhere on your site (images, texts, and so on), click the eyedropper tool and select the color from your site you want to use. No need to spend any time trying to figure out a color’s exact name or value.

Opacity

The opacity slider determines the transparency of an element. Keep in mind that as you reduce an element's opacity, whatever is behind it (background image or color) will begin to blend with that element.

Contrast Checker for Text Colors

The contrast checker for text colors helps improve the accessibility of sites by indicating if the contrast between the text and the background meets the AA or AAA standard*. The contrast checker appears in the color picker whenever the color picker is being used for text.

Following is the criteria that determines if the AA or AAA standard is met:

*In accessibility standards, "AA" and "AAA" represent different levels of color contrast requirements. AA level means your colors have enough contrast to be readable, but might still present problems for some users. AAA level means you have high contrast that should be readable for the vast majority of your users.

The contrast checker will be disabled in the following circumstances:

If the selected text has multiple colors. For example, if several words in the text are blue and several others are pink.
If the text is on a gradient background.
If the text is on an image background.

Color Picker Considerations

Gradient is not available for text elements, so you will not see it in a Color Picker for text elements in widgets design editor of Theme tab.
When working with backgrounds, switching between Color and Image will set the settings on the previous option to null. For example, if you were using a color and changed the setting to Image, any color or gradient settings will be removed.
Gradients override individual button backgrounds. To change them back, reselect the background for individual buttons.

Media Terms and Licensing

Wed, 15 Oct 2025 13:08:24 GMT

Media Terms and Licensing

Media licensing can sometimes be difficult to understand. In the questions and answers below, we do our best to provide answers to common questions that have come up.

Website Builder works with multiple media providers, and it is important to know the source of the image you are considering using on your site as different images have different licensing terms. Once you select media in the Media Manager, Picker, or Library, you will see its source on the right side. Some media might not have a defined source and will not show that information. In the questions and answers, make sure to refer to the answer that corresponds to the provider source of your media.

For the full terms related to the usage of the Website Builder platform, refer to our terms of service and privacy policy. In any conflict between what is written here and our terms of service, the terms of service prevail.

Licensing Terms

Pexels : see the full Pexels terms: www.pexels.com/terms-of-service
Giphy : see the full Giphy terms: giphy.com/terms
Shutterstock : see the full Shutterstock terms: www.shutterstock.com/license
Noun Project (icons): See the full Noun Project terms: thenounproject.com/legal/terms-of-use/
No defined source : You are granted an individual, non-exclusive, non-transferable right, throughout the world, in perpetuity, to use such image, or any part thereof, an unlimited number of times, solely as incorporated into websites built using the Website Builder platform.

FAQs

Can I use the same media multiple times on a single site?

Pexels : Yes

Giphy : Yes

Shutterstock : Yes

Noun Project : Yes

No defined source : Yes

Can I use the same media on more than one site?

Pexels : Yes

Giphy : Yes

Shutterstock : No, an image can be used for a single site.

Noun Project : Yes

No defined source : Yes

Can I use the media on other digital or physical assets that are not my site?

Pexels : Yes, as long as you adhere to the Pexels terms .

Giphy : Yes, as long as you adhere to the Giphy terms .

Shutterstock : No, an image can be used for a single site.

Noun Project : Yes

No defined source : No

Can I get a refund for purchased media?

Pexels : Not relevant, Pexels media is free.

Giphy : Not relevant, Giphy images are free.

Shutterstock : No, we do not provide refunds for purchased images.

Noun Project : Not relevant, the Noun Project icons are free.

No defined source : Not relevant, these images are free.

Can I edit, change the media?

Pexels : Yes, please see Pexels full terms .

Giphy : No, this is not allowed according to the Giphy terms .

Shutterstock : No.

Noun Project : To edit a Noun Project icon, the icon will need to be purchased directly on their site. See their page Can I modify icons? for more information.

No defined source : Yes.

Do I need to give attribution to the owner of the image?

Pexels : Not required, but would be appreciated.

Giphy : No

Shutterstock : No.

Noun Project : Not required, but would be appreciated.

No defined source : No.

Image Editor

Wed, 15 Oct 2025 11:34:48 GMT

Image Editor

The Image Editor allows you to make quick edits to your site images. Transform (crop or rotate), add text, and more to the images in your site. The Image Editor can be accessed on the canvas from any location an image can be added (for example, a row or column background), image widgets, or widgets that can include an image (for example, the Tabs widget).

To open the Image Editor:

Open the location or widget's settings.
Navigate to the image's thumbnail (in the location or widget's settings).
Click Edit .

Example from the Photo Gallery widget:

Edit Images

After opening the Image Editor, there are several options available, from cropping an image, adding a frame, making adjustments, and more. Edits can also be undone or canceled completely (if the Cancel button is selected before the Save and Close is).

Considerations and FAQs

When you edit an image with the Image Editor, it is saved under Site Images in the Image Picker and Media Manager (images do not replace previous images when making edits, they create new versions). The file name of edited photos will be the same with an autogenerated alphanumeric number at the end, such as file-name-213f3kv.jpg
The Image Editor is only available from a location on the canvas and not from the Image Picker or Media Manager.
Images are able to be cropped, though not able to be resized.

Media: Guidelines and Specifications

Wed, 15 Oct 2025 11:03:22 GMT

Media: Guidelines and Specifications

Media plays a crucial role in enhancing the visual appeal and effectiveness of your website. Proper use of images, videos, and other media types can engage visitors, convey information more effectively, and create a more dynamic user experience.

General Guidelines, Limitations, and Key Concepts

Any file (text, image, video, or audio) uploaded to the system is publicly available. No personal and/or confidential information should be uploaded. To remove the file completely, delete the file from the Media Manager.
Images, Icons, Audio Clips, and Files: up to 15,000 images, audio clips, and files combined per site. Additional files may result in an error message. Each file should be no larger than 50MB.
Videos: up to 100 per site. Additional files may result in an error message. Each file should be no larger than 200MB. Larger files may result in an error message or not complete uploading. If additional videos are needed, YouTube or Vimeo may be possible options.
Spaces within file names are not supported. Files are able to uploaded that have spaces, though could result in unexpected behavior with the file.
Files and their names may be cached for a while. If a file is deleted, it will likely remain available for some time. This includes the file name, which means you may encounter the error "Name already exists" when attempting to use the name of a recently deleted file.
Due to caching, it is not recommended to upload a file with the same name as a recently deleted file, as the deleted file may continue to appear for some time.
SVG file type: SVGs are image files that contain HTML code, meaning when you add an SVG icon to your site you are also adding lines of code. Multiple complex SVGs can add thousands of lines of code and cause your site to load slowly. If you need to use multiple SVG icons on the same page, we recommend turning some of them into regular images (.png, .jpeg, etc) to avoid loading or functionality issues.
Files of any type cannot be uploaded to a domain's root folder.
File metadata (including EXIF data) is not supported and will be removed upon upload.

Aspect ratio

Aspect ratio is the relationship between the width and height of media and represents the numerical value of its shape (typically, the aspect ratio is most important in images and videos). The size of the media doesn’t necessarily change its aspect ratio. For example, both 1280x720px and 3840x2160px have the same aspect ratio of 16:9.

If a media file's aspect ratio is significantly different than the shape of the section or element it will be used in, it may appear to be cut off. Depending on the widget or element, changing the file's aspect ratio may be the best way to fix it. For images, the built in Image Editor can be used to change the aspect ration by cropping it. If a video needs to be edited, it would need to be done with an outside tool.

Images

Note

File size limit is 50MB per image.
Image files contribute to the 15,000 limit file.

Supported File Types for the Image Tab in the Media Manager

The following image file types are supported:

png, jpg, jpeg, gif, svg, svg+xml, ico, x-icon, webp

System Requirements for Webp

The following versions are supported for Webp images:

iPhone : v14 and later
Mac/Safari : latest version
Chrome : all versions
Android : all versions

Built-in Image Optimization

The editor optimizes images on demand, tailoring them to the device being used and the visible size on the site.

Note that the size of the uploaded image is never increased, and only images displayed on the site smaller than the original are optimized. For example, if you upload an image with a 2000px width but it’s used in an area requiring only 1920px, the image will be optimized to 1920px. However, if you upload an image with a 100px width, it won’t be optimized and may appear pixelated if displayed in a larger area.

While the editor can optimize images of any size, it’s recommended to upload images close to the maximum size they will appear on the site. For instance, if the image will be a thumbnail with a width of 160px, consider uploading an image with a maximum width of around 200px.

In addition to optimization, all images on the site are served in the WebP format. This format allows for smaller file sizes while preserving image quality, contributing to faster site performance without sacrificing visual clarity.

Note

Website Builder's image optimization works only on JPG and PNG images. If you are uploading a TIFF, GIF, or other image formats, Website Builder might not be able to optimize it.

Disable Image Optimization

Optimization can be disabled for background images, the Image widget, and the Photo Gallery widget.

Warning

Disabling image optimization could impact page speed and or performance.

Aspect Ratio vs Resolution

Aspect ratio is the ratio of an image's width and height attribute and is essentially associated with the shape of the image. A 16:9 aspect ratio can be a 16x9 px image, or a 1600x900 px image. It is basically any image resolution that has the ratio of 16:9.

Visualizing the two most common aspect ratios:

The resolution of an image refers to the amount of detail an image holds, specifically the number of pixels that make up the image and is essentially the detail and clarity of the image.

Aspect Ratios and Devices

While images are optimized on your site, it does not actually resize the design of images on your site. If you use an image on the desktop that has an aspect ratio of 16:9, it will look perfect on the desktop since a desktop device is wide. A mobile device, however, is much smaller, and so a 16:9 aspect ratio will sometimes look small.

To compensate, you can either use the hide on device feature to create specific versions for those devices or you can resize the image's dimensions in the design area of the widget. Changes to size are device independent for most elements.

Aspect Ratio and Size Recommendations

The recommended aspect ration is dependent on where it will be used and how you would like it displayed.

If an image will be used in a landscape orientation, an example recommended ratio could be 16:9 since this would indicate it will be wider than it is tall. It would be the opposite for portrait, 9:16.

For size recommendations, in general it is best to keep the image width the same as or slightly larger than what the optimized size will be. For example, if the image will be used in an image widget on desktop, the recommended max width is 1920px or only slightly larger. Larger images require more optimization, which can affect image quality. If optimization is turned off, larger images won't suffer in quality but will slow down the site due to their size.

Common Ratios and Sizes

When an image will be spanning the width of the site:

Common aspect ratios for desktop: 16:9, 3:4
Common resolution sizes (px) for desktop: 1600x900, 1280x720, 1280x960

Mobile devices often have the opposite aspect ratio compared to desktop devices. You may have to use the hide on device feature to display mobile sliders correctly.

Widgets

The aspect ratio and size of a widget's image can vary based on the widget's size, location, and settings. While there are general guidelines, there are no fixed standards.

Gallery Layouts

Gallery widgets and widgets that offer gallery layouts

These widgets include the following:

Photo Gallery
Product Gallery
Media Slider
Third-party store page widgets

The aspect ratio of images in these widgets should reflect how you want it to display.

For example, square style galleries should have 1:1 ratio of images.
Tall image style galleries should have longer height ratios, like 2:5, or 200px by 500px.
The image ratios should be the same for design consistency. Leave some padding in the image to use the hover effect so that your images do not get cut off.
Common resolution sizes (px): Any resolution, but when possible not larger than 1500px for page speed.

Photo Gallery Widget

All the available layouts come with set aspect ratios that won't change, though the layout options with uniform images sizes have the option in the design settings to change the height. When the height is changed for these layouts, the aspect ratios will change based on the size of the widget.

The set aspect ratios for the mosaic layouts (the options with the images having varying sizes) will vary depending on the layout as well as the number of columns set in the design settings.

Third Party StorePage Widgets

While the widget on the category page offers a variety to select from, the image on the product page has an aspect ratio of 1:1.

To see the available options for the widget on the category page:

In the side panel, click Sell Online .
Click Store Pages .
Click Category Page (if the store does not have categories set up, the page will be grayed out and not available to be edited).
Right click on the widget displaying the categories and select Edit Design .
Click Products .
Click the thumbnail under Layout to see available layout options.
To see the available aspect ratios, scroll down in the Products section to the Image aspect ratio option.

Aspect Ratios and Canvas Element

By default most element's aspect ratio will override the image's aspect ratio, resulting in parts of the image being cut off. However, some elements include a setting that allows the full image to be displayed without being cropped.

Backgrounds

When using the Cover option in the element's design settings, the element's aspect ratio will override the image's aspect ratio. If the aspect ratios do not match, parts of the image will be cut off.

Additionally, some elements, such as rows and sections, adjust to the device's screen size. As a result, the element's aspect ratio will change based on the size of the screen currently viewing the site.

One technique to prevent the image from being cutoff is to use the Full Image option in the element's design settings. Please note that not all elements will have this option.

Widgets

Some widgets offer a setting that allows the full image to be displayed without being cropped.

Widget's that offer the setting to display the full image:

Image (in Editor 2.0; in the Classic Editor the widget will always adhere to the images aspect ratio)
Media Slider
Photo Gallery

Maximum Image Size

The total area of an image cannot exceed 3,145,728 pixels. It is unlikely any of your images will be over this limit, but you can quickly check by multiplying the pixel width by the height.

Each file should be no larger than 50MB. Larger files may result in an error message or not complete uploading.

Uploading an image bigger than the limit could result in the following errors:

Images fail to upload.
Images upload, but thumbnails in the image picker do not display.
Images do not load in the editor.
Images do not load on the live site.

Logo

It is recommended you use SVG format for logo images, as SVG files are not optimized in the same way as other image files, so even if the logo you upload is small in size, you will not lose quality.

Note

SVGs are image files that contain HTML code, meaning when you add an SVG icon to your site you are also adding lines of code.

Size Guidelines

The range for the width of the logo when incorporated into the header or footer is between 250px - 400px. Typically, the height is not a concern and will be determined by the logo's aspect ratio.

Considerations

Biggest is not always the best

Uploading the biggest resolution for your site guarantees that your site's images are high resolution for your clients and customers. However, keep in mind that large images also have a drastic effect on your page speed. Since high-resolution images are scaled down, users do not normally notice the difference in resolution. It is better to upload images that are as large as how they are intended to be used. For example, if you have a picture that is 300px by 300px on your site, you do not want to upload it as a 4000px by 4000px image.

FAQs and Troubleshooting

Icons

Note

For information and guidelines for site icons that can be found in the SEO & Settings area of the editor, see Site SEO Settings.
Icon files contribute to the 15,000 limit file.

Supported File Types for the Icons Tab in the Media Manager

The file type, SVG, is the only supported file type for this tab.

Recommendations and Guidelines

Common aspect ratios: Generally 1:1, but any aspect ratio will work.
Common resolution sizes (px): 200x200, 80x80 or any resolution. SVGs can be any resolution.

Warning

SVGs are image files that contain HTML code, meaning when you add an SVG icon to your site you are also adding lines of code. Multiple complex SVGs can add thousands of lines of code and cause your site to load slowly or potentially break. If you need to use multiple SVG icons on the same page, we recommend turning some of them into regular images (.png, .jpeg, etc) to avoid loading or functionality issues.

Videos

Videos can be hosted in the site's files by uploading them to the media manager or by recording directly using your computer's camera and microphone. Additionally, videos from YouTube, Vimeo, or Dailymotion can be added to specific parts of the site using the video widget or as a background for elements that support video. These external videos will only be available in the location where they are added and will not be available in the editor.

Note

Up to 100 videos can be uploaded per site. Additional files may result in an error message. Each file should be no larger than 200MB. Larger files may result in an error message or not complete uploading. If additional videos are needed, YouTube or Vimeo may be possible options.

Supported File Types for the Videos Tab in the Media Manager

Most video file types are supported with the exception of SWF.

Considerations

Videos can take time and bandwidth to load, and can distract users from important links or text on your page, so use videos sparingly.
YouTube videos are not supported on mobile as they do not auto-play on iOS devices.
iPhones with a battery on low power mode will not auto-play videos on a site, and instead will show a play button.
Background videos will not play sound.
When adding a Dailymotion video that is part of a playlist, make sure to only add the direct link to the video (and omit the playlist parameter, which looks something like this:?playlist=x1x2f3). If your video’s URL has this parameter, just remove it. For example: https://www.dailymotion.com/video/x60ktex?playlist=x5x6f2 would be https://www.dailymotion.com/video/x60kt ex

Troublesho oting

My video won't upload

There could be a number of causes for why a video won't upload. Here are some techniques to try and troubleshoot:

Check the file size to ensure it is below 200mb.
Review the current videos uploaded to ensure there are less 100.
Try uploading a different video.
If another video uploads, it likely is related to the video's file. Creating a new file from the original source may fix it.
If another video does not upload, it may be related to something local to your computer, for instance page speed or browser related. If it's local to your computer, some techniques to try could be:
Clearing browser cache
Trying a different browser
Trying a different network
Restarting your computer

Audio

Note

Audio files contribute to the 15,000 limit file.

Audio can be hosted in the site's files by uploading them to the media manager or by recording directly using your computer's microphone. Additionally, audio from SoundCloud or Mixcloud can be added to specific parts of the site using the audio widget. External audio will only be available in the location where it is added and will not be available in the editor.

Files

Note

Files in the file tab of the media manager contribute to the 15,000 limit file.
You cannot upload files to your root folder.

The file tab in the media manager supports nearly any file type. Files uploaded here can be linked to using the link picker but cannot be directly used in any widget. For example, an image uploaded to this tab will not be available for use with any image widget.

Supported File Types for the Files tab in the Media Manger

The following file types are supported:

.pdf, .xls, .xlsx, .doc, .docx, .zip, .ppt, .pptx, .psd, .txt, .xml, .mp3, .ttf, .otf, .woff, .eot, .svg, .odt, .ott, .js, .css, .png, .jpg, .gif, .jpeg, .rar

General Media File FAQs and Troubleshooting

Business Content

Wed, 15 Oct 2025 09:42:27 GMT

Business Content

In the Content area of the editor there are options for managing various business resources. These options provide essential tools and information such as Business Info, Business Text, Business Images, and a Find and Replace option. These resources are designed to streamline the process of adding and managing content on your site, though their use is optional.

These resources can also be used for Dynamic Business Content.

Business Info

The Business Info area is where the core of the businesses information is stored, for instance the business name, type, address, and phone number. The button to sync with a Google Business Profile can be found here as well.

Add or Edit Information

To add or edit information:

In the side panel, click Content .
Click Business Info .

The following fields are available:

Business name.
Business type (if enabled, will be used for Local Business Schema).
Business logo.
Address (additional locations can be added, see the section in this article Add Additional Locations ).
Location name.
Location address. The address needs to be selected from the list that populates.
Phone Number.
Email.
Social Icons. To add social accounts, click on the desired social's icon. The social's site is already populated by default, on the unique account identifier will need to be typed or pasted in. For example with Facebook, if the account's URL is www.facebook.com/mybusiness, only mybusiness needs to be entered into the field.

Note there is a 200 character limit for this field. If your link is over this limit, try removing parameters to shorten it.

Business Hours.
Additional Schema Fields.

Some of this information will be available to be used when used with relevant widgets.

Local Business Schema

Enable Local Business Schema to increase your site’s chances of showing up in rich search results.

Google Business Profile

Connect a Google Business Profile to keep business info synced everywhere.

Add Additional Locations

To add additional locations:

In the side panel, click Content .
Click Business Info .
Click More Actions .
Click Add Another Location .

Business Text

Business text is where additional information about the business can be stored. There are built in fields and the option to add custom ones.

The information here can be connected to elements on the site using Connected Data. This can assist with having one source of truth to ensure the site shows the most accurate and up-to-date content without having to review and replace the information throughout the site.

The About Us field can also be used for Local Business Schema.

To add additional fields:

In the side panel, click Content .
Click Business Text .
Click Add Another Text .

Business Images

Business Images can be used for Local Business Schema (the first 5 images) as well as connected to elements on the site using Connected Data. This can assist with having one source of truth to ensure the site shows the most up-to-date images without having to review and replace the image throughout the site.

Note that all images uploaded to business images (not just business images used on the canvas) appear in the alt text manager.

Import and Collect Content

Wed, 15 Oct 2025 09:30:14 GMT

Import and Collect Content

You can use the Media Manager to import and manage content from your computer, social media, or the provided free and premium content. You can add images, videos, audio clips, and files. The number of which varies per media type. The image, audio, and file size limit is 50MB per file and the video size limit is 200MB per video.

To access content, in the left panel, click Content.

Note

Any file (text, image, video, or audio) uploaded to the system is publicly available. No personal and/or confidential information should be uploaded. To remove the file completely, delete the file from the Media Manager.
Changes made to specific widgets on the site override content added to the Media Manager.
You can add up to 15,000 images, audio clips, and files per site. For videos, up to 100 can be uploaded. The image, audio, video, and file size limit is 200MB per file.
Spaces within file names are not supported.

Import and Add Content to the Media Manager

The Media Manager allows you to import and add all content types (images, videos, audio, and files) from one place. Content can be imported from your computer, Facebook, Dropbox, Google Drive, Google Photos, or Instagram (images can also be imported from a site or via a web search). Once imported, you can add any variety of content types to folders and then access the content in various site widgets. This is helpful when you want to work page-by-page and have one folder per page.

Note

Spaces within file names are not supported.
You can add up to 15,000 images, audio clips, and files per site. For videos, up to 100 can be uploaded. The image, audio, video, and file size limit is 200MB per file.

Import Content to Media Manager

To import content:

In the side panel, click Content .
Click Media Manager .
Select the desired tab (Images, Icons, Videos, Audio, Files).
(Optional) Select the folder you would like to add the content to or click + Add Folder.
Continue with the steps below depending on the type of content.
Images
Click Import Images to open a drop down menu with options to import From a Site or From Social Media (additional sources can be found with this option).
Click Upload Images to open your device's file manager.
Icons, Videos, Audio, and Files
Depending which tab you are on, click Upload Videos , Upload Audio , or Upload Files (when uploading on the Files tab, multiple file types can be uploaded at once).
Follow the prompts of the option you select.
Once media or files have been uploaded, click Upload or to delete an item for the list, click X .

Note

When using the Upload Images option, images will be immediately uploaded to the Media.

Add Free and Premium Content to Site Content

The Media Manager offers access to free and premium images (Shutterstock Images) as well as free videos and icons. Both the free images and videos are royalty free and provided by Pexel. To make the media accessible in supported widgets, they need to be added to the media manager.

To add free media:

In the side panel, click Content .
Click Media Manager .
Select the desired tab: Images , Icons , or Videos .
(Optional) Search for images.
Hover over the desired content and click Select .
Click Add to Site Images , Add to Site Icons , or Add to Site Videos .

Note

For Pexel's terms, see www.pexels.com/terms-of-service

Premium Images (Shutterstock Images)

Add Premium images to your site through our Shutterstock integration. You can try out a Premium image before purchase; these images display on your site with watermarks. You can proceed with the purchase at any time from the Image tab in the Media Manager or the Image Picker.

Note

Image purchases are single site licenses, meaning you will you not be able to transfer premium images from one site to another. For the same reason, premium images cannot be downloaded from the editor. To learn more, please view our article on image licenses.
Although you can deselect a Premium image from displaying in a widget or element, it is not possible to delete a purchased Premium image.
Please note that client accounts are not able to purchase premium images. In regards to team members, admins will automatically be given permission to purchase premium images. For any other team groups, you will need to add the permission manually.
For Shutterstock terms, see www.shutterstock.com/license .

To add Premium Images:

Once on the Image tab in the Media Manager or the Image Picker, search for an image.
In the side panel, click Premium Images .
Locate the image you want to use, and click Select . You have the following options:

Try with watermark. To try the premium image before you purchase it, click Try with watermark . The image displays with a Shutterstock watermark.

Note

It is possible to publish a site with a watermark image. The image displays with the watermark on the live site.

Purchase. All images are $3.00. Premium image purchases are non-refundable.

Try with Watermark (Pending Purchases)

If you choose to try an image with a watermark, the image goes into an Images Cart.

To see the Images Cart:

In the side panel, click Content .
Click Media Manager .
In the side panel of the Image tab, under Site Images, click Pending Purchase . Alternatively, click the cart icon in the top bar.
Select images you want to purchase, and click Purchase .

FAQs and Troubleshooting

Media Panel

Tue, 14 Oct 2025 16:09:03 GMT

Media Panel

Only available on Editor 2.0.

The Media Panel exists in the side panel of the editor and allows you to easily drag and drop new images and icons onto the canvas or replace existing images. You can add an image or icon to any widget that contains an image or icon element, columns, sections, or backgrounds.

To add media from the Media Panel:

In the side panel, click Media .
Use the following Media Panel features to find or upload the desired media:
Search. Type in the search bar. Your search query is retained until you delete it.
Site Media or Stock Media tabs. Toggle between media you’ve uploaded to the Media Manager or select from available stock media.
Filter and sort. You can sort by date uploaded, alphabetical order, or filter based on folders you’ve created in the Media Manager.
Upload media or collect from a client. Click Upload Media button or the horizontal three dot icon at the bottom of the panel to import media from an existing website, online platforms like Dropbox, Facebook, Google Drive, or even from your client using the Content Collection form.
Manage media organization. To manage your media, such as adding folders or organizing media in a larger view, click the Manage Media icon at the top of the panel.
Click the desired media item in the Media Panel and drag it to the canvas. As you hover the media item over the location you will get a preview, the media item is not actually added until you release it. If you do not like the media item, simply drag and drop a new one in its place.

Media Manager, Libraries, and Pickers

Tue, 14 Oct 2025 16:05:17 GMT

Media Manager, Libraries, and Pickers

The Media Manager, Libraries, and Pickers contain all your site’s media, i.e., images, videos, audio, and files.

To access the Media Manager, click on Content from the side panel, or in Editor 2.0, click Media, click the three dot icon in the lower right of the panel, then select Manage Media. The Libraries and Pickers are accessed from widgets. For example, to access the Image Picker, add an image widget to your site (the Quick View should automatically come up) and select Full View.

Navigating and Managing Media: Media Manager, Libraries, and Pickers

The Media Manager, Libraries, and Pickers offer a similar layout and management options. The primary differences are the media categories available and the ease of managing the media.

All categories are available from the Media Manager, while only the media the widget supports is available in Libraries and Pickers (for example, when opening a library from a video widget, you will only be able to see videos).

Media is primarily managed from the Media Manager, but can also be managed from a Library or Picker by enabling the manage toggle.

Note

To manage media from Libraries and Pickers, toggle on Manage Images , Manage Icons , Manage Videos , Manage Audio , Manage Files (the verbiage is dependent on the library or picker you are currently viewing).

Folders

Folders are a great way to keep your content organized. Here are some key points about using folders:

Universal Availability : Once created, a folder is available across all tabs, libraries, and pickers, regardless of where it was initially created.
File Count Indicator : Each folder displays a number next to its name, indicating the total number of files it contains. This number remains consistent across all tabs, libraries, and pickers. However, when you open the folder, only the files relevant to the current media type will be shown. For example, if a folder contains an image and an icon, and you open it on the Videos tab, no files will appear since the folder doesn't contain any videos.
File Visibility : After moving a file into a folder, it will no longer appear in the media type's main tab. You can access it through the folder or, if it was uploaded, by clicking on Uploaded.
Deleting Folders : Deleting a folder will also delete all files contained within it.

Using folders effectively can greatly enhance your ability to manage and locate your media files.

Media Manager

The Media Manager combines all media types under one location. There are tabs at the top to navigate between the media categories (Images, Videos, Audios, Files). All media can also be easily managed here. For more information on managing content see the section in this article, Navigating and Managing Media: Media Manager, Libraries, and Pickers .

To access the Media Manager:

In the side panel, click Content , then click Media Manager .
Or, in Editor 2.0, click Media , click the three dot icon in the bottom right of the panel, then select Manage Media .

Libraries, Pickers, and Quick Picker

Each type of media (Images, Icons, Videos, Audios, Files) has its own Library or Picker that will open depending on the widget’s supported format.

When selecting an image, icon, or video, the Quick Picker will be the first to appear. To view the picker or library, the Full View button can be selected.

Select Media

To select media, click the media file to select it.

For some widgets and elements, you can select multiple files at one time. As you select files, each will be surrounded by a border. When you click Done , all selected files will be added to the widget or element.

Quick Picker

The quick picker is a simple way to choose the desired image, icon, or video. You can select from your folders or from media that we have already pulled into the platform.

For most image and video widgets, when selecting an image or video to use on your site, by default the Quick Picker will appear first. To view the picker or library, the Full View button can be selected.

We use infinite scrolling, so just scroll down to reveal more options in this window.

With the quick picker open, you can:

Select the folder with media you want to use.
Click the + icon to upload your own media.
Switch to the Full View to open the Picker or Library.
(Images only) Select the type of image: Images, Textures, or Giphy

Managing Content from a Library or Picker

Individual media files can be deleted by hovering on the desired file then clicking the "x".

For all other manage options, toggle the Manage setting on. For more managing options, see the section in this article, Navigating and Managing Media: Media Manager, Libraries, and Pickers .

FAQs and Troubleshooting

How do I access a media file's link?

To access a files link:

In the side panel, click Content .
Click Media Manger .
Navigate to the tab the file is located (Images, Icons, Videos, Audio, or Files).
Click on the desired file.
In the side panel with the file's thumbnail and information, click the file's name.
The file should open in a new tab (depending on your browser's settings).

Backup, Publish, Re-publish, and Unpublish on Mobile

Tue, 14 Oct 2025 13:22:22 GMT

Backup, Publish, Re-publish, and Unpublish on Mobile

Mobile editing does not support Editor 2.0.

If your site needs changes or more work before it can go live, you need to be able re-publish or unpublish your site. This is exactly what the mobile version of the editor offers:

If you made any changes and would like to re-publish your site, on the bottom tab, tap Republish.
To preview your site before you go live, tap the Preview icon. To close the Preview mode, tap on the x icon in the top-right corner of the Preview Mode notification bar.

You may not publish the site from your mobile devices. You cannot preview the site on desktop or tablet view inside the mobile version of the editor, so this would mean publishing the site without the safety check of previewing it for all devices.

When you re-publish your site from mobile devices, an automatic backup of your site is created. You will find it among the back-ups of your site . Please note back-ups created on the desktop or the mobile version of the editor are not titled differently.

Select and Add Images on Mobile

Tue, 14 Oct 2025 13:15:25 GMT

Select and Add Images on Mobile

Mobile editing does not support Editor 2.0.

The mobile image picker offers a large variety of ready-to-use images and simplifies the process of adding images from your phone. You can use one of the images from the free library, re-use the images that were already used or purchased on your site, or upload an image from your mobile device. Additionally, you can take a picture with your camera and place it on your site directly from the editor.

One difference you can expect to find between desktop and mobile versions of the editor is the availability of the feature to purchase Premium Images. Even though you may not purchase images from within the mobile version of the editor, images you purchase on the desktop editor version are available in your mobile Image Picker under the Site Images tab.

Note

Any file (text, image, video, and so on) uploaded to the system is publicly available. No personal and/or confidential information should be uploaded. To remove the file completely, delete the file from the picker.

Add Images

To add images with the Mobile Image Picker:

Type a search string with the description of the image you are looking for in the search window, and select one of the images. Use one of the thousands of available free images, under Free Images.
Click the All Images drop-down menu and select Site Images to see all previously purchased or used images.
If you are looking for a specific image, you can also search for it in the Search for Images window and select a relevant images from the Site Images tab of the search results.
To upload a new image from your mobile device, tap on the upload icon at the bottom-right corner of your screen to open the device-native image picker. Depending on the model and version of your device OS, there are options to upload an image from your mobile gallery or storage, or take one with your camera and upload it directly.
Confirm the placement of the image you have picked by tapping on the check mark icon in the top-right corner of your screen.

Edit Click-to-Call and Click-to-Email on Mobile

Tue, 14 Oct 2025 12:45:40 GMT

Edit Click-to-Call and Click-to-Email on Mobile

Mobile editing does not support Editor 2.0.

To edit a phone number or email address in the Click-to-Call or Click-to-Email widgets:

Tap on the Click-To-Call or Click-to-Email widget and select Edit from the pop-up menu.
Edit the phone number, email, address, and text on the button.
When more than one phone number or email address is available, select the one you want to change from the drop-down menu.

Edit Sites on a Tablet

Tue, 14 Oct 2025 12:41:50 GMT

Edit Sites on a Tablet

Note

This information is specific to the Classic Editor, and not relevant for Editor 2.0 (formerly known as the All-Flex Editor).

Note

Due to Apple’s recent release for iPads (iPadOS) , iPads will display the same view as desktop, which means customizations for tablets will not be displayed on iPadOS.

You can build and edit all of your sites on your tablet. With simple tap control, you can create, publish, and edit all of your sites anywhere you go.

All of the site editing flexibility you have on the desktop is now available on a tablet, including:

Create a new site
Add and remove widgets
Edit widgets
Upload images & add them to your site
Edit text and images

The new tablet editor is designed to make on-the-go editing easy and intuitive. However, there are some design features that differ from the responsive editor on the desktop.

Use the Top Bar

The top bar in the table editor provides the exact same functionality as that of the desktop editor. Click

the three dots icon to go to Developer Mode, Help, and Dashboard tabs.

Add and Edit Widgets on Tablets

When editing on your tablet, you cannot add widgets using the left menu. To add widgets on a tablet:

Click on any element on the site to open a black bar.
The widget panel opens inline, immediately to the right of the +Widget tab on the black bar. From here, you can:

Access all settings in the context menu
Edit widgets
Move widgets
Add widgets inline
Go to link

Widgets that are added to the site in the tablet editor will always be placed beneath the element you selected. For example, if you clicked on a button in order to bring up the black editing bar and decided to add a new widget, the new widget appears under the selected button. After a widget is placed, you can drag and drop it to the desired location.

You will see widget handles on the corners of each widget and element. These make it easy to resize the widget.

Delete Widgets

There is no delete button on the black editing bar. This is to ensure that no one deletes a widget by accident. To delete a widget, click on the Settings icon and click Delete .

Upload Images

You can upload a photo taken by the camera on tablets. If you are using an iPad, you will be able to upload an image from iCloud.

Add Sections on Tablets

To add a new section to the site, click on any element. The + will appear, giving you the option to add a section.

Limitations of Tablet Editing

The following are specific features that can only be seen or edited in the desktop responsive editor.

Non-Visible Elements on Tablet

Some elements are only visible on desktop sites and not on tablet sites. These elements include:

Parallax Backgrounds
Sticky Header
Video Backgrounds (in some devices)
Tooltips explaining that the feature is only usable on desktop

While these features may not be seen while you are editing your site on a tablet, it does not mean that these features are not enabled on your desktop site. For example, you can enable a video background on a row while editing on a tablet, but you will only be able to see that change on the desktop version of your site. It will not appear when editing on a tablet.

Add Blogs

Blogs cannot be added to the site via the left menu when editing on a tablet. Blog widgets cannot be added to pages on your site as well. If you have an existing blog on your site, you can edit the content and the design of the blog widget; however, you cannot access the manage blog menu from the left menu.

Tooltips

Tooltips are not available on the top bar, text editor, or close the popup. The tooltips are available in the widgets.

Navigation Between Pages

When editing on a tablet, you cannot use the navigation links in order to navigate between pages. To navigate between pages, use the left menu to click the pages drop-down, then click the link to the page.

Personalization Rule Display

Existing personalization rules are not displayed in the left panel on the left menu. However, you can still add and edit personalization rules on a tablet.

Edit Image Slider and Photo Gallery Widgets on Mobile

Tue, 14 Oct 2025 10:42:14 GMT

Edit Image Slider and Photo Gallery Widgets on Mobile

Mobile editing does not support Editor 2.0.

Similar to editing your single image widgets, the mobile version of the editor allows you to manage items in Image Sliders or in a Photo Gallery. You can add or remove the image items and modify the associated text and buttons for each photo gallery or image slider image.

Image Editing Menu

To access the image editing menu, tap on the image and pick the Edit option from a pop-up menu that opens.

The window that opens gives you the opportunity to work with each or all of the items in the widgets.

Customize Single Images

Add Images

To add an image to your photo gallery or image slider, open the Images Editing Menu and tap on the white plus icon or on the + Image box.

Tapping on either of these will trigger the opening of image picker menu.

Edit Images

To edit the options of the already existing items, tap on the thumbnail of the item you want to edit in the Images Editing Menu. The options available for editing on mobile devices include Image, Text and Button editing.

Replace Images

To replace the item in an existing photo gallery or image slider:

Open the photo gallery or image slider editing menu and tap on the thumbnail of the image you would like to replace in the menu.
The Image Picker appears, where you can pick a replacement for the old image. For more information, see Select and Add Images on Mobile .

Change Alt Text

Alt text is an important property of the images on your site that helps search engines recognize and process image content of your site.

To change the alt text for each image:

Open the Image Editing menu, and tap on the alt text window.
Type, edit, replace or remove the alt text of the image.

Edit Photo Gallery or Image Slider Text

Open the Image Editing menu, and go to the Title or Slider Caption field.
Add, edit, or remove the title and caption of the slide.
To hide or unhide the title and caption on the widget, tap on the eye icon.

Edit Photo Gallery or Image Slider Buttons

Open the Image Editing menu, and tap the Button tab.
Edit or replace the text on the button.
To hide or unhide the button from the item, tap on the eye icon.

Remove Images

To remove the image and its associated text and button, open the Image Editing menu, and click Remove Item at the bottom of the image settings.

Manage Multiple Images

Reorder Images

To reorder images in a photo gallery or image slider:

Open the Image Editing menu.
Long-press the image and drag and drop the images in the order you want.

Delete Multiple Images

To delete several items at the same time:

Open the Images Editing menu, and tap Manage :
Tap the x icon on the images you want deleted.
Tap Done .

You cannot delete the last item the photo gallery, as this would result in an empty widget.

Edit Image Widgets on Mobile

Tue, 14 Oct 2025 10:22:19 GMT

Edit Image Widgets on Mobile

Mobile editing does not support Editor 2.0.

With the mobile version of the editor you can add customization for existing image widgets on your site. You can replace an image, change its alt text and add, remove, or edit the link on the image.

Image Editing Menu

To access the image editing menu, tap on the image and select Edit .

Replace Images

To replace an image in an existing image widget, open the image editing menu and tap the image thumbnail.

Tapping on the thumbnail will take you to the Image Picker, where you can pick a replacement for the old image.

Change Alt Text

Alt text is an important property of the images on your site that helps search engines recognize and process your site’s images.

To change the alt text description of the image, open image editing menu and type, edit, replace, or remove the alt text of the image.

Customise Image Links

To customise the link on the image widget, open the image editing menu, and tap on the Link image field.

The Link picker menu opens, which allows you to add, edit or remove the link.

Use the Dashboard on Mobile

Tue, 14 Oct 2025 09:48:45 GMT

Use the Dashboard on Mobile

Mobile editing does not support Editor 2.0.

The Dashboard is where you access all of your sites, change your editor settings, and gain access to resources to simplify your editing experiencing. The main body of the Dashboard displays a list of all your sites.

You have the following options from the dashboard on mobile:

To edit or preview your site, tap the overflow icon to the right of a site to open the Site Actions menu. Select to edit or preview your site. Alternatively, tap the site thumbnail or site title to open the site editor.
To search for a specific site, tap the magnifying glass icon in the top-right corner of your screen.
To access some of the general editor features, tap the hamburger icon in the top-left corner of your screen. You can:
Switch the Language of the editor for better editing experience.
Access Resources for marketing materials, product overview, webinars and more.
Access the Support center for help with mobile editing process.
Sign out of your account.

Site Stats on Mobile

Tue, 14 Oct 2025 09:18:15 GMT

Site Stats on Mobile

Mobile editing does not support Editor 2.0.

If you want to check site activity such as number of page views or contact form responses, you can track your site stats not only from desktop and tablet, but mobile version of the editor too.

The mobile version of the editor displays stats for visitors from all devices in total. You do not see separate stat cards for desktop, tablet and mobile. To filter stats by device, use the desktop editor.

Note

If the site is not published, no stats cards appear for your site.

If the site is published, but no event stats card appears, or the visits stats card show zero, no users have visited or engaged with the site in the selected time period.

View Stats

To view stats using the mobile version of the editor:

Tap the overflow icon (three vertical dots) to the right of your site in the Dashboard and select Stats from the Site Actions drop-down menu. Alternatively, tap the overflow icon in the bottom right corner while editing your site to open the Site Info menu and select Stats .

Stats Selection

From the top bar of the Stats window, select to see stats for yesterday, last week or last month.

Stats Cards

When viewing stats on mobile, each stat is visible on a different card. The cards in the stats reflect the following:

Visits to your site
Page views
Number of events on your site (Click to Call, Click to Map, Form Submissions, Click to Mail, and so on)

To switch between cards, swipe left.

Export Stats

To send the most recent stats by email, complete the form at the bottom of your Stats window, select a reporting period (last month or last week), and click Send Email .

Edit On the Go

Tue, 14 Oct 2025 08:41:09 GMT

Edit On the Go

Mobile editing does not support Editor 2.0.

With the mobile version of the editor you are no longer limited to editing your sites on laptops or personal computers and have a multi-device editing experience. If your phone number just changed or you need to upload the image you have taken with your phone camera, you can edit your site on your mobile device to make any necessary content changes.

With the help of the mobile version of the editor you can use your mobile devices to make changes in the text, images, buttons and links on the sites you have created and designed on your desktop computer. Though the mobile version of the editor cannot boast the same wide range of editing capabilities as its desktop counterpart, it provides a different advantage and makes it easier than ever to quickly make adjustments to your site no matter which device you have at hand.

While working on your site from mobile devices, you can ensure all design and layout settings you have configured in the desktop version of the editor are maintained. The mobile version of the editor was built to offer smooth content editing experience and will not affect the settings defined on the desktop.
For example, you will not be able to add a new page while working on your site with the mobile version of the editor. After all, you do not want to make new pages without checking how they look on the desktop. For the same reason you cannot delete or unhide rows and widgets and so on.
Editing is available for Text, Image, Photo Gallery, Image Slider, and Click-to-action widgets. Editing capabilities for new widgets will be added frequently. Widgets that are not supported display with a coming soon message.

Single Page Management

Fri, 10 Oct 2025 15:41:15 GMT

Single Page Management

There are several actions you can take on a single page.

Publish Single Page

You can update the content of a page that is already published without republishing the whole site and without updating the content of other pages. This feature does not allow you to create a new page and publish only that page.

Note

Theme changes (for example, changes to header, footer, or site theme) will not be applied when a single page is published.
Each language on a multi-language site will need to be updated separately.
An automatic backup is created each time a single page is published.
To apply page URL changes, you must publish the entire site.

To publish a single page:

In the side panel, click Pages .
Click the settings icon next to page you want to publish.
Click Publish page . A calendar icon displays on the page to indicate it has been published separately from the entire site.

Set Single Page as Draft

Set a page as a draft when you do not want it to be searchable or on the live site. Once the site is published or republished it will not exist on the live site.

Note

The home page, external-link pages, and folders cannot be drafted.
If a main navigation item with sub-pages is Set as a draft, the sub-pages will no longer be accessible in the navigation.
For multi-language sites, when drafting a page in the default language, the page will be drafted in the additional languages as well. Pages in the additional languages can be drafted without depending on the default language’s status.
F or multi-language sites, the same page cannot be added to the next publish until the page in the default language is added to the next publish as well.

To set a page as a draft:

In the side panel, click Pages .
Click the settings icon for the specific page.
Click Set as a draft . If the page is in the navigation, it will be removed.
Click Republish to remove the page from the live site.

To remove a page from draft state:

In the side panel, click Pages .
Click the settings icon for the specific page.
Click Stage draft for publish . It will be added back to the navigation.
Click Republish to add the page to the live site.

Page Settings and SEO

Access page settings by clicking the settings icon next to each page. You have the following options:

Rename. Rename the page in the editor. This does not change the page URL.
Hide in navigation. Make the page hidden on the navigation menu. It will still be visitable by the direct URL.
Duplicate. Creates an exact copy of the page.
Publish page. Publish changes on a single page.
Page URL. Customize the URL for the page.
SEO. Access all the SEO settings for the page.
Set Access. Set a password for the page or configure the page for members only.
Convert to Dynamic Page. Click to convert the page to a dynamic page. Select a collection, and click Done .
Set as a draft. Set a page as a draft when you do not want it to be searchable or on the live site.
Delete. This deletes the selected page.

Page SEO

Search engine optimization (SEO) is the process of improving the visibility of a site or a web page in a search engine's un-paid search results. Sometimes this is called "natural" or "organic" traffic. We recommend adding SEO information (title and descriptions) on the page level, so each page can have a unique title and description. This is more beneficial than having one title and description shared across the entire site.

On a page’s SEO screen, the following options are available:

Set page to no index. Tell search engines not to crawl this page so it won’t appear in search results. Draft pages are set to no index by default.
Page meta title. This is the text that appears on SERP results, browser tabs and when sharing this page on social media. Use AI to assist in generating the title.
Page meta description. The meta description appears in SERP results. Use AI to assist in generating the description.
Page keyword. Search engines no longer take entered keywords into consideration when ranking websites, so these are optional.

You can also edit the header HTML for that page only. However, it is important to note that consent management apps are not able to prevent code from running prior to consent when the code is placed in the header HTML. This is because Website Builder optimizes the structure and order of how content loads, based on performance best practices on the site. We place scripts and CMP banners lower on the page, in order to improve the performance of primary content. Because of this, it is recommended to place code in the body-end when using a consent management app.

Change Home Page

You can change the home page of your site, and set any other page in its place. The original home page will be saved as a regular page and can be reinstated as the home page at any time.

This is very helpful when you want to set an "under construction page" while working on your site or when you want to make changes to the homepage while keeping the old homepage in place.

Note

Multilingual sites are not currently supported.
This option is only available for normal pages (not popups, anchors, external pages, dynamic pages, 404 page, blog posts, and so on).

To change the homepage:

In the side panel, click Pages .
Next to the page you want to set as your home page, click the settings () icon, and select Set as home page .
Provide a new alias (URL) for the existing home page.
When setting a new homepage we do not change any links on your site, so any links pointing to the old homepage will need to be changed to the new one.
( Optional ) Delete the old homepage.

Prevent Search Engines from Indexing a Page

For maximum SEO benefits, all pages of your site are discoverable by search engines. However, if you would like to instruct search engines to drop or not include this page in their index after they crawl the page, you can do that in the page settings.

Note

Pages protected with membership access are not accessible to site crawlers. However, if a user logs into a membership protected page and copies the CDN link to a file or image, they will be able to share it.

To prevent search engines from indexing a page:

In the side panel, click Pages .
Click the settings icon for the specific page.
Click SEO .
Click the No Index toggle. This instructs search engines to drop or not include this page in their index after they crawl the page.
Repeat steps 1-4 for each page you do not want to be indexed.

Note

If this page was previously indexed, this change will take several weeks for search engines to update and remove the page.
This setting adds the <meta name="robots" content="noindex"> tag into the head of the page for search engines to read.

Password Protect a Page

With password protected pages, you can add a password to specific pages on your site that visitors will need to enter in order to view that page. Password protected pages are beneficial when certain information is designed for specific audiences; for example, to restrict access to a download page.

Password protected pages should not be confused with user logins or account management. Password protected pages only adds an individual password for one page, not different passwords for different users.

Note

Anchored pages cannot be password protected pages. In order to password protect a page, make sure that the page is not anchored to another page.
Dynamic pages cannot be password protected pages.

To create password protected pages:

In the side panel, click Pages .
Click the settings icon for a specific page.
Click Set Access .
Click Password Protected , and type the password visitors will need to type to access the page. The password can be no more than 100 characters, but can contain any characters.
Click Save . This page is now protected by a password. You can remove this password at anytime by clicking Open to Everyone .

To log out of a password protected page, clear the cache for the site or browser. Even if the password for the page is changed, users that are logged into a password protected page will stay logged in until they clear their cache.

Taxes for Membership

Fri, 10 Oct 2025 14:27:17 GMT

Taxes for Membership

If you set up taxes for membership, a zone will need to be created for each location you are required to collect taxes for. Tax zones can currently only be set up manually, automated taxes are not yet available.

Set Up Membership Tax Zones and Rates

To set up tax zones and rates for Membership:

In the side panel, click Membership .
Click Settings , then click Taxes .
Click +Add tax zone .
Select your country from the drop-down menu, and region if applicable.
Complete the Tax Name , Tax Number , and Tax Rate fields.
Tax name. The name that appears on your invoice.
Tax number. The number that appears on your invoice.
Click Save .

Edit Tax Zones and Rates for Membership

If you expand your customer base, you may need to update your tax rates or add another region to your tax zones.

To edit tax zones or rates for Membership:

In the side panel, click Membership .
Click Settings , then click Taxes .
Click the three horizontal dots () icon next to the tax zone you want to edit and select Edit Tax Rate .
Click Save after making your edits.

Delete Tax Zones and Rates for Membership

To delete tax zones or rates for Membership:

In the side panel, click Membership .
Click Settings , then click Taxes .
Click the three horizontal dots () icon next to the tax zone you want to delete and select Delete tax rate .
Click Delete in the popup.

Custom Access Membership

Fri, 10 Oct 2025 14:18:23 GMT

Custom Access Membership

With Membership Plans , you can organize your members and pages to provide access to exclusive content on your site. Plans can be free or paid. For example, one of your customers has asked you to create a site that includes online cooking courses. With membership plans, users can join in order to get access to online video courses.

Creating a custom access membership site involves one to three steps, depending on whether it will be free and how members will sign up for the plans.

Note

Media uploaded to the media manager and added to membership pages are not secured and are still available using their direct link.
Dynamic pages are not able to be assigned as membership pages.
You can only test your membership plans on a published site, it does not work in preview mode.
In accordance with industry standards, membership pages are by default not indexed and will not be searchable.
Paid plans by default are set to auto renew.

Configure Custom Access Membership

1: Create New Membership Plans (Free or Paid)

To create new Membership Plans:

In the side panel, click Membership .
Click Membership Plans .
Click + New plan , and complete the fields.
Pricing . Select the plan type
For paid plans:
Click Paid .
Choose a billing cycle (weekly, monthly, or yearly)
Enter a price into the Price field.

Note

Paid plans by default are set to auto renew.

For free plans:
Click Free .

Assign pages . Select the pages that only members with this plan will have access to. If a page isn't assigned, members only assigned to this plan won't have access to any pages.
Members with this plan . If there are already site members, they can be added to free plans here. Members are not yet able to be added to paid plans.

Click Save .

2: Configure Member Sign-Up or Purchase Availability

Once a plan has been created, if you want site visitors to be able to sign-up or purchase a plan, a button for the plan will need to be added to the site.

If you will only be giving access by assigning members, this step can be skipped.

To add a button to the site and configure it for a membership plan:

Navigate to the desired location for the button.

Tip

If there are multiple plans and you would like to add a section comparing the available plans, there are pre-designed sections. There is a category in Sections titled Plans with a variety of options.

In the side panel, click Widgets .
Search for the Button widget. Click and drag the widget to the location you want in the site.
Click the widget to open the content editor.
Enter the text for the button.
In the link picker options, click Membership plan checkout and click into the drop down menu to select the desired plan for the button.

3: Connect Payment Gateway

If you will only be offering free memberships, this step can be skipped.

To accept payments for paid membership plans, Stripe needs to be connected to accept payments. Note that if you disconnect your Stripe account, all active memberships will be canceled.

To connect Stripe to accept payment for membership plans:

In the side panel, click Membership .
click Membership Plans .
At the top of the page, click connect a payment gateway . Alternatively, in the side panel click Settings , and then click Payment gateways .
Currently, you must connect Stripe as the payment gateway. Next to Stripe, click Connect .
Follow instructions to log in and set up Stripe. To manage changes to your Stripe account, click Manage .

Discounts in Membership

Note

Discount will apply to duration of membership. It is not able to be set as a one time discount.

In the side panel, click Membership .
Click Settings , then click Discount .
Click +Add discount .
Complete the fields.

Name . Internal name for the discount. It is only visible to you and will not be seen by shoppers.
Effective date . When the discount will become available.
Expiration date . When the discount expires.
Usage limit per customer . How many times the same customer can use the discount code.
Total usage limit . How many times the discount code can be used in total by all customers.
Combine with other discounts? Whether or not this discount code can be used at the same time as other discount codes when checking out.
Select your discount type . A percentage or specific amount off.
Percentage off or Amount off (dependent on the selected discount type).
How will customers apply this? There is currently only one option and by default, it is selected.
Enter the discount code . The code you would like customer's to enter.

Edit and Delete Membership Plans

To edit or delete existing plans:

In the side panel, click Membership .
Click Membership Plans .
Click the three dots () icon next to the plan you want to edit or delete.

Edit membership plan. Edit any details, add additional assigned pages or members, and then click Save .

Note

You cannot change a plan from Free to Paid if there are members on the Free plan.
Changing the price of the plan will only apply to members that sign up after the price has been changed.

Delete membership plan. Click Delete to confirm.

Warning

Deleting a plan will cancel any existing subscriptions prompting an automated email to any members informing them of the cancellation.

Add Members to a Free Plan

Access Membership Plans (In the side panel, click Membership > Membership Plans ).
Click the three dots () icon next to the plan you want to edit or delete.
Click Edit membership plan .
Scroll down to the Members with this plan section.
Click + Add Members .

Note

Members must already have been added (invites are not able to be sent from this screen).
Members can currently only be added to free plans. Adding to paid plans is coming soon.

Automated Membership Emails

The following are the different membership emails that can be sent.

Note

If you need to email your members outside of the automated emails sent by Website Builder, you can export a list of email addresses to a CSV then upload it to most email marketing tools. On the Site Members page, click Export to CSV .

Member Emails

The following emails can be sent to members:

Confirmation of purchase.
Notification once membership has been approved (if memberships need to be approved).
Notification if their payment declines. A link will be provided in the email to update their payment information.
Confirmation of cancellation at the time of cancellation (whether by the site admin/client or the member).
Follow up confirmation of cancellation at the end of the membership period.
Notification when a refund has been provided.

Site Admin / Client Emails

The following emails can be sent to site admins or clients you have added to the site:

Membership requests (if memberships need to be approved; only those approved will receive them).
Copies of customer notification emails if enabled in the Store Business Info.

To enable copies of customer notification emails:

In the side panel, click Membership .
Click Settings , then click Store Business Info .
Fill out all the fields.
In the Contact email field, enter in the email that should receive notifications.

Note

Currently, only one email address can be entered into the field.

Click the box under the field, Send me copies of customer notification emails .
Click Save .

Member's Plan Management Dashboard (Paid Plans Only)

The member dashboard is a central hub where your members can manage their membership details. This is only available for paid plans.

Through the dashboard, members can:

View their invoices.
Manage their membership, including canceling their plan.
Update their payment information.
Update their billing address.

Note

A login widget need to be present on the live site for the dashboard to be available.

Membership Troubleshooting and FAQs

Membership

Fri, 10 Oct 2025 12:53:52 GMT

Membership

Memberships allow you to create exclusive content for your users, fostering a loyal community or providing private access to information for members of an organization. They can be used in various scenarios where you want content to be inaccessible to the general public. Membership capabilities will restrict access to site pages based on whether or not the site visitor is logged in or not.

Membership can be set up in two ways: Simple Membership, where all members have access to the same content, or Custom Access Membership, where different plans can be created to provide access to varying pages, either for free or for a fee.

All membership data is deleted when you uninstall membership and cannot be recovered.

Note

Media uploaded to the media manager and added to membership pages are not secured and are still available using their direct link.
Dynamic pages are not able to be assigned as membership pages.
In accordance with industry standards, membership pages are by default not indexed and will not be searchable.

Tip

Memberships vs. Subscriptions

While a similar concept, memberships typically offer a sense of belonging to a community with exclusive access to certain content. Subscriptions, on the other hand, generally provide ongoing access to a product or service, often without the community aspect. Memberships focus more on engagement and building a relationship with the audience, whereas subscriptions are primarily transactional.

Install Membership

In the side panel, click App Store .
Search for Membership , then click Install .
Click Add .

Note

A login widget is not automatically added to site and will need to be added. It can be found in the widget library. For detailed information on the widget, see the section Login Widget in this article.

Define Membership Pages

To define a page for membership, it must already exist. If there are no pages currently that you would like to designate as membership pages, you will need to add a page first before you can define it as a membership page. For more information on adding pages, see Pages .

Note

If you are using sub-pages and want to have membership on them as well, you must individually restrict each sub-pag e.

To define a page for membership:

Once Membership has been installed, in the side panel of the editor, click Pages .
Click the settings () icon next to the page, and then click Set Access .
In the Set page access section, select Members only .
Note
The page becomes locked for members only. The first time you add a membership page a new login page is added to the site’s pages list, but is not visible in the pages list.
In the Which members can access this page? section, select one of the following options:

All signed up members .
Members who purchased a certain membership plan .

Note

If neither option is selected, it will default to All signed up members .

Default Membership pages

When you add Membership, three default pages are created that can be found in the Pages option in the side panel (located in new section, Membership Pages):

Pending page. This page comes with the necessary information for site visitors, though can be edited as desired.
Access denied page. This page comes with the necessary information for site visitors, though can be edited as desired. Visitors will encounter this page when they are trying to access a page they do not have access to, whether it is because of their plan or because they are not logged in.
Sign in page. This page also serves as the login page. By default, the Sign Up widget will already be on the page. For information on the available Sign Up widget options, see the section Sign Up Widget in this article. This page can also be designed as desired.

There is only one instance of each of these pages, regardless of the number of restricted pages.

Membership Widgets

Membership has two widgets: Sign Up widget and Login widget.

Sign Up Widget

The Sign Up widget, by default, is included on the Sign in page. This widget also serves as the login screen.

To configure the sign up widget:

In the side panel, click Pages .
Under Membership Pages, click Sign in page .
Click the Sign Up widget to open the content and design editor (it will be the only widget on the page). There are two tabs that can be configured. The following are the tabs along with their corresponding options:

Sign up
Make Sign Up the default screen. Choose whether users will see a sign up or a login screen when they first land on the page.
Title. Configure the title of the Sign up form.
Google Sign up. Enable Google signup.
Terms of Service. Customize the terms of use text. We recommend adding links to your Privacy Page and Terms of Use page. For more information, see .
Log in
Make Log In the default screen. Choose whether users will see a signup or a login screen when they first land on the page.
Login title. Configure the title for the login form.

Note

The included fields are the only available ones, custom ones are not able to be added.
The Sign up widget also serves as the login screen.
If the widget is deleted, it can be added from the widget library.

Login Widget

After you add membership to your site, you can add a login widget to your site and select which page members are directed to after logging in. To add the widget:

In the side panel, click Widgets .
Search for the Login widget. Click and drag the widget to the location you want in the site.
Click the widget to open the content editor.
On the Content tab, in the section Where to redirect users after they log in? click into the drop down menu and select a site page that members will be directed to when they log in.
Publish or republish your site to make the changes live.

Note

The Login widget only works on the live site. To test signing up or logging in, visit the preview link for the site (not the preview option within the editor) and navigate to a members-only page (the page will need to be accessible, for example it can be found in the navigation or a button is linked to it). If you have immediate access to the page without logging in, this likely indicates your browser cache needs to be cleared. You can also try in an incognito window.

Membership Plans

With Membership Plans, you can organize your members and pages to provide access to exclusive content on your site. Plans can be free or paid. For example, one of your customers has asked you to create a site that includes online cooking courses. With membership plans, users can join in order to get access to online video courses.

Note

You can only test your membership plans on a published site, it does not work in preview mode.
If you delete a Membership Plan, it will cancel any existing subscriptions.
Media uploaded to the media manager and added to membership pages are not secured and are still available using their direct link.

To access Membership Plans:

In the side panel, click Membership .
Click Membership Plans .

Membership Settings: Member Approval and Member-Only Sites

To access Membership Settings:

In the side panel, click Membership .
Click Membership Settings .

The following settings are available:

Member Approvals

Configure who can sign up as a member:

Automatically approve all requests. Allows access to the membership page for anyone who requests access.
Manually approve requests via email (approval-based membership). With approval-based membership, new members must request access to membership pages, and requests must be approved before they have access to the membership pages. After trying to sign in, new members are redirected to a confirmation page stating that access has been requested.
Click Member Requests Recipients to see who is able to approve memberships (the account owner, team members, and/or clients assigned to the site).
Users will see the Pending Page after requesting access until access is granted. However, in Preview Mode, users will immediately see the membership page.

Note

New members must be approved to receive access to membership pages.
Membership requests are sent to the approvers by email.
By default, the account owner will receive the requests if no one has been given the ability to approve.

Members-Only Site

Turning this setting on will automatically set all site pages as members-only. Non-members will see a login page when visiting your site, including the homepage, blog posts, and dynamic pages. Additionally, when you add new pages to the site, they are automatically marked as for members only.

Invite Site Members

Currently, you can invite people to become site members without a specific content plan (general site membership), or assign them a free membership of a specific content plan you’ve created.

Members can be invited individually or in bulk. You can add members to your membership site in bulk. This is helpful when you are migrating from another membership solution to Website Builder, or if you have an existing CRM and want to start a membership site.

To invite (or bulk invite) members:

In the side panel, click Membership .
Click Site Members .
Click Invite Members .
Enter email addresses into the field. Or, you can copy and paste emails into the field from a CSV.
Click Send Invite . You will receive a confirmation message that the invites were successfully sent.

Once the invitee receives the invite email, all they need to do is click Accept Invite in the email to be added to the membership site where they can access all of its features and resources.

Manage Site Members

Tip

Looking to assign a plan to a site member? This can be done in the plan's edit screen.

To manage your site members:

In the side panel, click Membership .
Click Site Members .
To remove a member from the list, click the settings icon next to the member, and click Remove Member .
To download a list of members, click Export to CSV (the option won't appear if there are no members).

Note

To manage members, you must have the Manage Free Apps permission.

Approve Membership Requests

If the membership settings are set to manually approve requests, members that sign up will need to be approved to gain access. See the section Approve Membership Requests in this article for more information.

To approve new members that have requested access:

In the side panel, click Membership .
Click Site Members .
Click the settings icon next to the member, and click Approve Member .

Automated Membership Emails

If Custom Access Membership is not set up on the site, there are only automated emails if membership is configured to be approval based.

When membership is set up to be approval based:

The site admin/client will receive membership requests.
A member will receive notification once membership has been approved (only those approved will receive them).

Uninstall Membership

To uninstall membership:

In the side panel, click App Store .
Find Membership .
Click the three vertical dots.
Select Remove .

Warning

All settings, members, and customizations related to membership will be lost once it is uninstalled.

Personalisation Rules

Fri, 10 Oct 2025 10:11:32 GMT

Personalization Rules

Our Personalization tools work on a system of triggers and actions. When the conditions of a trigger are met, an action occurs that personalizes the site for that visitor. Use Personalization to create 1-to-1 conversion driving experiences for site visitors based on time of day, device type, geolocation and more.

You need to republish your site for personalization rule changes to be reflected on your live site. And, Personalizations will not be triggered on the Preview Link. To review a personalization on the Preview Link, click Choose insite in the top bar and select the desired insite.

Following are important notes about personalization rules:

Rules will only trigger for the same user once every 30 minutes, or until they clear their browser cache, even if that user still meets the trigger requirements.
If a user comes back more than 30 minutes after the first visit, we update the number of visits cookie.
Website Builder uses cookies for first-time users when using personalization rules. One cookie is used for timestamp, another cookie for number of visits.
We only show pop-ups once for the current browser session.

Warning

Personalization is not supported on multi-language sites or dynamic pages.

Create Personalization Rule

To create a personalization rule:

In the side panel, click Personalization .
Click +Add Rule .
Select from the available, pre-built rules or build your own.
Select triggers , actions , and further customize as necessary.

Personalization Triggers

Triggers allow you to define a set of conditions that, when met, automatically execute a specific action on your site. Combine a variety of triggers like time, device-type, or location to create a very customized experience for your site's visitors.

Select a trigger

You can select one or more of the following triggers:

Device : Which device a user is visiting from (desktop, tablet, or mobile)
Location : What location a user is visiting from
Time : What time/date the user is visiting on
Visits : The number of times the user has visited
Campaign URL : Whether the user gets to the site from a URL with specific parameters in the query string
No trigger : This rule will always be active

Personalization Actions

Actions allow you to personalize your visitor's experience, lead them to information they may have missed previously, or present them with opportunities to help complete a sale or get them to visit.

Action Types

Following are the available action types:

New Row : Creates a new row in your site which only displays when the conditions for the trigger are met. You can also use this to hide rows or content.

Note

The New Row action type is not available in Editor 2.0.

Notification Bar : Do not use the Notification Bar if you have the Cookie Notification enabled. The Cookie Notification takes priority and covers the notification bar.
Editor 2.0: The notification bar is sticky and displays at the top of the page without covering page content.
Classic Editor: The notification bar displays at the bottom of the page to assist in optimizing Core Web Vitals.
Popup : Triggers a popup to display on your site, grabbing your user's attention.
JavaScript : Custom JavaScript can create a huge variety of effects. We recommend this feature for advanced users familiar with JavaScript only. Please note that we cannot troubleshoot custom code.
Special Effects: Special effects are a variety of decorative effects, like fireworks, falling hearts, or snowflakes, which can give your site a different mood. Add this to your homepage, or to the entire site.

Rule Editing Mode

When you use the new row action, you will enter Rule Editing Mode in the Responsive Editor. This is a special mode in which you can only edit the new row created by this action. You can also:

Move this row up and down the page by clicking the Row button in the upper left of the row and clicking the up and down arrows.
Hide other rows on the page by clicking the hide icon.
View the personalization rule in different views so that you can be sure it will look how you want it to on different devices.

Special Effects

Personalization rule special effects add animations to your site; for example, floating hearts or falling leaves. Use these special effects to celebrate events or add a touch of color.

To select and configure a special effect:

Click on the special effect you would like to select.
Click the magnifying glass icon to get a quick preview of what the effect looks like.
Toggle whether the effect displays on the home page or all pages.
Set for how many seconds the effect should play (or whether it should play forever).

Build Your Own Personalization Rules

You can build your own personalization rules from scratch. Select and customize the triggers and actions for your personalization rule instead of selecting a pre-made rule.

To create a personalization rule:

In the side panel of the editor, click Personalize .
Click Build your own .
Select one or more triggers. Each trigger defines a condition under which the associated action will take place.
Customize the triggers you have selected, then click Next .
Select an action to display. You can only use one action per personalization rule.
Click Next .
Customize the action you selected. Click Next .
Preview and save your rule. Click Preview to see what your site will look like with the rule activated (click the Back button in the top right of the site to get back to the Rule Editor).
When the rule is customized, give it a unique name, then click Save Rule .

Once you publish or republish your site, the rule will be activated. When someone visits the site and the trigger conditions are met, your selected action will appear for that visitor automatically.

Personalization Rules Priority

While you can have multiple personalization rules on your site at one time, only one of each action can be active at the same time. Understanding rule priority will help you understand how your site decides which action to take. If two rules with the same action type are both triggered at the same time, on the same page, whichever is listed highest on the list of rules will take effect.

However, if there are two rules with different actions, they can display at the same time. For example, if one rule creates a notification bar and the other a row, and both trigger at the same time, both the notification bar and row will appear.

Or, two rules with the same action can display at the same time if they are on different pages. Only duplicate actions on the same page will not display.

Edit Rule

To edit a personalization rule:

In the side panel, click Personalization .
Click the gear icon next to the desired rule.
Click Edit and then select to edit either the action or the trigger .

Activate or Deactivate Rule

To activate or deactivate a personalization rule:

In the side panel, click Personalization .
Click the gear icon next to the desired rule.
Select activate or deactivate .

Delete Rule

To delete a personalization rule:

In the side panel, click Personalization .
Click the gear icon next to the desired rule.
Click Delete .

Use Existing Popup

Instead of creating a new popup to personalize, you can personalize an existing popup.

To use an existing popup:

In the side panel of the editor, click Personalize .
Next to Build your own, click Build Rule .
Select one or more triggers. Each trigger defines a condition under which the associated action will take place.
Customize the triggers you have selected, then click Next .
Select Popup , then click Next .
Configure the popup by selecting which page, which popup, and how long to display the popup. Then click Next .
Click Done , then click Save Rule . Or, click Preview Rule to test it before adding it to your site.

Popups

Thu, 09 Oct 2025 16:07:00 GMT

Popups

Popups allows you to add new popups to your site. Popups are a type of small window that appears in a web page. Popups can be set up to appear when clicked as a link or automatically as an action from a personalization rule. Use popups to grab user's attention or provide information without having to change pages.

Add Popup

To add a popup:

In the side panel, click Pages , and then click the Popups tab.
Click + New Popup .
Select a popup type. The popup type pre-populates the popup with widgets.
Type a name for your popup, and click + Add Popup .

Activate Popups

Unlike a page generated in the navigation automatically, a popup can only be triggered by being clicked as a link or by using a site personalization rule. Popup triggers only occur once per session. A session is any activity on the site and remains active until at least 30-60 minutes have passed.

Link to Popup

There are several widgets that allow you to link to a popup, such as Photo Gallery image links, text, and buttons.

To link to a popup:

Right-click the widget that you want to link to the popup from, then select Edit content . Alternatively, if you are linking from text, highlight the desired text and click the link icon in the text editing menu.
Click Popup , then select which popup you want to link to from the dropdown menu.

Use Personalization Rules to Condition a Popup

You can create a popup using site personalization or set personalization rules for an existing popup. Personalization rules can include what triggers the popup to appear, how quickly the popup appears on the screen, and more.

Note

To see your personalization rule in action, try 1) clearing your cookies and cache, 2) using another browser, or 3) waiting until the time has expired.

Close Popups

By default, the X button can be clicked to close a popup. You can also add a "Close popup" link to any linkable element in the popup that will close the popup when clicked. For example, you could add the close link to a button that says "No thanks" on a popup that is offering a coupon code. When the website visitor clicks the No thanks button, it will close the popup.

To add a close link to a popup:

In the side panel, click Pages .
Click the Popup tab and open the desired popup.
Click any linkable element in the popup and select Close Popup as the link.

Edit Popups

A popup is very similar to a page. You can add new rows, columns and insert any widget into a popup. To adjust the size of the popup, drag the bottom right corner.

Popup Settings

To edit the settings for a popup:

In the side panel, click Pages , and then click the Popups tab.
Click the settings icon for specific popup. You have the following options:

Rename. Rename the popup in the editor. This does not change the page URL.
Duplicate. Creates an exact copy of the popup.
Delete. Deletes the popup. This action is irreversible unless you have a backup.

Pages

Thu, 09 Oct 2025 15:48:32 GMT

Pages

Pages allows you to reorder, manage and create new pages in your site. Organize your site's content by using multiple pages to improve your visitors' experience and increases the chance that they will find the information they need.

You can create a maximum of 1000 site pages and 1500 blog pages.

Note

URL parameters are not supported.

Add Pages

To add new pages to your site:

In the side panel, click Pages .
Click + Add Page .
Select a page type. Page templates are pre-populated with relevant widgets. The Page URL page type links the page to another URL instead of creating a new page.
Type a title for your new page, and a URL, if necessary.
Click + Add Page and start creating your new page.

Page Builder

The page builder allows you to plan the layout before finalizing the page’s design.

To use the page builder:

In the side panel, click Pages , then click +Add Page .
Select Page Builder . This opens Page Mode.
In the side panel, a list of sections and types are displayed. Click the desired section to add it to your page.
You can click +Add section to add up to 50 sections. Or you can click Generate Page Layout to use AI to generate a layout for you. If you have not already filled out the business profile, you will be prompted to.
(Optional) If you do not like the AI generated page layout, click the arrow on the Generate Page Layout button and select Suggest a Different Layout or Edit Page Prompt .
In the floating menu, use the up and down arrows to reorder sections or click the trash can icon to delete a section.
To replace a section, click to select the section, then select a new section from the side panel.
(Optional) If you need to duplicate or rename the page, click the three horizontal dot icon next to the page name and select Rename Page or Duplicate Page .
(Optional) If you used AI to generate the page layout, you can click Add Content with AI to generate text and images for the page. After reviewing the prompts for each section and editing as necessary, click Looks Good. Generate . If you are not satisfied with the text or images, click the arrow on the Regenerate Page Content button and select Edit Section Prompt , Regenerate Image Only , or Regenerate Text & Images . You cannot use this feature with custom sections.
When you are done editing, click Save for Later or Add Page to Site . If you click Save for Later, the page will be saved in the Pages menu under Pages in Progress .

If you need to delete the entire page, click the trash can icon in the top bar. This cannot be undone.

Reorganize Pages

To reorganize the order pages display on your site:

In the side panel, click Pages .
Click and drag a page to move it where you want it to appear in order.
(Optional) Drag a page slightly to the right to nests the page as a sub-page of the page above. Navigation can have up to three levels.

Delete Pages

To delete a page:

In the side panel, click Pages .
Click the gear icon () next to the desired page.
Select Delete .

How to Write Effective AI Prompts

Thu, 09 Oct 2025 13:03:18 GMT

How to Write Effective

AI Prompts

Website Builder’s AI Assistant leverages OpenAPI technology to help you write unique, engaging content and SEO metadata faster than ever. What is unique about our AI Assistant is that it is built to help you write an effective prompt without needing to have in-depth knowledge about formatting prompts for AI, like you do for ChatGPT. The Business Profile asks questions to gather information about your business up front, then when generating content, the AI Assistant asks questions and submits it in the correct format to ensure unique, relevant content is generated.

While the AI Assistant does all the hard work for you, there are still a few tips we recommend when filling out the Business Profile and writing prompts to ensure your content is relevant.

 Tips:

In the Business Profile, provide as much context about the business as you can. Be specific about the industry, types of services or products provided and their value, who the target audience is, and other attributes that make the business unique. Following is an example:
FitHub Oasis is a premier fitness center located in the heart of New York, dedicated to transforming lives through holistic well-being. Our state-of-the-art facility offers a range of services, including personalized fitness training, group classes, nutrition counseling, and wellness programs. Catering to individuals of all fitness levels, from beginners to seasoned enthusiasts.
When writing your prompt, be specific about what information you want included in the output.
Test multiple prompts and tones to learn what generates the type of content you are looking for.
Avoid abbreviations or slang terms.

Create a Better Business Profile

Our AI Assistant uses information in your Business Profile along with your prompt to generate relevant and unique content. You will be prompted to complete your Business Profile before you can use any of the Write with AI actions in the text editor or generate SEO tags. You only have to fill out the business profile once.

To fill out your Business Profile:

Click any text widget to open the text editor.
Click the AI Assistant dropdown and select any Write with AI action (New Title, Title for This Text, or Paragraph).
The Business Profile will open. Complete the following fields:
Business name. This will be auto-filled if you already entered it in the Business Info section of the site. Changing the business name in the AI Content Assistant will disconnect it from Business Info.
What does your business do? In this field we recommend you state in 1-2 sentences what services or products your business offers and who the target audience is. See the following examples for what to write.
Good: Pet supply store for dogs.
Better: Sell organic pet food, supplements and treats, grooming supplies, toys, and clothing for dogs.
Provide additional business details. In this field, we recommend you provide additional details about your business that you didn’t have room to include in the What does your business do field, such as being more specific about the services or products your business offers and customer attributes. Using adjectives is a great way to accomplish this. See the following examples:
Good: Sell supplies and specialize in pet wellness and education for owners.
Better: Specialize in holistic, natural wellness for dogs. Provide pet parents with education on how to keep their dog healthy and well cared for using organic, natural products.
Tone. Select from one of the following tones:
Conversational
Humorous
Enthusiastic
Informative
Professional
Authoritative
Witty

Once completed, the Business Profile can always be edited if you feel you are not getting the exact type of content you want. To edit the Business Profile, select any AI Content Assistant action and click the Store icon in the pop up.

Example Prompts and Generated Content

The following Business Profile is an example of a well-written profile where the maximum amount of details about the business are provided. Following the Business Profile are example titles and paragraphs generated for a humorous tone.

You will notice that the content generated for the more detailed prompts were more specific and relevant to the business while the content for the less detailed prompts were much more generic.

Business Profile

Business name . Natural Pet Store
What does your business do? Sell organic pet food, supplements and treats, grooming supplies, toys, and clothing for dogs.
Additional details . Specialize in holistic, natural wellness for dogs. Provide pet parents with education on how to keep their dog healthy and well cared for using organic, natural products.
Tone . Humorous

Generate a Site with AI

Thu, 09 Oct 2025 11:25:57 GMT

Generate a Site with AI

This feature is still in development and is being gradually released to users.

To help speed up the site building process, you can use our AI Assistant to quickly generate a site complete with multiple pages, different page layout, and content based on your client’s business information and brand guidelines.

Note

This feature is available to account owners and staff members with the Site creation and AI Assistant permissions.

To create a site with AI:

Click Create Site with AI .
Fill out the following fields:
What is your business name?
What does your business do?
Business logo
Click Next .
Fill out the following fields:
Give more context about the business. If you need help filling out this field, click Need an idea to start? and select an option.
What should be your site’s language?
Choose your preferred tone of voice (conversational, humorous, enthusiastic, witty, informative, professional)
Click Next .
Select a color palette. These colors can be changed later in the Site Theme.
Click Next .
Select a font family. The font can be changed later in the Site Theme.
Click Generate My Site .
From here, use the Page Builder to edit pages as necessary.
( Optional ) Click Continue to Editor to edit your page in the editor.

Generate SEO Content with AI

Thu, 09 Oct 2025 10:26:15 GMT

Generate SEO Content

with AI

Use AI to assist in creating the page title and description. AI can expedite the writing process and provide options and ideas to help in creating impactful SEO content. While AI serves as a valuable tool for optimizing SEO content, it is advisable to verify the generated content to ensure it aligns with your quality standards.

You can use the AI content assistant to generate SEO for an individual page or for multiple pages at once.

Note

If a field is connected to Connected Data, it will not be included in SEO generation.
For multilingual sites, SEO tags are only generated in the language that is being viewed when generating tags.

AI Business Profile

When first accessing the AI Content assistant, you will be prompted to set up the AI Business Profile. Once the profile is set, the AI Content assistant will utilize it regardless of where it is accessed from. For more information, see the AI Business Profile section in AI Assistant Overview and Features article.

Generate SEO for Individual Page

The option to generate SEO with AI can be found in a page’s SEO settings.

To access the SEO settings for a page:

In the side panel, click Pages .
Click the settings () icon for the specific page.
Click SEO .
In the SEO settings, there are 2 options to generate:
To create the page title and description simultaneously click on Generate SEO Tags .
To create the title or description individually click the sparkle icon located in the respective field.
Once one of the above options are clicked the AI Content assistant will appear (if the business profile was not set, you will be prompted to set it, see the Business Profile section below for more information). You have the following options:
If you are satisfied, click Apply suggestions to apply the generated content.
If you are unsatisfied, click Try again (previous suggestions will still be available).
Copy a suggestion by clicking the copy icon.

Generate SEO for Multiple Pages

You can use the AI Content assistant to generate SEO for multiple pages at once, with just one button click.

To generate SEO for multiple pages:

If you are in the editor, click Pages and then click the settings icon next to any page. Then click All Pages’ SEO . Or, if you are in the Site List, click the three dot icon next to your site and select Site Dashboard . Then, click SEO .
Click Generate SEO tags and select Generate tags for all pages or Generate missing tags only if you have already generated some SEO tags.
If you did not already fill out your site’s Business Profile, you will be prompted to fill it out before the SEO tags can be generated.
The generated SEO tags are displayed in a table. Use the checkboxes to select which page tags you want to use. If necessary, click into any text field to edit the generated tag.
Click Next , then click Save meta tag changes .

Once your tags are saved and applied, a confirmation message appears in the upper right corner.

Create a Flex Section with AI

Thu, 09 Oct 2025 09:57:41 GMT

Create a Flex Section with AI

Utilize the AI Assistant to streamline the creation of flex sections on your website. This feature is gradually being made available to all users and is currently accessible for creating flex sections in the classic and all-flex editors.

To create a section with AI:

Hover between rows and click the + Add Section button. Note if you are using Classic Editor, you need to enter flex mode before you can add a flex section. To do so, click into an existing flex section or add a blank section.
Select AI Generated .
If you have not already filled out your business information you will be prompted to do so. You only need to complete this just once per site to give context and get the best content results.
The AI Assistant will then gather information about the section. Complete the following fields:
What is this section’s overall theme? Select one of the following options:
Intro
About
Services
Other
What content should this section include?
Specify the content you want the section to include. Provide relevant details to assist the AI Assistant in generating precise content. (Maximum limit of 1,000 characters.)
Click Generate .
If you are unsatisfied with an aspect of the section, you can:
Click the Sparkle button available in the bottom left corner and select from the following options:
Revise the initial prompt for What content should this section include? with the updated information you wish to include. Ensure to provide relevant details to assist the AI Assistant in generating precise content. (Maximum limit of 1,000 characters.)
Click Edit AI Business Profile to adjust the information in your business profile. This will assist the AI Assistant in gaining a deeper understanding of your business.
Select a different layout option from the side panel to regenerate the entire section. The layout, text, and images will change.
Click the Regenerate button on the top border of the section and select from the following options:
Images Only. This option regenerates images without altering the layout.
Text & Images. This option regenerates the text and images without altering the layout.
Once you are satisfied with your section content and design, click Save section .

After clicking save, the section is added to your page.

AI Assistant for the Text Editor

Thu, 09 Oct 2025 08:53:42 GMT

AI Assistant for the

Text Editor

The text editor offers an AI assistant to help you generate content quickly and work more efficiently. The Assistant is powered by Open AI. It can complete two types of actions; quick edits and generate content. Quick edits help you lengthen or shorten existing text. Generate content actions writes new content for titles and paragraphs.

Quick Edits

Quick editing actions edit the existing text in the widget. Following are the available quick edit actions:

Make longer. Lengthens the existing text.
Make shorter. Shortens the existing text.
Translate. Translate selected text to a different language (there is a list of languages to select from).
Improve writing. Rephrases the text in the widget to sound better.
Fix grammar & spelling. Fixes any grammar and or spelling errors.
Change tone. Change the tone of selected text to be more informative, witty, conversational, etc (there is a list of tones to select from).

To make a quick edit:

Right click a text widget and select Edit Text .
Click the AI Assistant drop down menu and select the desired quick edit action.
(Optional) Expand the Original text section to compare the original text with the quick edit suggested text.
If you are unsatisfied, click Try again . If you are satisfied, click Use this text to replace the text in the widget. You can also preview the text or copy it to your clipboard.

Write with AI (Generate Content)

Generate content actions creates new content for titles and paragraphs and adds it to the empty text widget. You do not need existing text to use most of these actions. Following are the generate content actions:

New title. Generates a title based on the descriptive text you provide. You need to specify if the title is for a page, paragraph, or section.
Title for this text. Generates a title for the existing text found in the widget. The title appears at the beginning of the text and is bolded. It does not replace any existing text.
Paragraph. Generates a paragraph based on descriptive text you provide. You also specify whether the paragraph is short, medium, or long.

To generate content:

Right click a text widget and select Edit Text .
Click the AI Assistant drop down menu and select the desired generate content action. The New title or Paragraph actions use the business profile.
Depending on what you select, there will be different fields to complete. The information you enter into these fields helps the AI Assistant gain context.
If you are unsatisfied, click Try again . If you are satisfied, click Use this text to add the text to the widget. You can also preview the text or copy it to your clipboard.

Business Profile

Note

While AI serves as a valuable tool for optimizing content, it is advisable to verify the generated content to ensure it aligns with your quality standards.

AI Tools Overview

Thu, 09 Oct 2025 08:28:11 GMT

AI Tools Overview

Website Builder offers several AI tools, including the AI Assistant, MCP Server, and Copilot. Following is an overview of the AI tools offered.

AI tool availability is based on your account plan and permissions.

AI Assistant

The AI Assistant leverages Open AI to help you generate content quickly and work more efficiently. Following are the various areas of the editor where you can leverage the AI Assistant.

Note

To use the AI Assistant you need to have AI permissions enabled.

AI Business Profile

Setting the AI Business Profile helps the AI assistant generate unique and valuable content. If you haven't set the profile before accessing the AI assistant, you'll be prompted to do so. Once set, the AI assistant will use the profile regardless of where it's accessed from.

Note

The business name will be auto filled if the business name was set in the Business Info section.
Changing the business name in the AI content assistant will disconnect it from Business Info. Consequently, any changes made to the business name in the Business Info will not reflect in the content assistant.

To access the AI Business Profile:

Click the sparkle icon in the side panel.
Click Update AI Business Profile .

Image Alt Text

Use the AI Assistant to generate alt text for site images:

Image Widgets (i.g., Photo Gallery) on canvas.
Blog Post Thumbnail. Refer to the Post SEO Settings .
Image Alt Text Dashboard.

Content Library

Use the AI Assistant to generate text for the following fields in the Content Library:

Business Text. Write New Title and Paragraph for fields, including: About Us, Company Overview, Business Services, and additional optional Label(s).

Text Widgets on Editor Canvas

Use the AI Assistant to generate text in Text widgets:

Write with AI. New title, Title for this text (H1 - H6), Paragraph, Custom Text.
Quick Edits. Improve Writing, Make Shorter, Make Longer, Translate, Change Tone, Fix Spelling & Grammar, Custom Edit.

For detailed information, see AI Assistant for the Text Editor .

Native Store

Use the AI Assistant to generate text for the following fields in native store:

Product Catalog. Quick Edits in the Product Description.
Categories. Quick Edits in the Category Description.

Section Creation

Use the AI Assistant to generate sections. For detailed information, see Create a Flex Section with AI .

SEO Content

Use the AI Assistant to generate SEO content:

Page SEO. For detailed information, see Generate SEO Content with AI .

Make Your Site Live: Initial Steps

Wed, 08 Oct 2025 12:51:09 GMT

Make Your Site Live:

Initial Steps and DNS Record Setup

Your site's domain is like its street address; it lets other people find it. Setting up your site domain is very important as it allows people to visit your sites.

While our site builder does not host domains, you can purchase a domain either during the publishing process (from our partnering domain provider) or prior to publishing. To connect your domain to your new Website Builder site, there are just a few records that will need to be added in the DNS settings for your domain.

Step 1: Publishing

The first step to making your site live is publishing.

To publish your site:

In your editor, on the top right, click Publish .
A payment page appears. Select a plan, and continue.

Once a plan has been selected, you are prompted to select from one of the following three domain options:

Default Domain . This is a domain hosted by Website Builder, and is not good for your site’s SEO. The URL will be a subdomain of Website Builder's with your custom naming. You may use the original default domain.
Purchase a new domain for your site. Purchase a domain from IONOS. When you type your domain into the field, a menu appears with suggestions. This domain will already be set up to work with Website Builder.
Use a domain you already own (make sure you added "www." to the URL) . You may use a domain that you already own from the domain host you purchased it from. Ensure you add "www." to the URL. If you choose to use your own domain, continue to Set up your Domain in your Domain Host.

Note

If you are assigning a subdomain (for example, store.domain.com), "www" is not needed. Simply enter in the subdomain (for example, store.domain.com).

You can generate an SSL certificate for your subdomain.

If you selected to use the Default Domain or Purchase a new domain for your site options, your site should be live and no further steps are needed to connect it.

For the Use a domain you already own (make sure you added "www." to the URL option, continue on to Step 2: Connect Your Domain .

Note

To change your domain at any time after publishing your site, in the side panel, click SEO & Settings, Site URL , and then click Change site URL .

Step 2: Connect Your Domain

This step is only needed when the Use a domain you already own (make sure you added "www." to the URL) option is selected.

Note

If your domain registrar doesn’t allow Advanced DNS editing, you may only be able to change nameservers. In this case, you can use an Advanced DNS Manager like Cloudflare. Cloudflare automatically detects your DNS records and provides nameservers for you to use. This allows you to add the necessary A and CNAME records to point your domain to your site (note: disable the proxy for the CNAME and A records in Cloudflare).

Option 1: Automatic Connection (Availability May Vary)

Note

This option may not be available due to certain factors, including:

Domain provider.
Name servers the domain is currently using (if a domain isn't using the domain providers default name servers, Website Builder may not be able to correctly add the records.)

After selecting Save , a box will come up that says Connect your domain to your website. Select Continue
Website Builder searches for your domain host provider, and prompts you to log in with your provider (for example, GoDaddy).
Type your login credentials for your domain host provider, and click Continue .
Alternatively, if you do not own the login credentials, click Forward login to a colleague. Copy the link provided and send to a colleague to complete the setup.
You will receive a confirmation message that your domain is now configured. Click Done.

Note

Changes to your domain typically take less than a few hours to go live. However, it may take up to 48 hours.
If your domain host provider was not found, you must configure your domain manually by adding a few records to your domain. Follow the prompts in the editor.

Option 2: Manual Connection

The following records will need to be added to connect the domain to your Website Builder site. How they are added will depend on the domain provider.

Note

Most domain hosts have instructions on creating CNAME records and A records in their help center. If you cannot find this information, please contact your domain host.

Note

AAAA and CAA records can prevent issuing an SSL certificate. Please ensure you do not have these records configured.

If you previously took your site live with instructions involving a 301 Redirect and CNAME, you will need to re-create your SSL certificate. For more information, see Add SSL or HTTPS. In addition, you will need to remove the previous settings for the 301 Redirect.

Changes to your domain typically take less than a few hours to go live. However, it may take up to 48 hours.

Examples

The following is an example from Google Domains, in which they use one A record with two IP addresses:

The following is an example from GoDaddy, in which they use two A records (one for each IP):

The following video demonstrates how to set up your DNS records in GoDaddy.

Purchase a Custom Domain

If you would like to use the custom domain option, but don't have a domain you own yet, you will need to purchase one.

Tip
Is your site already published, but want to assign or purchase a custom domain?
Open the editor for the desired site.
Click SEO & Settings.
Click Site Domain .
Click Change site URL .
Select one of the following options:
Purchase a new domain for your site and follow the prompts.
Use a domain you already own (make sure you added “www.” to the URL)

Purchase a Domain with IONOS

Through Website Builder's partnership with IONOS, you can opt to purchase a domain from within the editor during the publishing process. Not only will the domain be free for the first year, there is no need to configure CNAME records or 301 redirect setup as IONOS will automatically configure the needed DNS settings.

Note

When purchasing a domain from IONOS through our integration, IONOS will be your point of contact. For any questions or complications, please reach out directly to IONOS support ( www.ionos.com/contact ) .

Other Domain Registrars

While we strongly recommend buying your domain from the editor, you can purchase your new domain name from any domain registrar (for example, GoDaddy.com).

When you purchase your domain from a different registrar, you need to follow additional steps noted in this article to connect the domain to your website.

Subdomains

A subdomain functions as an entirely separate website from the primary one. It is configured as a prefix for the primary domain. For example, if your primary domain is domain.com and you want a separate site for your store, you could configure the subdomain as store.domain.com.

Note

Technically, 'www' is a subdomain (e.g., www.domain.com). When configuring other subdomains, 'www' is not needed because it is typically already set up as a default subdomain for your main website.

Assigning a subdomain

When assigning a subdomain, do not include 'www'. Simply enter the subdomain as is (for example, store.domain.com).

Configuring a subdomain

Configuring subdomains in your DNS settings is similar to setting up a primary domain, with one exception: you only need a CNAME record (the A records aren't needed).

In step 2 above (Connect Your Domain) , the automated process will only add the CNAME.

When manually adding the record in your DNS settings, the CNAME would be as follows using the example store.domain.com:

Record type: CNAME

Host: store

Points to: s.multiscreensite.com

FAQs and Troubleshooting

I published my site, why isn't it live?

If your site isn't live, if it's not working without 'www' (the naked domain), or not working with the 'www', the issue might be with the DNS settings at your domain provider.

The common records to check are:

CNAME and A (to ensure they are Website Builder's).
AAAA and CAA (these records can interfere and need to be removed).

Changes to your domain typically take less than a few hours to go live. However, it may take up to 48 hours. If your site still is not showing up after 48 hours, something may be happening. The first step to see what might be going on is using an online tool that can check DNS records and propagation.

Note

If you are using Cloudflare for the domain's DNS settings, you need to disable the proxy for the CNAME and A records.

To check the CNAME and A records:

Go to www.whatsmydns.net and select either CNAME or A from the drop-down menu.

For CNAME , complete the field using your whole URL (for example, www.domain.com). Ensure the search returns s.multiscreensite.com.
For the A record, complete the field using the naked domain (for example, domain.com). Ensure the search returns only 100.24.208.97 and 35.172.94.1. Any additional A records can also interfere and need to be deleted.

If you see red Xs, or do not see the correct host to the right of each location, this means that either the CNAME and/or A record was not set up correctly or the domain host is not propagating.

If everything is set up correctly in the DNS settings and you have waited 48 hours, but your site is not showing, please contact your domain host for more information.

If you see green check marks and the correct host name, your CNAME and A record has been set up successfully.

To check for AAAA and CAA records:

Go to www.whatsmydns.net and select either AAAA or CAA from the drop-down menu and complete the field using the naked domain (for example, domain.com).

If you see records for either of these, they will need to be removed from the DNS settings.

Some Additional Reasons Why a Site Might Not be Live

The DNS records were not setup correctly or with the correct provider (if the nameservers used aren't the default ones provided by the domain provider, the DNS of the nameserver provider will need to be updated.
There was a settings change on the domain side.
DNS settings were reset.
There was a billing issue with your domain host.
Caching (if you previously visited the site, your browser may have cached it. Clearing cache or visiting the site on a new browser or device may fix it).

The old site is still showing.

This could be caused by a couple of reasons:

The site may be cached on your device. To check if this is the issue, clear your browser's cache and try again, or try visiting the site in a different browser or on a device that hasn't visited the site before.
The DNS records haven't fully propagated or haven't been added.

To check the CNAME and A records:

Go to www.whatsmydns.net and select either CNAME or A from the drop-down menu.

For CNAME , complete the field using your whole URL (for example, www.domain.com). Ensure the search returns s.multiscreensite.com.
For the A record, complete the field using the naked domain (for example, domain.com). Ensure the search returns only 100.24.208.97 and 35.172.94.1. Any additional A records can also interfere and need to be deleted.

If you see red Xs, or do not see the correct host to the right of each location, this means that either the CNAME and/or A record was not set up correctly or the domain host is not propagating.

If everything is set up correctly in the DNS settings and you have waited 48 hours, but your site is not showing, please contact your domain host for more information.

If you see green check marks and the correct host name, your CNAME and A record has been set up successfully.

Your Domain is Not Set Up Correctly

This error means either that:

Your domain is not set up and/or propagated appropriately.
To resolve this, please make sure you have followed the steps in this article and wait up to 24 hours.
We are expecting a different domain name.
To resolve this, make sure that the site URL in this interface has a www before it.

How to Release a Domain that is Already in Use

This error means that another site in our system is using this domain. The domain needs to be released before it can be used on another site. It is important to note that only site owners can release a domain for a site they own.

To release a domain:

On the Use a domain you already own screen, click Yes it is mine .
Use the Alias/Host/Name and Target/Destination records provided on the screen to create a new TXT record in your hosting provider account.
Once you have created the new record, navigate back to your website and click Verify & Free Up Domain .
You will receive confirmation that the domain was disconnected from its previous site. Click Continue to finish connecting your domain.
If you received an error, first check that there are no errors in how you entered the TXT record information. If there was no errors in how you entered the TXT record, click Try Again . Next, click Verify My Ownership . Note that it can take anywhere between 1 - 48 hours for the TXT records to update.
If you still cannot disconnect your domain, contact your site owner.

Site Not Found

This error typically indicates the DNS records are correct however the domain is not assigned to a site.

To assign the domain to a site:

In the side panel, click SEO & Settings .
Select Site Domain .
Select Change Site URL .
Enter the correct domain name.
Click Save .

If the site is Not published, see step 1 in this article ( Publishing ) .

If the domain has been assigned, please double-check the spelling. If needed, change the site name and then copy and paste it into the field to ensure it's correct.

Nameservers

If you have published your site and configured your DNS settings correctly, but the site is still not live, you may need to check your nameserver settings.

Nameservers may affect your A and CNAME records when configuring your DNS settings. While typically, the domain provider's default nameservers are used, there may be situations where custom ones are needed. For example, the domain could be registered at GoDaddy, but the nameserver settings at GoDaddy are pointing to Cloudflare. To update your DNS records, you would need to login to Cloudflare to add your DNS settings, not GoDaddy.

If the domain provider's default nameservers are not being used (for example, if the domain is using Cloudflare's nameservers), you need to update your DNS records through the DNS manager where your nameservers are located or revert the nameservers back to your domain provider's default settings.

Warning

Changing nameserver settings should be done with extreme caution, as this changes all your DNS settings at once. For example, if you have an email service set up at domain.com and you change your nameservers, you need to add DNS settings at the new nameserver for your email (MX records) in addition to adding A records and CNAME records to publish your site.

Find and Identify your Nameservers

To find your nameservers go to www.whatsmydns.net and select NS from the drop-down menu and complete the field using the naked domain (for example, domain.com).

Examples of possiblenameservers and their providers:

earl.ns.cloudfare.com - Cloudflare.com
ns07.domaincontrol.com - GoDaddy.com
ns1045.ui-dns.org - IONOS.com

To identify the provider of your nameserver, copy the nameserver and search for 'who is the provider for the nameserver NAMESERVER' (for example, 'who is the provider for the nameserver ns-cloud-d1.googledomains.com').

Configure Alternate Domains

Wed, 08 Oct 2025 09:44:26 GMT

Configure Alternate Domains

After a custom domain has been set up for your site, you can forward other domains you own to the domain you set up. This feature may be useful if you have recently changed your domain name or would like to forward other top-level variants of your domain (for example, .net, .org) to your main site.

Forward one or more domains to your site

To forward one or more domains to your site:

Add the appropriate DNS records in the DNS settings of the domain or domains you will be forwarding (this step is carried out in the DNS settings of the domain's host, for example GoDaddy).
In the side panel, click SEO & Settings , and then click Site Domain .
In the Site URL section, click the Add alternate domain link and type the URLs of each of the domains you want to forward to your site, separated by commas. For example, www.mysite.com,www.anothersite.com,www.myorg.org.
click Save .
Republish your site.

Note

There is an option to display the site at alternate domains instead of redirecting. We do not recommend checking this option, as it is likely to reduce your site's overall SEO rankings.
Redirects from alternate domains happen on a per page basis and not only on the root domain. For example, domain1.com/contact will redirect to domain2.com/contact and not domain2.com.
Up to 10 alternate domains can be added to a single site.

Set up the Alternate Domains in Their Domain Host

You need to add the appropriate DNS records for each domain before they will forward to your site. This process is the same as for the main domain, except that the records need to be configured manually.

Note

The A records are needed for the base domain (domain.com) to forward as well. Without these records only the www version (www.domain.com) will forward.

SSLs for Alternate Domains

SSLs can be generated for alternate domains. To generate an SSL, please visit the alternate domain once it's been saved in the editor. The SSL will not generate if the alternate domain is not visited.

Note

The main domain needs to have an SSL already generated by the editor.
Once the SSL starts to generate, it can take up to 3 hours to complete.
SSLs will not be visible in the editor and unable to be managed (for example removed or regenerated).

Unpublish a Site

Wed, 08 Oct 2025 09:30:25 GMT

Unpublish a Site

If you unpublish your site it will no longer be publicly visible, but you will still be able to make edits and your site subscription payment will continue unless you select Do Not Renew for your site subscription. You can republish your site at any time to make it live and publicly available.

To unpublish your site:

In the side panel of the editor, click SEO & Settings .
Click Site Domain .
Click Unpublish .

 Warning

Unpublishing your site does not cancel the subscription. Please contact your site owner to ensure it's been canceled.

Headers

Tue, 07 Oct 2025 15:17:30 GMT

Headers

The header is the part of your site that contains the logo and navigation. There are a lot of different ways to control the style of your header to help you create an appealing header for your site.

In Editor 2.0, the default header offers pre-made layouts, minimizing the risk of accidental changes. Users can choose layouts with limited actions, ensuring a focused and efficient design experience. An advanced editing option is also available for users seeking more customization, enabling the addition of extra widgets or elements beyond the pre-made layouts. For more information, see Advanced Header Editing.

Advanced Header Editing (Editor 2.0)

Advanced editing can be enabled for the header to access more customization options, such as the ability to add more widgets and elements. Changing the header layout (in the Header Design panel) will reset any changes that were made and will disable advanced editing.

Note

Because the headers sync across the screen sizes, it is recommended to check all screen sizes when using the advanced editing option.

Enable Advanced Header Editing

When using advanced editing, it's recommended to check all screen sizes due to header synchronization.

To enable advanced editing:

Click on the Header tab.
Click Edit Design .
In the Layout section, click Enable advanced editing .

If you plan to display different elements on desktop and mobile (e.g., a button on desktop and an icon on mobile), utilize the hide/show feature for seamless transitions. To learn more, see Hide or Unhide Elements in Header (Editor 2.0).

Disable Advanced Header Editing and Reset Header

To disable advanced editing and reset header, select a different layout:

Click the Header tab.
Click Edit Design .
Within the Layout section, click the arrow to access layout options.
Select a different layout to disable advanced editing and reset the header. Any changes made using advanced editing will be reverted and not saved.

Header in Editor 2.0 Limitations

As Editor 2.0's header undergoes continuous development, certain features are still under review and/or development:

HTML/CSS Accessibility: Access to HTML/CSS for the header is a permanent limitation due to the technology utilized.

Hide or Unhide Header (Classic Editor)

To hide a header:

Hover over the bottom of the header, and click Header .
Click Hide page header on , and select the device you want the header hidden on.

To unhide the header:

In the side panel, click the Unhide Elements icon under SEO & Settings.
Click the Hide icon on the footer, and select Yes to unhide the header.

Hide or Unhide Header (Editor 2.0)

You can hide the header for all pages or only for specific pages.

To hide the header:

Right click the header to open the context menu.
Select Hide on this device , then select either From this Page Only or From All Pages .

To unhide the header:

In the side panel, click Layers .
Locate your header in the panel, then click the crossed-out eye icon next to it.

Hide or Unhide Elements in Header (Editor 2.0)

The flexibility to hide or unhide elements within the header provides you with granular control over the visual components on different screen sizes, whether you want to streamline your design or emphasize certain elements for specific devices.

Important points to be aware of:

Any element in the header, including the header itself, can be hidden on any screen size. This can be done either on the canvas or in the Layers panel.
Elements included in the default header option can be hidden as well.
Elements that are hidden will show as disabled with a hide element icon.
The layers panel will only indicate elements hidden for the screen size you are currently on. For instance, if you are on desktop, it will only indicate elements hidden on desktop.

To hide header elements from the Layers panel:

In the top toolbar, click on the desired screen size you would like to hide the element on.
Click Layers from the side toolbar.
Click on the element you like to hide.
Click on the hide element icon.

To unhide header elements from the Layers panel:

In the top toolbar, click on the desired screen size you would like to hide the element on.
Click Layers from the side toolbar.
Click on the element you like to unhide (it will show disabled with the crossed out eye icon prior to being selected).
Click on the hide element icon.

Shrinking Header (Classic Editor)

The Shrinking Header is a smaller version of the site header, enabling you to keep important navigation information fixed without distracting users as they scroll down a page and without taking up too much space. It acts as a sticky header feature but condenses the size of the logos and the general size of the header. It is particularly useful in sites that have large headers and sites that are designed for long scrolling.

Note

The shrinking header is available on desktop and only for tablet when the top bar header layout is used.

To enable a shrinking header in Classic Editor:

Hover over the header, click Header , and then click Edit Design .
On the Shrinking Header tab, click the Enable shrinking header toggle. You have the following options:

Show navigation row only. Only display the row with navigation when the header shrinks. This feature is only applicable if there is more than one row in the header.
Background color. Change the background color of the shrinking header. Note that the row background color overrides the shrinking header background color.
More header colors on scroll. Specify colors for the text, selected link and hover, icons, button text, and more.
Logo size. Change the size that the logo or image shrinks to when the header shrinks (default is 66%).
Change logo on scroll. Select a logo to display on scroll.
Header spacing. Adjust the top and bottom padding of the shrinking header. You can change the header spacing per device.

Once the shrinking header is enabled, the following occurs:

The header spacing changes the top/bottom padding, and margin to 0. This does not apply to the rows inside the header.
Images in the header shrink to the percentage in the logo size bar (default is 66%).
To handle templates with a minimum height value in the header, the min-height of the header is set to auto.
If there are blank rows with columns, the columns span the entire space of the row.
The design properties override the shrinking header properties. For example, if you set a row background in the header, the row background displays over the shrinking header background.
Blank rows are displayed in the shrinking header.
If you cannot see your shrinking header, it may be because you do not have enough rows on your site to be able to scroll down on the site and trigger the shrinking header. If you only have one row on the page, the site will not scroll.

Scroll On Header (Shrinking Header) for Editor 2.0

The Scroll on Header feature keeps essential navigation elements like the logo and menu visible at the top of the screen as users scroll down the page. It condenses logos and the general size of the header to save space and ensure easy access to navigation without being intrusive. Ideal for sites with large headers or those designed for extended scrolling, it enhances user experience by maintaining accessibility to key navigation options.

Enable Scroll on Header

It is important to note that sticky header must already be enabled before the scroll on header may be enabled.

To enable scroll on header:

Hover over the header, and click Header .
Click Edit Design . The Header Design panel will appear.
Expand the Position section, and enable the Set as sticky header toggle if it is not already enabled.
Enable the Change header on scroll toggle.
Configure the following design options:

Padding. Set the headers initial padding-top and padding-bottom values (this is not specific to the sticky header option).
BG on scroll. Select the background color and opacity. Changes made on any screen size will affect the others.
Spacing on scroll. Define the top and bottom padding in px, %, vh, or vw. If you want to override the desktop screen size settings, you can make edits on tablet and mobile.
Logo size. Use the slider or text box to specify the size the logo shrinks to when the header shrinks on scroll. The default is 66%. Changes must be made on individual screen sizes.
Show only nav section on scroll. In the Position section, enable the Show only nav section on scroll toggle to keep only the navigation visible when scrolling. All other sections in the header will disappear on scroll.

Note this option is only available for advanced headers.

Changes made in the Layout section of the Header Design Panel do not affect the Posi tion settings.

Overlap Editor 2.0 Head er with First Row

You have the flexibility to set your header to overlap with the content in the first row of the page. This can create a visually appealing effect where the header seamlessly integrates with the content. If desired, you can set the header to overlap the first row. This needs to be enabled per page.

To enable overlap header with first row:

Hover over the header, and click Header .
Click Edit Design . The Header Design panel will appear.
Expand the Position section, and enable the toggle for Overlap 1st section on page .
(Optional) Configure a background color that will apply to all screen sizes.

Widgets Compatible with Shrinking Headers

Not all widgets are compatible and appear in the shrinking header. If you have a widget in the header that is not compatible with the shrinking header, a blank column appears in place of the widget. You cannot edit widgets when the header is shrunk.

The following widgets are compatible and will display in a shrinking header for both Classic Editor and Editor 2.0:

Navigation
Multi-language
Social Icons
Click to Call button
OpenTable button
Click to Email button
vcita
PayPal button
Facebook Like button
Images and Logos
Store Cart
Paragraph widget
Title widget
Buttons

Sticky Headers

A sticky header becomes static and stays in place when you scroll through pages in your site.

Note

In Classic Editor, Mobile headers are always sticky by default. In Editor 2.0, you have the option to toggle on or off a sticky header for all screen sizes.

To enable a sticky header:

Hover over the header, click Header , and then click Edit Design .
On the Content tab, select Set As Sticky Header . If the option for Sticky Header is not available, you need to disable the toggle for Shrinking Header on the Shrinking Header tab.

Header Layouts

There are several pre-designed flexible header layouts to select from. If you switch to one of the pre-designed flexible header layouts, you cannot switch back to a fixed header, you can only switch between other flexible header layouts. Switching layouts also removes existing content from the header section. We recommend creating a backup before switching layouts.

To change the header layout:

Hover over the header and click Header .
On the Design tab, select a new header layout. If you are switching to a sticky header, you first need to disable the toggle for Shrinking Header on the Shrinking Header tab.

Hamburger Site Layout (Editor 2.0)

You can enable a hamburger site layout on desktop. By default, tablet and mobile use the hamburger layout.

To enable the Hamburger site layout:

Click your header label and select Change Preset in the floating menu. Note that this is the same whether you have a Basic or Advanced header.
In the design panel, the Presets section will open. Select the Hamburger icon next to Browse menu presets . Note that no change will be reflected on the canvas yet.

Select the desired hamburger layout. The selected layout will display on the canvas.
When you are satisfied with the layout, exit the Presets popup.

Note that when changing presets, some customizations may reset. Background color and logo will remain the same.

Header Design

To access the header design menu in Classic Editor, hover over the header, click Header , then click the Design tab.

To access the header design menu in Editor 2.0, hover over the header, click Header , then click Edit Design . The design panel will open on the side of the canvas. It contains the following design options:

Layout: Explore layout options that pair top navigation and hamburger styles consistently across screen sizes. While default layouts have limited capabilities, an advanced editing option enhances flexibility.
Spacing : Set margins and padding, with changes on the desktop affecting other screen sizes if their spacing remains unaltered.
Background : Choose background color or image, add borders or shadows, and witness changes seamlessly reflected across all screen sizes.
Position : Enable a sticky header with scroll-based changes. Sticky header activation on any screen size influences the behavior on others.

Header Logo

If the header contains one image, the logo of the site will be kept when moving between header layouts. In the case there is more than one image, or the logo is textual, the logo image is kept as in the layout. It is important to note that the headers between devices are not connected, so if you add a logo on desktop it is not automatically added to the other device types. The only exception is if the top bar header layout is used on tablet it will inherit any logo changes made on desktop.

If you delete the logo, re-add the image by dragging the image element back into the header, and set the link to go back to the homepage.

Header and Expandable Menu

You can add an expandable menu on your desktop and tablet sites, making it easy to create modern sites that have great design flexibility. Choose from several expandable menu layouts, and customize them as you like, adding widgets, rows, and columns.

The expandable menu layout for mobile offers more customization and a way to display widgets in the header and a menu that is always visible.

You can change the layout of the header to a predefined layout that includes buttons, click to call, store cart, social icons, and more. You can add any widget to the expandable menu from the widgets panel.

Desktop and Tablet Header and Expandable Menu

To select and configure a header and expandable menu layout for desktop and tablet:

In the side panel, click Theme , then click Site Layout .
In the Desktop section, select the Expandable menu layout.
In the Tablet section, select the Expandable menu layout.
After selecting the expandable menu layout, a hamburger icon displays in your site header. Click the hamburger icon to see the expandable menu.
On the Layout tab, click the existing layout to select a menu layout.
On the Style tab, you have the following options:
Enter from . Select Top or Side .
Entrance effect . Select Cover or Push .
Width . Move the slider to set the width of the expandable menu when expanded. The width of the menu is defined in percentages to fit all screen sizes.
Background . Configure the background color or image.
Close icon color . Select a color for the close icon, and close icon background color.
On the Spacing tab, change the padding.

The expandable menu can have up to 3 rows, and each one is fully customized. If the Desktop and Tablet have the same site layout (both expandable or both top bar), all customizations are the same for both. In case they are different, each device needs to be defined separately.

To edit location of the expandable menu in the header:

Hover over the header, click Header , and then select Edit Design .
In the Layout section, click Left or Right .

Mobile Header and Expandable Menu

To select and configure a header and expandable menu layout for mobile:

Hover over the header, click the Header label, and then select Edit Design .
On the Layout tab, click the existing layout to select a menu layout. The mobile header offers layouts that display widgets such as social links, phone numbers, and more. The header layouts are fixed, so you cannot add new widgets, but you can edit or remove them. When you add a store or use the multi-language feature, more layout options are available that include the icons for the store shipping cart and the multi-language feature. If you do not have the store or multi-language enabled, these layouts do not appear.
Click Left or Right for the Menu icon position.
If you are not already, open the menu in mobile view. This allows the menu editor to open so you can edit the expandable menu.
On the Layout tab, click the existing layout to select a menu layout. The expandable menu offers multiple layouts that can display the social links, contact information and more. You can add any widget to the expandable menu, add columns, sort the columns to be next to each other or on top of each other. However, when you switch from one layout to another, it deletes all content that you added into the menu, taking only the widgets in the chosen layout.
On the Style tab, you have the following options:

Enter from. Select Top or Side . When Top is selected, move the height slider. When Side is selected, move the width slider.
Entrance effect. Select Cover or Push .

Note

Additional widgets are not able to be added to the mobile hea der.

Display Header Items Above Her o Image

To display header items above hero images, hover over the header, click Header , click the Design tab, then click Overlap first row . This gives your hero images more visibility and makes it easier to design great-looking, trendy sites.

Keep the following in mind:

For the header. Set the background color to transparent, or a color with opacity.
For the first row. Use top padding that is equal to or similar to the height of the header.

Note

For added flexibility, this setting applies only to the current page. To enable it on other pages, navigate to each page and follow the steps above.

Footer

Tue, 07 Oct 2025 14:02:27 GMT

Footer

The footer is the last section of your site, located at the bottom, and is the same on each page of your site. Footers are a convenient way to make sure your site visitors have access to important links like terms of service, privacy policy, or social media, regardless of the page they are visiting. In addition to legal links, the footer is a good place for copyright information and general contact information.

Note

If you are using Classic Editor, your footer will not be flex. If you are using Editor 2.0 your footer will be flex.

Customise Footer

While the footer is its own section, the contents can be edited just like pages. By default, there will be at least one row. If there is only one row, the row will not have the option to be deleted.

To customise the footer section design:

Hover over the top of the footer, and click Footer .
On the Style tab, adjust the footer background by selecting a color or an image. You can also select a border style and thickness.
To adjust the padding or margin, click the Spacing tab.

Hide and Unhide Footer (Classic Editor)

To hide the footer on a specific page:

Navigate to the desired page.
Hover over the top of the footer, and click Footer .
Click the Hide footer on this page toggle.

To unhide the footer:

In the side panel, click the Unhide Elements icon under Settings .
Click the Hide icon on the footer, and select Yes to unhide the footer.

Hide Footer (Editor 2.0)

The footer can be hidden from the floating bar, context menu, and layers panel.

Hide Footer from Floating Bar

To hide the footer from the floating bar:

Click the footer to open the floating bar.
Click Hide on Device and then select This page or All pages .

Hide Footer from Context Menu

To hide the footer from the context menu:

Right-click the footer to open the context menu.
Click Hide on Device and then select This page or All pages .

Hide Footer from Layers Panel

When hiding the footer from the layers panel, it hides the footer for the current page and device. To hide the footer from the layers panel, click the eye icon next to the footer layer.

Unhide Footer (Editor 2.0)

The footer can be unhidden from the layers panel.

Unhide Footer from Layers Panel

To unhide the footer from the layers panel, click the crossed out eye icon next to the footer. Note that unhiding the footer from the layers panel only unhides it from the pages and devices you selected to have it hidden on.

Start A Site With AI

Mon, 06 Oct 2025 09:43:14 GMT

Learn how Team Members on your account can use AI capabilities to kickstart the site-building process! Enter a few details about the business and let the AI suggest text, images, and layout options for you.

Start A Site From A Template

Mon, 06 Oct 2025 09:40:49 GMT

Learn how Team Members in your account can begin the site-building process using a pre-made template! See how easy it is to select a template, customise it with your client's branding and content, and get a professional-looking site live quickly.

Wrapping Column Contents

Mon, 06 Oct 2025 09:33:41 GMT

Discover how to control element wrapping and row alignment with the wrap property. You'll learn the difference between the default "no-wrap" setting, which forces all elements into a single row, and the "wrap" option, allowing elements to break into new rows as needed.

What Is A Viewport

Mon, 06 Oct 2025 09:29:57 GMT

Let's talk about viewport width and viewport height including how to measure your browser's viewport and how these units impact web design.

What Is A Breakpoint

Mon, 06 Oct 2025 09:27:39 GMT

Learn about breakpoints and how to switch between the mobile, tablet, and desktop breakpoints within the editor.

Viewport Width And Height

Mon, 06 Oct 2025 09:25:19 GMT

This video demonstrates how to adjust image sizes using percentage units and viewport width, showcasing the difference between scaling images relative to parent elements versus the entire viewport.

Using Widgets

Mon, 06 Oct 2025 09:19:28 GMT

In this video, you will learn how to use widgets which are essentially the building blocks of your website.

Tour The Editor's Components

Mon, 06 Oct 2025 09:16:00 GMT

Get to know the core components of the editor and how each component supports you in the responsive page-building process.

Canvas, Layers panel, Design panel, top bar to swap breakpoints.

Tour The Editor: Top Bar

Mon, 06 Oct 2025 09:11:58 GMT

In this video, you will learn about the top bar and the tools & settings used to save and publish your website.

Tour The Editor: The Canvas

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 15:15:05 GMT

In this video, you will explore and learn more about the Canvas within the editor.

Tour The Editor: Side Panel

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 14:11:14 GMT

In this video, you will explore the side panel within the editor.

Tour The Editor: Design Panel

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 14:06:17 GMT

The design panel is the essential tool for customising the design and behaviour of your website's elements.

The Media Panel Preview And Swap Images Faster!

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 13:53:18 GMT

Learn how to use the Media Panel to instantly preview and swap images across your website by simply dragging and dropping them onto the canvas. Adding new images is just as easy – drag and drop directly onto the canvas or explore your site media and stock libraries within the panel. Try it yourself!

The Layers Panel

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 13:50:59 GMT

The Layers Panel allows you to easily target, highlight, and rename elements, enhancing navigation and control. By understanding the parent-child relationships between sections and widgets, you can create more effective layouts.

Summary Of Breakpoints Lessons

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 13:48:23 GMT

This video summarizes what was covered in the set of breakpoints lessons that comes before this.

Site Header

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 13:36:10 GMT

In this video, you will learn how to create and edit your site header.

Site Comments

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 13:30:20 GMT

In this video, you will learn how to use site comments to leave feedback on your website.

Reordering Elements Within A Column

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 13:15:11 GMT

Explore how to customise the order of elements within a column. You'll see how changes made on one breakpoint won’t impact the layout on other breakpoints like desktop or mobile. We'll also run through a practical example.

Rearranging Columns

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 13:09:12 GMT

Rearrange columns and see how changes applied to one breakpoint won't affect the others.

Personalisation

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 13:04:26 GMT

In this video, you will learn how to use personalisation rules and how to create different personalisation rules across your website.

Overview Of The Breakpoints Lessons

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 13:00:43 GMT

Learn about the importance of breakpoints and what we'll cover in the next lessons.

Minimum And Maximum

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 12:29:46 GMT

In this video, you will learn about additional sizing properties that can be assigned to different elements across your website.

Meet The Advanced Tabs Widget

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 12:26:16 GMT

In this video, you will learn how to customise tab layouts with the advanced tabs widget.

Manually Connect Your Domain Name

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 12:23:38 GMT

CNAMEs, A records, IPs oh my! If you need to configure your DNS settings to connect your domain name to your site, give this video a watch.

Manage Pages

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 12:21:15 GMT

In this video, you will learn how to organise and edit the pages of your website.

Manage Content

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 12:19:03 GMT

In this video, you will learn how to use the content library to import and manage the content across your website.

Layout Properties For Sections

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 12:15:36 GMT

Find out how to control layout properties like column arrangement, grid settings, and full-width vs. contained layouts.

Layout Properties For Columns

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 12:13:13 GMT

See how to adjust the layout properties for columns within the editor. In this video, you'll see how columns act as containers for elements like text and images, and how you can modify their layout independently at each breakpoint.

Layout Elements

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 12:11:08 GMT

These special widgets are essential for organizing your website's structure. Unlike basic widgets like buttons or text blocks, layout elements act as containers that hold and arrange other widgets, making it easier to build intricate and responsive web designs.

Intro To Advanced Grids

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 10:57:14 GMT

Advanced Grids are a powerful widgets that can facilitate two-dimensional design, enabling you to arrange and overlap widgets in creative ways. In this video, learn how to align elements precisely within the grid and control their stacking order when elements overlap.

Internal Collections

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 10:54:12 GMT

In this video, you will learn how to use internal collections with Dynamic pages.

How To Integrate And Share Google Calendar

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 10:50:44 GMT

Learn how to integrate, share, and troubleshoot a Google Calendar in your Website Builder.

How To Find A URL Of An Image Or A File

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 10:48:36 GMT

Learn how To Find A Url Of An Image Or A File.

Hiding And Deleting Elements

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 10:46:05 GMT

Want to offer an alternative layout for mobile and tablet devices? No problem! We'll show you how to control element visibility per breakpoint.

Grid Layouts

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 10:42:01 GMT

Continue our exploration of grids and the use of the Advanced Grid layout element in the editor. We'll look at how popular websites use grids to structure their layouts, and discover how grids offer flexibility beyond simple, uniform designs. By defining rows, columns, and preset spacing between grid cells, you can create a highly organized and visually appealing foundation for your designs.

Global Design

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 10:39:18 GMT

In this video, you will learn how to use Global design settings to speed up the process of customising your site. Global design is a great place to start editing. This is where you'll be able to set default options for things such as text, button colour, backgrounds and more - all of which will immediately apply across the site. This allows you to set a design once and then forget it.

Generate Image Alt Text Automatically With AI

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 10:16:10 GMT

Boost your SEO and website accessibility with our ai-powered Image Alt Text feature. This tutorial shows how you can generate image alt text quickly and accurately.

Generate A Section With AI

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 10:13:48 GMT

AI can automate section creation, making your web design process faster and more efficient.

Fix Broken Links Fast With Link Checker

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 10:11:13 GMT

Discover how easy it is to identify and fix broken links on your site with the Link Checker ! Save yourself time and improve your site’s health and SEO in a few simple steps.

Example: Using Viewport Units

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 10:09:03 GMT

Watch this demonstration on how to effectively use viewport width and height to size elements. We'll adjust section heights while accounting for headers to avoid unwanted scrolling.

Edit Page Layout

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 10:05:39 GMT

Learn how to edit your page layout on your website.

Dynamic Pages

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 10:03:13 GMT

Learn how to use and implement dynamic pages into your website.

Create Responsive Cards For Your Web Pages

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 09:59:34 GMT

Enhance your website with engaging, responsive cards featuring images, text, and buttons. Learn our technique using nested columns for precise control and a perfect look on any screen.

Create Overlapping Images With Advanced Grids

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 09:56:45 GMT

Got a design with overlapping elements? We've got you covered! In this video, we'll show you how to create a stunning overlapping image effect.

Create An Engaging Hero Section With Title And Buttons

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 08:47:17 GMT

Want a hero section that instantly grabs attention and drives engagement? This video reveals the step-by-step process to create a visually striking and responsive hero with a captivating image, compelling title, and clear call-to-action buttons.

Create A Transparent Header With Scroll Effects

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 08:44:29 GMT

Learn how to create a website header with a transparent background that initially overlaps the hero section and transitions to a solid colour upon scrolling.

Create A Hero Image Scrolling Animation

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 08:32:35 GMT

Discover how to create a captivating scrolling animation for your hero image, making your website instantly more dynamic and engaging. This tutorial provides a simple, step-by-step guide to achieve this stunning visual effect.

Create A Fixed 'Subscribe To Newsletter' Form

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 08:29:44 GMT

This tutorial shows how to create a fixed "Subscribe to Newsletter" form for increased visibility and conversions. You can use the technique to fix other widgets on your pages if you choose!

Change Element Stacking Direction In A Column

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 08:24:00 GMT

In this video, we'll take a close look at the horizontal and vertical stacking of elements in your layouts as well as the role of Flexbox: a widely-adopted layout method that the editor uses to control how elements behave when developing responsive sites.

Build Sites Using The Simple Editor + AI

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 08:13:02 GMT

Learn how to build your website from scratch using just the Simple Editor and AI features.

Build A Section With Columns And Inner Columns

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 08:09:01 GMT

This video brings together everything you've learned about alignment, stacking, wrapping, and walks through an activity to demonstrate how all of these properties are used when building an actual section.

Blog Management

Fri, 03 Oct 2025 08:05:48 GMT

Learn how to effectively and efficiently run your blog and manage your posts.

Automatically Connect Your Domain Name

Thu, 02 Oct 2025 11:06:56 GMT

Let our intelligent platform help you connect your domain name automatically!

Aligning Elements Within A Column

Thu, 02 Oct 2025 11:01:19 GMT

In this video, you'll learn how to use the properties in the Design panel to distribute space between elements and control their alignment. We'll also demonstrate how to align individual elements independently from the container's settings. With hands-on examples, you’ll see how to control spacing with options like "Space Between" and "Space Around," ensuring you can create precise and responsive designs.

Airtable Example URL

Thu, 02 Oct 2025 10:50:50 GMT

Learn how to set-up an Airtable example URL.

Advanced Grid Example

Thu, 02 Oct 2025 10:46:59 GMT

We'll show you how to rework the example we created when we learned about columns, inner columns, and their layout properties. This time we'll use an advanced grid!

Starting with a simple layout, we'll break the design into rows and columns, showing how the advanced grid allows for precise control over element placement, alignment, and overlapping.

Advanced Accordion Widget

Thu, 02 Oct 2025 10:39:58 GMT

Need more flexibility in your accordion designs? Rename titles, duplicate items, and customise individual item layouts. Customise title and icon locations, define expansion rules, and even embed other widgets within each accordion item. Perfect for FAQs, service solutions, menus, and more, the Advanced Accordion offers unmatched flexibility and design freedom. See it in action!

Additional Edits Per Breakpoint

Thu, 02 Oct 2025 10:35:20 GMT

You've already learned that layouts can be customized per breakpoint. In this video, we'll take this a step further and explore how to control layout properties like margins, padding, and element sizes for a unique breakpoint without affecting other breakpoints. We'll also show you how the design panel provides helpful icons to indicate which changes apply to individual breakpoints or across all views.

Absolute Vs. Relative Units

Thu, 02 Oct 2025 10:31:12 GMT

Learn the differences between absolute and relative units and when to use each type.

A Is For Auto Size Units

Thu, 02 Oct 2025 10:07:47 GMT

Discover the "Auto" pseudo-unit. We'll show how using this unit adjusts the size of an element to fit its content, unlike other relative units like percentage or viewport.

RSS Link Builder

Wed, 01 Oct 2025 12:25:28 GMT

The Travelgenix RSS link builder lets you display live product feeds to your audience on website pages and within marketing emails.

Using a Really Simple Syndication (RSS) feed, you are able to configure the specific type of products you want to display to your audience, and when somebody clicks on a product within the feed, it initiates a live search on your website.

This means you can put attractive and engaging lists of travel products in front of your audience, to help them with their holiday research and lead them towards a booking on your website.

Before you start!

For your RSS Link builder to work correctly, you must ensure you have some default settings in place within Travelify > Applications > Edit Application > Generic Settings

(a) Within General Settings, ensure your website URL's are configured for the relevant pages on your website:

(b) Ensure you have the default code in place within the various fields in RSS Travel Offers - Template 1 and RSS Travel Offers - Template 2

These code snippets control the layout of the RSS templates, and can be managed using Liquid Template Language - But using the default versions will work "out of the box" for you.

How to build an RSS link within Travelify?

Within your Travelify account, visit Tools, then click on RSS Link Builder to build your first RSS link.

You will then be presented with the RSS Link Builder tool.

This lets you generate a custom URL, by configuring the type of travel products that will be displayed within the RSS Feed. You will need to place this custom URL in a third party RSS tool or email building tool, which we will cover at the end of this article. Here's how you configure your RSS link:

Feed format
RSS Format (Recommended)
ATOM Format - Learn more
Type of offers
Any
Flights
Accommodation
Flights + Accommodation
Maximum offers to return
Language
Currency
Pricing type match
Budget (Minimum)
Budget (Maximum)
Origins
Destinations
Board Basis
Cabin classes
Flight carriers
Return flights only (Yes/No)
Exact dates (Yes/No) - If you select yes, then this RSS feed will no longer work after the point in time that you set it to has passed. E.g. If you set the dates from 1st June to 10th June 2021, this will no longer work after the 10th June 2021.
Dates From
Dates To
Duration (Minimum)
Duration (Maximum)
Sort
Price ascending
Price descending
Random

Once you have configured the RSS feed to your needs, click the button Copy To Clipboard

NOTE : Travelify does not currently save your RSS Feed Links, so if you wish to save these links for future use, you may wish to put them into a document or a spreadsheet.

4
You are now able to paste this custom URL into a third party RSS feed tool or use within an email service provider, to send a marketing email.

Where to use your RSS Link?

Adding RSS links to a Mailchimp email

Multi-Lingual Websites (Overview)

Fri, 19 Sep 2025 11:16:04 GMT

Travelgenix websites can display in multiple languages.

The translation is powered by Google translate, but you have full control to override the the translation manually if Google hasn't got it quite right.

Here are some things worth knowing about Travelgenix multi-lingual website capabilities:

There are three considerations when it comes to multi-lingual travel websites:
The translation of the website
The translation of the travel technology
The translation of the products provided by the supplier
Multi-lingual websites refer to the website provided by Travelgenix, and not the travel technology widgets. The translation of the widgets are managed within the Travelgenix multi-lingual database.
The translation of live product results are dictated by the suppliers you are connected to. If your chosen supplier does not provide content in multiple languages, then it will not be translated on the website.
It's strongly advised to complete your Travelgenix website 100% before adding multiple languages . At the point of translation, the platform will create a duplicate version of your website and all its existing pages at that point in time, for every language selected and translate it automatically.
We are unable to provide website multi-lingual capabilities for websites in excess of 200 pages.
If you make a change to an existing website page in one language, AFTER you have implemented the multi-lingual feature, that change will need to be made manually on all other language versions of that page (This includes page design features AND copy changes)
If you create a new website page in one language, AFTER you have implemented the multi-lingual feature, that page will need to go through the automatic translation process for each language that is active on your website.
If you add a new language to your website, AFTER you have implemented the multi-lingual feature, then the platform will take a snapshot of your website in its current state, and duplicate the website and all its existing pages into the new language. All other concepts apply from this point forwards.
Blog posts are not available in multiple languages.
Page SEO and meta descriptions are not included in the translation, and need to be updated manually.
You can also remove just a singe page in the secondary language, and then use the 'Translate another page' option to update a single page. As an example, if you only need to make updates to an "About" page:
Go to the second language in the editor and delete the "About" page
Go back to the default language and make all necessary changes to the "About" page
Go back to the secondary language and from the pages menu, choose "Translate another page", you'll see the "About" page listed there.
Make sure the SEO and page URL match what's on the live site before republishing.

Abandoned Basket Email Set Up - Mailerlite

Fri, 19 Sep 2025 11:02:24 GMT

Mailierlite is an email provider that lets you set up and manage email marketing campaigns and email communication.

Mailerlite is an email service provider that let's you set up and manage email marketing campaigns and other types of communication emails. Learn more here: www.mailerlite.com

It's free to start, and pricing is based on the number of subscribers you have, in addition to the number of emails you send per month.

They have a comprehensive support system with articles and tutorials, to get you up and running in no time at all - which you can access here: www.mailerlite.com/help

Before you start setting up your abandoned basket/cart workflow, you will need to add your Mailerlite account into Travelify so that we can connect up as an e-commerce store (without this step, you won't be able to create e-commerce workflows in Mailerlite).

Connecting Mailerlite to Travelgenix

Log into your Travelgenix "Travelify" dashboard, and visit:

Suppliers Directory > CRM & Marketing > MailerLite

We support both their old "classic" (V1) accounts and their new platform (V2). If you want to use the e-commerce workflows, we now only support this in their new platform (V2), so please ensure that you have migrated your account to their new platform before setting this up.

Then click the button "Add" button.

Then input the details of your Mailerlite account:

Description : For internal reference only. Something like "Mailerlite Integration"
API Key/Token : Go into Integrations > API in your MailerLite account and click the "Generate n ew token" button. You will be asked to give it a name and it will provide you the token to copy and paste into your Travelify settings (they will not show you this again for security, so make sure you copy it before closing their page):

API Version : For e-commerce workflows, this must be V2 (we only support V1/Classic accounts for backwards compatability)
Group ID For Marketing : This is the group/list to add subscribers to when they select that they want to sign up to your marketing/newsletters. It is recommended that you have already set up your marketing groups/lists, but if not you can come back to this later as it is not required for e-commerce workflows. You can get your group ids from the same Integrations > API page as above.
Group ID For Bookings : As above, this is the group/list to add subscribers to when they are being added for implied permissions (i.e. making a booking) and this is required for the e-commerce workflow as the consumer needs to be subscribed to a group to be able to trigger the workflow. You can get your group ids from the same Integrations > API page as above.
Website Domain : So that we can connect your website as an e-commerce store in your Mailerlite account, please enter the domain name (don't enter https:// before it, just the domain name) of your live website. This will show up in your Mailerlite account once you complete the next verification step.

Please save your settings and then go back in to edit them in Travelify. You should now see an orange "Test" button at the bottom of the page. When you click the Test button, it will verify all of the settings you have entered. Please correct any errors it reports to you (if any) before continuing. If your account is all set up correctly, you will see a green success message and can now continue to set up your Abandoned Cart workflow in your Mailerlite account.

How to create an abandoned cart email automation in Mailerlite

Now you have connected your account in Travelify, we should have created your e-commerce store in your Mailerlite account automatically for you, which then unlocks the option to create e-commerce workflows.

To create your abandoned cart workflow automation, you will now need to follow the Mailerlite guide on getting this set up . Please note that depending on whether you have a free or paid Mailerlite account, you may have access to more options in your automation, but please check with Mailerlite for clarification.

Once you have set up your automation and it is enabled, when a customer has entered their contact details on the extras page and continued to the basket, they will be placed into your workflow automation queue, ready for sending your email.

Abandoned Basket Email (Overview)

Fri, 19 Sep 2025 10:39:19 GMT

An abandoned basket email is sent to an individual end user after they start the booking process online but fail to complete the purchase.

What is an abandoned basket email?
Why is an abandoned basket email important?
How can Travelgenix help with abandoned basket emails?
When does the abandoned basket email get sent?
What does the abandoned basket email look like?
What about data privacy and marketing permissions?
How to set up abandoned basket emails?

What is an abandoned basket email?

An abandoned basket email is an email sent to an individual end user, after they start the booking process online, but fail to complete the purchase.

Why is an abandoned basket email important?

When consumers purchase travel products, they generally research products and pricing until they feel confident they have found the right product, at the right price, from a company they trust.

If a consumer starts the booking process, but abandons the purchase process, then it's a very strong signal of buying intent, but there is something stopping them from completing the booking.

By sending an automated email to these individuals, you have an opportunity to "follow up" with them, to engage them and convince them to complete the booking with you.

This helps improve sales conversions and reduce your look-to-book ratio.

How can Travelgenix help with abandoned basket emails?

With Travelgenix, you can connect third party email services to our platform (e.g. Mailerlite ), which can be configured to send abandoned basket emails to individual consumers, at exactly the right moment. This way, Travelgenix automatically notifies your email service provider at the right time, and you have complete control over the abandoned basket email/s you send to the end consumer within the Email service provider configuration options.

When does the abandoned basket email get sent?

The Travelgenix booking flow is made up of four distinct stages:

Search - Input search parameters (E.g. Destination, check in/out date, number of guests etc)
Results - The long list of product results + prices (E.g. Hotels, Flights etc)
Extras - The ability for consumers to add travel extra products AND submit guest/passenger details and email address (This is required to build the order to send to the suppliers to confirm)
Basket - The payment stage and the completion of the booking

When end consumers research travel products online, they generally only ever get as far as the extras page, to see the total price and product overview, without inputting their personal details.

Once they input their personal details into the Extras page, to proceed to the basket page, it is an intent to make a purchase and is the start of the order process.

The Travelgenix platform identifies end consumers that input their personal details into the Extras page, and proceed to the basket page. At this point in the booking process, Travelgenix can send this information about the consumer and the product(s) that they have added to their basket to your email marketing platform to trigger your abandoned basket/cart workflow.

So put simply, end consumers will not get an abandoned basket email before they input their details into the Extras page, and are on the basket/payment page. You control the delay within your email service provider.

What does the abandoned basket email look like?

Whatever you like! As the email is sent from your email marketing provider, you can use their email configuration tools to design an email that matches your brand and includes whatever copy you think will compel the end user to book with you.

We are able to send various pieces of information to your email marketing provider to allow you to display what they added to basket and also a link/url for them to come back to the website to complete a booking for those items - currently, they will be taken back to the search stage, but with the product that they added to basket as the only (where supported), or top, option for them to book. This is due to supplier session timeouts, but there is further development coming where we will be able to recheck availability and pricing straight from the actual basket page.

What about data privacy and marketing permissions?

You should seek professional legal advice to ensure your business complies with any applicable data privacy regulations.

However, it is widely accepted that when an end consumer submits their personal information as part of an online purchase process, there is clear intent and an abandoned basket email constitutes part of the order process and not a marketing message.

However, if you do use a third party email service provider, you may need to include it in your privacy policy as a sub processor.

How to set up abandoned basket emails?

You will need an account with a third party email service provider that is integrated with your Travelgenix account. Currently we support the following email marketing platforms for abandoned basket/cart functionality:

Abandoned basket email set up - Mailerlite
Klaviyo

Variations & Constraints

Fri, 19 Sep 2025 10:00:30 GMT

Most website builders give you complete control, however, some platforms are constrained by their code base.

In the majority of cases, most website builders give you complete control over how and where you add Travelgenix widgets to your website.

However, some website platforms are constrained by their code base or the way their pricing model works.

For example, some website builders do not allow you to add custom code to the body section of your website, which means you can't display a widget across the entire website with a single code snippet. You would need to add the code snippet to every page on your website.

Another example would be where the website builder platform restricts access to adding custom code, depending on what pricing tier you are on. You may need to upgrade the pricing plan you are on with your website builder, in order to add Travelgenix custom code.

If you have any concerns, please refer to the list of third party website builder platforms listed in this section, to see if your platform has any restrictions or constraints. Or feel free to contact us and we can let you know.

Adding a code snippet to a specific page

Fri, 19 Sep 2025 09:55:21 GMT

In most website builders and platforms there is the ability to add custom code to a specific page.

In most website builders and website platforms, there is the ability to add custom code to a specific page, so the widget only appears on that page, and not across th e entire website.

Specifically how you do this varies from platform to platform, but it is usually achieved by adding a Custom HTML module to the desired page.

If you're unsure, please refer to the support documentation for your chosen website platform, and search for " add custom HTML to a page ".

If this doesn't work, please contact the support team for your chosen website platform.

If this doesn't work, please contact the Travelgenix support team, and we will help you with this process.

Once identified, add a custom HTML module to the page, copy the Travelgenix code snippet and paste it into the HTML module on your page.

Then save and publish those changes, in the usual way you would update your website.

At this stage, the code will be successfully added to the page and you should see it on your page.

Adding a code snippet to the body section of your website

Fri, 19 Sep 2025 09:49:13 GMT

In most website builders and website platforms there is the ability to add custom code to the body section.

In most website builders and website platforms, there is the ability to add custom code to the <body> section.

Specifically how you do this varies from platform to platform, but it is usually located within the settings section.

If you're unsure, please refer to the support documentation for your chosen website platform, and search for "add custom code to the body section".

If this doesn't work, please contact the support team for your chosen website platform.

If this doesn't work, please contact the Travelgenix support team, and we will help you with this process.

Once you've located the correct place, simply copy the relevant Travelgenix code snippet, and paste it in before the closing body tag: </body>

Then save and publish those changes, in the usual way you would update your website.

At this stage, the code will be successfully added to the <body> section.

Generally speaking, when you add the Travelgenix code to the body section, it will mean the widget will appear across the website, or as configured within the widget settings.

Adding a code snippet to the head section of your website

Fri, 19 Sep 2025 09:42:54 GMT

In most website builders and platforms there is the ability to add custom code to the head section

In most website builders and website platforms, there is the ability to add custom code to the <head> section.

Specifically how you do this varies from platfo rm to platform, but it is usually located within the settings section.

If you're unsure, please refer to the support documentation for your chosen website platform, and search for " add custom code to the head section ".

If this doesn't work, please contact the support team for your chosen website platform.

If this doesn't work, please contact the Travelgenix support team, and we will help you with this process.

Once you've located the correct place, simply copy the relevant Travelgenix code snippet, and paste it into the desired location.

You will then need to save and publish those changes, in the usual way you would update your website.

At this stage, the code will be successfully added to the <head> section.

Intro - Integrating Travelgenix widgets into your website

Fri, 12 Sep 2025 10:34:14 GMT

Travelgenix gives you an easy way to create, customise and configure widgets for your website.

Travelgenix gives you an easy way to create, customize and configure widgets for your website.

When you're ready, you can "drop" those widgets into your current website, and they will become a seamless part of the journey for your website visitors.

You can achieve this in a few simple steps:

Add a Travelgenix code snippet to the Head section of your website.
Add a Travelgenix code snippet to the Body section of your website.
Add a Travelgenix code snippet to a Specific Page on your website.

The precise way to do this will depend on how your current website is built and where it's hosted.

E.g. The way to achieve this on a Wordpress website is slightly different to the way you'd do it on a Squarespace website.

But don't worry, we've got instructions for the 40+ most popular website builders in this knowledge base , and also some generic instructions in case your platform isn't currently listed.

The key concepts to understand are:

Adding a Travelgenix code snippet to the Head section of your website allows your website to connect with Travelgenix and make the functionality work as configured.
Adding a Travelgenix code snippet to the Body section of your website allows a widget to display and work across your entire website (or as configured)
Adding a Travelgenix code snippet to a specific page on your website, allows a single widget to display on a single page

Widget Translations

Fri, 12 Sep 2025 10:20:27 GMT

This article refers specifically to translating Travelify widgets.

For Travelgenix solutions, there are three main considerations when it comes to displaying content in different languages:

The translation of the website
The translation of the widgets
The translation of the products provided by the supplier

This article refers specifically to translating Travelify widgets.

To get started, visit:

Travelify > Translations

Here you will see a language dictionary database, that gives you complete control over widget translations. To edit a translation, search for the word/phrase you want to change and click on the edit/pencil icon:

You will then be able to input a new translation for this word/phrase for all alternative languages you have enabled within Travelify. (To add more languages to Travelify, visit Applications > Edit Application > Regional Settings > Languages ). Click Save when done.

You will need to do a hard refresh of your website in the browser, to see the changes apply to the widget.

Configure Company & Application Settings

Fri, 12 Sep 2025 10:02:26 GMT

These are the settings you need to configure before you start selling travel products online.

Before you start selling travel products online, there are two types of settings within Travelify that you should check and configure:

Company Settings
Application Settings

Configure Company Settings

Travelify > Settings

Here you can configure settings at a company level, such as:

Company logo
Company type
Address
2FA (Two Factor Authentication for users)

Click the Save button for the changes to apply.

Configure Application Settings

Travelify > Applications > Edit Application

Here you can configure settings at an Application level, such as:

General
Application name
App region
Web platform
Subscription
Location
Address
Booking
Booking email name
Booking email
Booking telephone name
Booking telephone number
Support
Support email name
Support email
Support telephone name
Support telephone number
Regional Settings
Currencies
Languages
Nationalities
Generic Settings
Email Confirmation Settings - use this section to style and set up your order email confirmations. You can see an example of the email confirmation layout below, along with which settings affect which part of the email.
Sending email address - this is the email address your order confirmations will be sent from. Important : you will need to let us know which email address you want to send from as we will need to whitelist this in the platform before you can send confirmations.
Send copy of confirmation to email address - this is optional and allows you to copy in any email address to receive a copy of the order confirmation emails tha are sent to customers.
Order confirmation email subject line - this is the subject line of the order confirmation email. You can use the tag {{ORDER-REF}} if you would like to embed the order reference into the subject.
Email header background colour
Email header text colour
Email header link colour
Email header text content
Email header link URL
Email body background colour
Email body txt colour
Email body link colour
Email body opening text
Email body closing text
Email footer background colour
Email footer text colour
Email footer link colour
Email footer text content
Footer links
Click Add to generate a new link within the footer
Generic Settings
Website URL - this is the URL of your website homepage
Website results page URL - this is the URL of your website travel results page
Website availability page URL - this is the URL of your website travel availability extras page
Website basket page URL - this is the URL of your website travel basket payment page
RSS Travel Offers
RSS Travel offers template 1
Learn more here
RSS Travel offers template 2
Learn more here
Travel searches
Timeout - Search (seconds) - the maximum timeout for searches to your suppliers
API Keys
Public API Key - this is used by your widgets to connect to your account. Normally you don't need this information unless you are building your own widgets as part of our developer program.
Private API Key - this is only available to customers who are subscribed to our private API access and you will need this for authentication with the API.

Email Confirmation Example

Create Users

Mon, 08 Sep 2025 11:35:25 GMT

Steps to Create User accounts for your team.

If you have a team that helps you run your online travel business, then you will need to give them access to Travelify.

What these team members have access to, is controlled using Roles . But if you want to create user accounts for your team, then you should follow the steps below:

Travelify > Users > Add

Here you can input details for this user, such as:

Profile Picture
Email Address
First Name
Last Name
Role Title
Role ( Managed here )
DOB
Country
Spoken Languages
Phone Number
Title

Click Save when done.

An automated email will be sent to the user, giving them a link to complete their account creation process with their chosen password.

A list of all users will appear within the user dashboard, which you can edit, update or delete as you see fit.

Create Staff Roles

Mon, 08 Sep 2025 11:28:47 GMT

Creating custom role types.

If you have a team that help you run your travel business, you may want to give them restricted acess to Travelify, so they only access the tools they actually need to do their job.

This might mean giving your web team access to just the widgets, so they can manage the website functionality, without accessing any customer or booking data.

Likewise, your support team might need access to order information, but you don't want them to access your pricing rules or supplier information.

All of this is completely customisable, by creating custom role types, that you can allocate to your team members.

To get started, visit :

Travelify > Roles > Add

You will then be presented with the option to create a new role type, and restrict access to specific Travelify features, on the following basis:

Read
Edit
Add
Cancel

Once you have created this custom role, ensure it has a name, description and then click Save . The role will now be saved in the roles dashboard, which you can allocate to specific users.

Pricing Rules

Mon, 08 Sep 2025 11:11:32 GMT

The pricing rules engine gives you a simple and flexible way to create profit rules for the products you sell on your website.

Introduction
How do Travelgenix rules work?
Create a new rule
Edit a rule
Enable/disable a rule
Delete a rule
How to check if a rule is applied correctly?

Introduction

The pricing rules engine gives you a simple and flexible way to create profit rules for the products you sell on your website.

Whether that's:

Creating a standard mark-up on all products across your website
Creating a special offer on popular products
Changing the profit levels dependant on the booking & travel "windows"
Changing the pricing based on what day of the week it is

How do Travelgenix rules work?

Your Travelgenix solution requires an integration with third party suppliers, who will generate the travel products that are sold on your website (E.g. Flights, hotel rooms, attractions etc)

These suppliers will automatically deliver a price for these products. You will need to create a rule that adds $X or X% to that price, in order to make a profit on that sale.

E.g.

The supplier provides a hotel room for $100 per night, which equals $700 for a 7 night stay.

If no rules are created, the end user will see that hotel for $700 for a 7 night stay on your website.

If you create a 10% rule, the end user will see that hotel for $770 for a 7 night stay on your website ($700+10% = $770). The additional $70 being your profit.

Create a new rule

Travelify > Pricing Rules > Add

2. You will then be presented with the rule set up page, which lets you configure the logic for this rule (E.g. When to activate, how much mark-up, what travel dates, what days of the week etc). Some options will reveal additional settings to configure as they are selected.

Pricing Rule Name - A unique name to identify this specific rule. This is for internal use only and does not display to the end user.
Priority - An important piece of logic that dictates the priority of a rule applying to a price. 1 is the highest priority and 100 is the lowest priority. If you have two rules applying to a supplier price, the higher priority will apply to the supplier price first, and the lower priority rule will apply to the supplier price + the higher priority rule.
Here's an equation that demonstrates the priority logic:
(((Supplier price) + Priority 1 Rule ) + Priority 2 Rule)=Display price to the end user
Example: (((Supplier price $100) + Priority 1 Rule 10% Increase ) + Priority 2 Rule $10 increase) = $120 display price (((100)+10%)+10)
If two or more rules of the same priority apply to a supplier price, the one created earlier will apply first, and the one(s) created later will apply second.
Example: (((Supplier price $100) + Priority 1 Rule 10% Increase ) + Priority 1 Rule $5 increase) = $115 display price (((100)+10%)+5)
Enable Rule - This toggles the rule on or off. When a rule is toggled off, it will appear below enabled rules in the main rules dashboard.
Modifier Type - This lets you configure the type of mark-up to the supplier price:
Fixed - Modify the supplier price by a fixed value (Calculated in the default currency of your Travelgenix solution) E.g. Add $10 to all products
Percentage - Modify the supplier price by a percentage E.g. Add 10% to all products
Modifier Value - The value of the price modifier and whether to increase or decrease a supplier price
Modifier Applies To - Configure if the rule applies to the whole booking, or to each passenger in the booking. Important : The rule is calculated differently for different modifiers:
Booking - The rule is applied to the total value of the product.
Passenger - TBC
Days before travel - Apply this rule if the the booking is X days away from the date of travel. Useful for adding a "last minute" premium or discount. (Note: If you select "10" then the logic will only apply if the booking is made exactly 10 days in advance. It will not be "10 days or less". To achieve 10 days or less, you would need to select 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.)
Passenger Allocation - Apply this rule to specific passenger combinations (Useful for two adults, two children combinations). Leaving this option blank will apply to any passenger combination.
Booking Dates - Configure when this rule will apply, based on when the customer makes the booking. Often known as the "Booking window". Configure it to apply to specific days of the week too.
Tip: Select a date far into the future to let this apply for the long term
Travel Dates - Configure when this rule will apply, based on when the customer will travel. Often known as the "Travel window". Configure it to apply to specific days of the week too.
Tip: Select a date far into the future to let this apply for the long term
Product Types - By default, the rule will be applied to all products. This section allows you to create a more granular rule, that only applies to certain types of products. Some product types will reveal additional configuration options
Packages
Visas
Tours
Insurance
Itinerary
Accommodation
Suppliers - Select which suppliers this rule should apply to
Supplier codes - Select which supplier codes this rule should apply to (Typically if you have more than one rate from a single supplier)
Property types - Select which property types this rule should apply to
Country - Select which country this rule should apply to
Ratings - Select which property ratings this rule should apply to
Names - Configure if this rule should apply, based on the name of the property
Chains - Configure if this rule should apply, based on the name of the property chain
Locations - Configure if this rule should apply, based on the name of the destination location
Transfers
Suppliers - Select which suppliers this rule should apply to
Transfer types - Select which type of transfer this rule should apply to
Transfer durations - Select how this rule should apply, based on the duration (in minutes) of the transfer
Country - Select which country this rule should apply to
Locations - Configure if this rule should apply, based on the name of the destination location
Transfer Companies - Configure if this rule should apply, based on the name of the transfer company
Car Rental
Suppliers - Select which suppliers this rule should apply to
Rental Operators - Select which rental operators this rule should apply to
Transmissions - Select if this rule should apply, based on the transmission of the vehicle (Manual, automatic etc)
Class Codes - Select if this rules should apply based on the class code
SIPP Codes - Select if this rules should apply based on the SIPP code
Rental Duration - Select if this rule should apply based on the duration of the vehicle hire
Location Match Types - Select if this rule should apply based on the location match type (E.g. On/Off airport, any location)
Country - Select which country this rule should apply to
Locations - Configure if this rule should apply, based on the name of the destination location
Package Names - Configure if this rule should apply, based on the name of the car rental package
Flights
Suppliers - Select which suppliers this rule should apply to
Airline Carrier Codes - Select which airlines this rule should apply to
Cabin Class - Select if this rule should apply based on cabin class
Fare Types - Select if this rule should apply based on fare type
Flight Route - Apply the rule based on where the origin and destination airports are
Fare Bases - Configure if this rule should apply, based on the name of the fare base
Ticket Attractions
Suppliers - Select which suppliers this rule should apply to
Ticket Types - Select which types of attraction tickets this rule should apply to (E.g. Theatre, Exhibition, Sport etc)
Country - Select which country this rule should apply to
Locations - Configure if this rule should apply, based on the name of the destination location
Airport Extras
Suppliers - Select which suppliers this rule should apply to
Airport Extra Types - Select which extras this profit rule should apply to
Airports - Select which airports this rule should apply to
Search Types - Rules can apply, based on how the end-user discovers a product/s. (E.g. Create rules for flights/airlines that are only available as part of a dynamic package combination). Selecting the search type, will mean this rule will only apply if the end-user discovers a product/s as a result of that specific search type.

Once you have configured the rule, click "Save" and the rule will be saved to your rules dashboard.

If you enabled "Product Types" a pop up may appear, prompting you to configure the additional product settings. If you don't want to, the rule will apply to everything within that product type and your changes will be saved.

Good to know:

It may take 2-3 minutes for the rule to apply to the products on your website. Please wait a few minutes and then do a hard refresh in your browser to ensure the rule has been applied correctly.

Edit a rule

Visit Pricing Rules > Identify the rule you wish to edit > Click the pencil icon > Edit the rule > Save

Enable/Disable a rule

Visit Pricing Rules > Identify the rule you wish to edit > Click the pencil icon > Enable Rule on or off > Save

Delete a rule

Visit Pricing Rules > Identify the rule you wish to delete > Click the trash can icon > A pop up will appear, click the "Delete" button > The rule has now been deleted

How to check if a rule is applied correctly?

Coming soon...

Setting Up Your Suppliers

Mon, 08 Sep 2025 10:43:54 GMT

In order to sell travel products on your website you will need to connect Travelify to your existing suppliers.

In order to sell travel products on your website (like flights, hotels, hire cars etc) you will need to connect Travelify to your existing suppliers.

Before you start, you will need your supplier credentials, which you may need to speak to the specific supplier to obtain.

This is a straight forward process, which you can start by visiting:

Travelify > Suppliers Directory > Search for the supplier you want to add > Click the supplier

The supplier page will be displayed. In time this will display supplier specific data, such as search times and error rates etc. When you're ready to add your credentials, click on the button that says Add .

A pop up will appear, alerting you if there are any fees associated with this supplier. Click Continue to proceed.

You will then need to input your credentials and any additional supplier specific details. This varies from supplier to supplier. Once completed, click the Save button.

You will then be returned to the supplier page, with the details of the supplier account you just added. Your Travelgenix solution is now connected to this supplier. Repeat this process for as many suppliers as you need to connect.

Turning on DeDuping

Mon, 08 Sep 2025 10:26:00 GMT

Setting up deduping in Travelify.

As you are probably aware, there are two types of suppliers in Travelify.

1. Premium Suppliers

2. Supply from aggregators like intuitive.

The accommodation suppliers from intuitive are pre-deduped before arriving on your site using a tool called GIATA.

We have now added de-duping to both our Premium Suppliers and to the results from intuitive.

The purpose of the extra level of deduping is to ensure that all Premium Suppliers are deduped against each other, and the results returned from intuitive.

To turn on the additional deduping:

1. Login into your travelify account

2. Go to applications

3. Choose the application you wish to amend (you may only have one)

4. Select General Settings

5. Scroll down until you see result deduping where you will see three options

1. Dedupe B2C results

2. Dedupe results for a user logged in as a B2B customer
3. Dedupe results for a user logged in as an internal agent

5. For each of those, you can choose to turn on or off deduping.

1. Do not dedupe results

2. Dedupe results

6. Don't forget to save before exiting

Changing the filtering on the results page

Mon, 08 Sep 2025 10:07:35 GMT

This will show you how you can control what is shown and in what order on the results filtering page.

There are a lot of settings already in each widget, but one of the most requested changes has been allowing the ability to control what is shown and in what order on the results page filtering.

1. Log in to Travelify

2. Go to my widgets

3. Select the travel results widget

4. Click on the pencil to edit the widget

5. Choose the search type you would like to apply the changes to (in this case, I have chosen Dynamic Packaging - (to change the default set up, you will need to follow the steps below for each search type)

6. Scroll down and select 'Dynamic Packaging' Layout Settings - (to change the default set up, you will need to follow the steps below for each search type)

7. Scroll to the bottom of the pop-up and click add filter

8. Select the filter you want to add and click save.

9. Keep selecting the filters you want to display in the same way until you have all the filters you want to display.

10. To change the order of the filters, grab the two bars on the left-hand side, and drag the filter to the position you want the filter category to display.

11 . Repeat this for all the search types you wish to change.

12. Don't forget to click save

Tracking(Affiliates, Marketing Sources, Adverts)

Mon, 08 Sep 2025 09:39:04 GMT

The Travelgenix platform supports adding tracking to your links.

The Travelgenix platform supports adding tracking to your links so that you can attribute your travel searches and bookings to a particular source (for example an affiliate, marketing source or advert).

Important : this technology relies on having the Elements script added to your website header as part of the widget installation process. This normally only needs to be added once to your website header and will load the tracking and widgets on every page for you.

In this example, we are assuming that you want to add both an affiliate (aff) and a marketing source (src) tracker into an link to your homepage to track against your orders (the possibilities are endless and you can use one or more trackers in any link to any page on your website).

If your homepage is located at https://traveldemo.agendas.group/ then you can add these tracking parameters to the URL as described below:

https://traveldemo.agendas.group/? tgtrk/aff=aff123&tgtrk/src=banner

1. All tracking parameters must start with tgtrk / followed by the parameter name you want to add to your order. In the example above, the parameter name for the affiliate will be called aff and the parameter name for the marketing source will be called src . These can be anything you want, but should only contain letters and numbers (no spaces or special characters) and should be kept under 25 characters in length.

2. After the = character, you can then add the value you want to track for that parameter name. In the example above, the affiliate value will be tracked as aff123 and the marketing source value will be tracked as banner

3. All tracking parameters will be stored for up to 7 days (this is not currently configurable), so the customer may leave the website or move around to other pages before making a booking and the tracking will still be attributed to any orders the customer makes within that period of time

4. Below is an example of the Marketing Sources summary within the Order Manager with the above tracking applied.

Deep Linking Instructions

Mon, 08 Sep 2025 09:28:26 GMT

The deep linking instructions allow you to link your customers straight into predefined live searches.

The deep linking instructions allow you to link your customers straight into predefined live searches for various search types.

IMPORTANT: You should not share or advertise links to your search results pages directly as they contain a unique search session that is for a single user/customer only. After roughly 20 minutes, the search session will expire and not be bookable, despite still displaying the results on screen.

We have a deeplink generator page to make it easier to build deeplinks for your website. Just perform a search on your website and paste the results page URL into the generator, it will convert your search into a deeplink that you can share with your customers.

Zero-deposit system (pay zero now)

Mon, 08 Sep 2025 09:20:50 GMT

Here is a brief summary of the zero-deposit system on accommodation.

IMPORTANT: This system is currently only supported by the Stripe, AIBMS and Opayo payment providers at this time. We will add other payment provider support as required and as supported by the provider.

Here is a brief summary of the new zero-deposit system on accommodation (and ITX/ITR flight fares with a ticketing deadline provided) and the settings we will need from you to activate it.

If the rate from the supplier is fully-refundable, we will allow payment of £0 (or equivalent currency) now and the full amount will be automatically taken from the customer lodged card X number of days prior to the cancellation deadline.

On the payment page, we pre-authorise £1 (and immediately cancel the pre-authorisation) on the customer's card and Stripe stores/tokenises the card on their system and we store the card token against the booking for taking the full amount at a later date.

If the rate from the supplier is partially-refundable, we will allow payment of only the non-refundable amount now and the remaining amount will be automatically taken from the customer lodged card X number of days prior to the cancellation deadline.

On the payment page, we take the payment for only the non-refundable amount on the customer's card and Stripe stores/tokenises the card on their system and we store the card token against the booking for taking the remainder at a later date.

If the payment succeeds, then you have the full payment for the property and the customer is informed that the payment was successfully taken and their booking is confirmed.

If the payment fails, we can retry up to X times (once per day), each time it sends the customer an email telling them that the payment has failed and their booking is at risk.

If the payment fails X times, we automatically cancel the booking and inform the customer.

In order to get this set up, we will require the following settings:

Days Before Payment/Ticketing Deadline - this is how many days before the cancellation policy you want to take the money (must be at least 1)

Number of Payment/Ticketing Retries - this is how many retries you want to attempt before cancellation (there is 1 retry per-day) so this value must be less than the above setting (can also be 0 if you don't want retries, but this would be considered bad usability as we believe you should warn the customer to make sure they have the required funds on their card for the following day)

Payment/Ticketing Cancel Policy - this is what happens when payment fails & our default setting for this is to automatically cancel with the supplier, although we do allow for it to notify you only without cancelling, but this means more work for you.

The system will send the following emails depending on the status of the automatic payment and so you will need to provide the content for each:

Payment Successful : Subject and email content

Payment Failed (first & retry attempts) : Subject and email content

Final Payment Failed (normally when the booking is cancelled) : Subject and email content

In all the emails above, you can use the following mail-merge tags if you want to embed any of the following dynamic content:

{{ORDER-REF}} - the order reference (eg. 123)

{{AMOUNT}} - amount taken/attempted to be taken (eg. 123.99 GBP)

{{ATTEMPT}} - the current attempt number (eg. 1)

{{MAXATTEMPTS}} - the number of attempts it will make (eg. 5)

Creating B2B Companies, Adding Users and Applying Rules

Fri, 05 Sep 2025 11:45:56 GMT

Once you have created your pricing rules you are now ready to set up your B2B companies

Once you have created your pricing rules (see link below) you are now ready to set up your B2B companies / Tiers.

I will be using the phrase company, but you can also use this to create pricing tiers (only if you are not giving credit to any of your B2B clients/companies).

https://support.travelgenix.io/hc/en-gb/articles/4403196885905-Pricing-Rules

1. Go to the CRM from the left-hand menu on Travelify.

2. Once in the CRM you will see two options

3. Select

4. Complete the company information and then press save.

5. You will now see 5 options

View the company
Edit the company
Add a member to the company
Credit Limits
Delete

6. The first thing you want to do is add a user/member to the company (option3) - When clicking on it you will all of the users you have already added to that company

To add a new company member you need to ensure they have been added to the CRM first, this could either be the user signing up on the front of your site or by adding them manually in Travelify via the CRM link.

7. Once the person is in the CRM you can select them from the dropdown

8. Select the person from the drop down and press the Add User button

You can of course come back and repeat the stap to add as many users to a company as you need, at any time.

9. Next you want to apply rules to the company. Go to the rules section, found on the left menu

10. You will now see all the rules you have previously created

11. Either select one of the rules or use the ADD button to create a new rule

12. In the rule you will see a B2B Company section

13. Select the company you would like to add to this rule.

This can be applied to all companies
Or it can be applied to just the selected companies

14. You can add a single company to as many rules as you need.

Webhooks

Fri, 05 Sep 2025 11:13:35 GMT

Travelgenix provides a webhook connection that allows you to receive HTTP push notifications.

Travelgenix provides a webhook connection that allows you to receive HTTP push notifications whenever data is created or updated. This allows you to build integrations on top of Travelgenix events.

Webhook Setup

To create a new Webhook, navigate to the Suppliers Directory and set up your Webhook connection (under the CRM, Marketing & Backoffice tab) by clicking Add. All you need to provide is the Endpoint URL of your webhook server - make sure you toggle the "Specify Custom endpoint" on and select which events you want to receive.

For extra security, you can also set a Security Key (optional) which allows us to sign the webhook request to your server so that you can validate that the request came from us - see more details on security signing below if you want to use this option.

How does a webhook work?

A Webhook push is simply a HTTP POST request, sent to the URL of your choosing. The push is automatically triggered by Travelgenix in real-time when events happen in our platform.

Please note that the webhook data only includes a summary of the event, it does not contain all the data (e.g. customer or order data) in order to keep the payload small and fast. Please see "Getting More Data" below if you need the full set of event data.

Your webhook endpoint should respond within 5 seconds with a success (200) HTTP status or we will mark the request as failed. Any long-running process you may need to run on your application having received the webhook should be performed in a background/asynchronous process and respond to us as soon as possible.

Webhook Payload

The webhook HTTP payload will include information both in its HTTP headers and its request body.

HTTP headers:

Content-Type: application/json; charset=utf-8

User-Agent: Travelgenix-Webhook

The payload body has the following structure:

Webhook Events

Customer Create

This action is fired when the customer creates an account on the website.

{
"eventtype" : "customer.create",
"appid" : 100,
"appidentifier" : "demoapp",
"data" : {
"id" : 1,
"key" : "F461B152-B2EB-40AF-81B2-E8BEFDE80A43",
"title" : "Mr",
"firstname" : "Demo",
"surname" : "Customer",
"email" : "demo@travelgenix.io",
"created" : "2023-01-26T11:33:10Z"
},
"url" : "/admin/customers/1/F461B152-B2EB-40AF-81B2-E8BEFDE80A43",
"timestamp" : "2023-01-26T12:00:00Z"
}

Customer Update

This action is fired when the customer updates their account information on the website, or if a B2B customer is linked to a company within the administration portal.

{
"eventtype" : "customer.update",
"appid" : 100,
"appidentifier" : "demoapp",
"data" : {
"id" : 1,
"key" : "F461B152-B2EB-40AF-81B2-E8BEFDE80A43",
"title" : "Mr",
"firstname" : "Demo",
"surname" : "Customer",
"email" : "demo@travelgenix.io",
"companyid" : 1,
"companyname" : "Acme Travel Company",
"roles" : ["b2b"],
"created" : "2023-01-26T11:33:10Z"
},
"url" : "/admin/customers/1/F461B152-B2EB-40AF-81B2-E8BEFDE80A43",
"timestamp" : "2023-01-26T12:00:00Z"
}

Customer fields

Basket Create

This event is fired when a customer creates a basket on the website (adds one or more items to their basket).

{
"eventtype" : "basket.create",
"appid" : 100,
"appidentifier" : "demoapp",
"data" : {
"id" : 1,
"key" : "F461B152-B2EB-40AF-81B2-E8BEFDE80A43",
"status" : "Basket",
"language" : "en",
"currency" : "GBP",
"amount" : 1125.98,
"itemscount" : 2,
"customertitle": "Mr",
"customerfirstname" : "Demo",
"customersurname" : "Customer",
"customeremail" : "demo@travelgenix.io",
"created" : "2023-01-26T11:33:10Z"
},
"url" : "/admin/orders/1/F461B152-B2EB-40AF-81B2-E8BEFDE80A43",
"timestamp" : "2023-01-26T12:00:00Z"
}

Order Complete

This event is fired when an order is completed (paid and confirmed). This event is normally used by systems wanting to be notified of new completed orders to process.

{
"eventtype" : "order.complete",
"appid" : 100,
"appidentifier" : "demoapp",
"data" : {
"id" : 1,
"key" : "F461B152-B2EB-40AF-81B2-E8BEFDE80A43",
"status" : "Confirmed",
"language" : "en",
"currency" : "GBP",
"amount" : 1125.98,
"itemscount": 2,
"customertitle" : "Mr",
"customerfirstname" : "Demo",
"customersurname" : "Customer",
"customeremail" : "demo@travelgenix.io",
"created" : "2023-01-26T11:33:10Z"
},
"url" : "/admin/orders/1/F461B152-B2EB-40AF-81B2-E8BEFDE80A43",
"timestamp" : "2023-01-26T12:00:00Z"
}

Order Update

This event is fired when an order is updated (currently not implemented, documented for future use).

{
"eventtype" : "order.update",
"appid" : 100,
"appidentifier" : "demoapp",
"data" : {
"id" : 1,
"key" : "F461B152-B2EB-40AF-81B2-E8BEFDE80A43",
"status" : "Confirmed",
"language": "en",
"currency" : "GBP",
"amount" : 1125.98,
"itemscount" : 2,
"customertitle" : "Mr",
"customerfirstname" : "Demo",
"customersurname" : "Customer",
"customeremail" : "demo@travelgenix.io",
"created" : "2023-01-26T11:33:10Z"
},
"url": "/admin/orders/1/F461B152-B2EB-40AF-81B2-E8BEFDE80A43",
"timestamp" : "2023-01-26T12:00:00Z"
}

Order Cancel

This event is fired when an order is cancelled or partially cancelled (when not all items are cancelled).

{
"eventtype": "order.cancel",
"appid" : 100,
"appidentifier" : "demoapp",
"data" : {
"id" : 1,
"key" : "F461B152-B2EB-40AF-81B2-E8BEFDE80A43",
"status" : "Cancelled",
"language" : "en",
"currency" : "GBP",
"amount" : 1125.98,
"itemscount" : 2,
"customertitle" : "Mr",
"customerfirstname" : "Demo",
"customersurname" : "Customer",
"customeremail" : "demo@travelgenix.io",
"created" : "2023-01-26T11:33:10Z"
},
"url" : "/admin/orders/1/F461B152-B2EB-40AF-81B2-E8BEFDE80A43",
"timestamp" : "2023-01-26T12:00:00Z"
}

Order fields

Getting More Data

The webhook data only returns a basic summary of the information in the event (customer or order). In order to get more information about the data in the event, we also provide a url field. This allows you to query our full API to get all the data we hold about the item.

Webhook Security (Security Key)

To improve security of your webhook calls, you can set an optional security key. If you set this, we will sign the request using HMAC SHA256 and send an additional signature HTTP header.

Travelgenix-Signature: cUj1PK+TEFI/LelZI/dLvfp7I7YkQSuNzOcMDZaFleA=

To verify the signature, take the raw JSON request data we send you and encode is it using your Security Key. You can then compare it with the signature header that we send you which will validate that it originates from the Travelgenix platform.

Useful Tools & Resources

Fri, 05 Sep 2025 09:56:16 GMT

We believe in using tools and platforms already on the market that help you achieve what you need without spending a fortune.

We believe in using tools and platforms already on the market that help you achieve what you need to do without spending a fortune. Check out some of our recommended third-party resources and tools that are either free or cheap to use that can help you achieve great things.

Image Resources, Galleries & Graphics Editing

A great travel website needs great imagery to draw in customers and keep them interested. Here are a few resources to source your images from. Important: please DO NOT just take images from search engine results as are most are copyrighted and could land you in trouble if you use them without permission!

Unsplash - image/photo library, including free to use options
Pexels - image/photo library, including free to use options
Canva - design striking graphics easily online

Customer Live Chat Software

Having a live chat feature on your website allows customers to contact you if they have queries or need help in finding suitable travel arrangements.

Email Marketing

Keep in touch with your customers via email marketing. The Travelify platform automatically links to the majority of the large email marketing platforms, so you just have to write the content and send.

Analytics & Tracking

It is important to know what is going on with your website, so being able to know how many visitors you are receiving and where they may be leaving your website is imperative.

Google Analytics - see guides to add page view tracking & add conversion tracking
Hotjar - understand how users behave on your website (trial plan available)

Advertising & Marketing

Driving traffic to your website is necessary to get bookings. Here are some suggested advertising platforms which you may be interested in - be sure to target your advertising with a niche area, generic advertising in travel is a waste of money as you will just be competing again the large global travel companies.

How and why to submit your site to search engines (Semrush blog article)
Travel Marketing Systems - simple marketing software to grow your travel business
Google Adwords
Facebook Marketing

Temporary Jobs, Freelancers & Agencies

Rather than pay a permanent member of staff, it is often cheaper and more efficient to utilise freelancers, agencies and temporary staff for smaller or specific jobs.

Fiverr - find freelancers/agencies for all types of jobs
Upwork

Setting up a Google Maps Account

Fri, 05 Sep 2025 09:34:36 GMT

We provide a Google Maps account as part of our platform for the booking flow widgets.

We provide a Google Maps account as part of our platform for the booking flow widgets, however if you choose that you want to embed custom maps into your website (e.g. destination landing pages) then you will need to sign up for your own API key.

At the time of writing this article, Google provide 28,500 map loads per month free of charge ( click here for more information on pricing ), but they require you to have a billing method linked to your account incase you go over that free limit.

To set up your own Google Maps account, please follow the instructions provided on the Google Developer portal (link below).

Instructions for setting up a Google Maps account - make sure you follow all the steps in the guide
Once you have everything set up, you will need to get your API key to pass to us - either click the "Use API Keys" button at the bottom of the above link, or click here to open the page directly

If you are unsure about any stage of the setup, Google normally has good links to support articles as part of the setup process, alternatively open a support ticket with us and we will help you along the way.

Member Pricing - Promote Your Member Benefits

Mon, 01 Sep 2025 11:47:10 GMT

For non-registered customers we now display a member/discounted price alongside your standard pricing to encourage customers to sign up.

For non-registered customers, we can now display a member/discounted price alongside your standard pricing to encourage your customers to sign up for a membership account with you. This is a great tool to help improve sign ups and capture of your customers!

We recommend setting up your member pricing rules first, before continuing as it is easier to clone your pricing rules for member pricing rather than setting up new pricing rules from scratch.

It is important to note that when a customer is not signed in to your website, the platform has no knowledge of a membership level or what membership level a customer could be signing up to, so if your website is set up where different membership levels have different discounts, then we recommend only setting up the basic level of member pricing (the lowest discount level you have) as we can only show a single member price on each product.

Read more about setting up pricing rules and also about membership levels .

Example Display For Non-Logged In Customer:

Pricing Rules Setup

As above, we recommend setting up the pricing rules for your members first as this is what we will clone for use when your members are not logged in and show as the member price alongside the standard non-member price.

IMPORTANT: We will always process your standard pricing rules first (eg. to mark up your products from the supplier as it does now), before then applying the Member Pricing rules - this is because your Member Pricing rules will normally be a discount off this price.

1. Select which of your pricing rules (that normally only apply to a membership level when customers are logged in) you are going to clone and click the Clone button (highlighted below).

2. Go in and edit the cloned (new) rule - you may want to change the name to (Not Logged In) for reference and then make sure you tick/enable the "Member Pricing" option. If there are any B2B Companies set for your membership levels, then please delete these in this rule

In our example, we are adding 20% as our standard markup and then we have a -10% pricing rule only for customers who are a member of our membership level (B2B company). We have cloned the -10% rule and set it to be a Member Pricing rule and removed the membership level from the B2B companies section.

Widget Setup - Travel Results and Travel Availability Extras

Next, you need to enable some setting in your results and availability extras widgets to display the text and styling of your choice for the member price - both widgets have the same settings. The widgets automatically detect if member pricing is returned in the results, so there is no setting to turn this on/off, you just need to customise your text and styling - to turn this off, just disable your Member Price rules.

In the " Styling " tab, click on " Member Price Styles " and set up the styling to match your brand.

Member Price Label : this is the text that appears before the member price ("Exclusive Member Price" in the example below).

Register Label : this is the text that appears around the register link below the pricing ("Join now" in the example below).

Register Redirect URL : if you use a member account header widget and have the registration form enabled in there, please leave this field blank as this will trigger the popup to open on click. If you have a registration page (if you have membership levels), then enter the URL of your registration page.

Login Label : this is the text that appears around the login link below the pricing ("or Login" in the example below).

Login Redirect URL : if you use a member account header widget and have the sign-in form enabled in there, please leave this field blank as this will trigger the popup to open on click. If you have a sign-in page, then enter the URL of your sign-in page.

Benefits Text Label : this is the text that appears after the login link below the pricing ("to get member pricing" in the example below).

Membership Levels Setup

Mon, 01 Sep 2025 11:47:08 GMT

We now support you offering membership levels (free and paid) on the platform.

We now support you offering membership levels (free and paid) on the platform. If you have memberships added on your account, the you will be able to set up your membership levels for the registration widget, link it to your Stripe account (currently this is the only payment provider we support for paid memberships due to the recurring billing support) and, optionally, set up different pricing for customers on the different membership levels by using our B2B system.

Optional: Set up B2B companies for each membership level

You only need to do this if you want to offer different pricing rules for the different membership levels. If the membership levels do not affect your pricing, then you can skip this section.

Each membership level has the option to link it to a B2B company so that you can provide different pricing to your customers based on their selected membership level.

Set up a B2B company, exactly as you would for a normal B2B company , but it is advised to set the company name as the membership level so that it is easily identifiable in the step below. You can skip most of the settings as you are not linking users to it (this is done automatically by the membership system), nor do you need to set up credit limits.

Once you have set up your B2B company, you can create rules (see section 9 onwards in the above guide) that are applied only to the relevant B2B company, or in this case, membership levels that the customer is logged in to.

Setting up Membership Levels

In Travelify, go into More Tools > Membership Levels (this option will need enabling for you) and this is where you set up pricing for each of your membership levels and is used by the "Member Registration Form" widget to pick up the options to display to your customers.

Before setting up this section, if you are taking payment for your membership levels, you will need to ensure you set them up in your Stripe account first as you will need the Price ID for each of the product/price options. Please ensure you set up your product (Membership Level) and then one or more price options within a product which relates to the billing amount & period (monthly/annually).

You will also need to ensure that your Stripe account is correctly set up in your suppliers in Travelify. You will need to ensure that you set up a webhook in your Stripe account (contact us for assistance) so that we are notified when their paid subscription is renewed.

Create a new Membership Level in Travelify and complete the information about that level (see example below for a Basic Tier level that is set up for £10 per month and is linked to a Stripe price with the same setup):

IMPORTANT : If you ever want to change the pricing on your membership levels, remember that you MUST update in both Stripe and Travelify to ensure you are linking your membership level in Travelify to the correct Price ID in Stripe!

Widget Setup: Setting up Member Registration Form widget

When you set up the Member Registration Form widget, you will see two options which are linked to the membership levels:

Membership Level Enabled : this must be enabled for the registration form to display the different levels to your customers and allow them to select the correct level they want to register with.

Voucher/Discount Code Enabled : this enables an option on the payment page for customers to enter a discount code to obtain cheaper membership - this uses Stripe discount codes and so if you want to use this, you must set up the discount codes within Stripe with the rules required to validate them. As the billing is all handled by Stripe, we validate the discount code with them and the pricing of the membership is adjusted accordingly to your rules. If you are not going to use discount codes for your membership, it is advised to disable this option so not to distract customers for registering.

Widget Setup: Setting up Member Account Manager widget

This widget normally offers the ability to customers who login to see thier account, edit basic information such as their contact details, view their orders, and when enabled, allow them to see their current membership level and also upgrade/downgrade their membership.

In the "Layout" settings tab are two options linked to the membership levels:

Manage Membership : this should be enabled if you want to allow customers to view and manage their membership level (upgrade/downgrade).

Voucher/Discount Code Enabled : this is exactly the same as above, allowing you to enable/disable Stripe discount code support for the membership level pricing.

Travelify Admin: Viewing/managing customers linked to memberships

When you go into a member CRM record, you will see the following settings:

Membership Level : this is a dropdown of your membership levels and allows you to manually assign a customer to a membership level.

Membership Subscription ID : this is the Stripe subscription identifier for their membership. You can copy this and search in your Stripe account to find their subscription.

Membership Expiry : this is the expiry date of their current membership period - this will automatically extend each time their subscription renews in your Stripe account. If their payment fails or they cancel their membership outside of our platform, then this will not be extended and their membership will be disabled on the date shown.

Reviews Collection (eg. Trustpilot and Feefo)

Mon, 01 Sep 2025 11:47:06 GMT

We support a couple of different review collection platforms .

We support a couple of different review collection platforms where your review collection can be automated once a customer places an order.

Trustpilot Automatic Feedback Service (AFS)

All Trustpilot accounts (including free) allow you to copy in their AFS service to your order confirmation emails and they will then schedule a review collection email to be sent a number of days after the email is placed to ask for a service review (you can also schedule further emails to ask for product reviews).

Head to the AFS service setup page in your Trustpilot Business account and copy the unique email address - you will need to enter this into your Travelify Application Settings > "Email Settings" > "Order Review Collection Email" (see below screenshot as an example)

2. Set up your Trustpilot Email Settings and Time and Delivery Settings to schedule when your review invites are sent out.

Feefo

You will need a paid Feefo account to gain access to their API. Go to the Travelify Supplier Directory for your application and search for Feefo Reviews. You will see the below information that you need to connect the Travelify platform to your Feefo account (Client ID, Client Secret, Merchant ID) and, like Trustpilot, we will automatically push your order data to Feefo in real time when an order is placed on your website.

We recommend setting the Feedback Date as "FeefoControlled" as their platform then controls when the invite emails are sent to your customers, however you can override this in Travelify by setting this dropdown along with the Feedback Days (eg. send 7 days after travel).

Location Lists

Mon, 01 Sep 2025 11:47:04 GMT

Custom Location Lists can be set up to add to your search boxes.

Custom location lists can be set up to add to your search boxes. This ensures that customers can only search for locations that you specify in your list(s). This tool is located under "More Tools" > "Location Lists" in your Travelify account.

You can set up seperate lists for origins and destinations and reuse them across multiple different searchboxes if requires. There is no limit to the number of location lists you can create, so you can set up different lists for different purposes (e.g. destination landing pages).

When you create a new list, there are two different types of location:

Parent Location - this is a parent that is not searchable, but contains a list of additional parents or searchable locations. You can have locations up to 3 levels deep.
Searchable Location - this is a location that a customer can select to be able to perform a search

Start by creating a new list and giving it a name (this name is for your own reference only, it is not displayed on the front end).

You can now add your first parent location and give this a name (e.g. Spain) - this will be shown on the front end to the customer in any location menus in the searchbox:

You will now see the new parent appear in the list below.

Now you will need to add child locations to that parent, so click on the 3-dotted line icon under the actions column.

You can add another parent location under this (eg. Balearic Islands) that will contain the searchable locations, or you can add searchable locations at this level, it all depends on how you want to structure your locations.

Click on Add Searchable Location and you will be presented with a new popup containing 2 fields.

Start by typing the location in the second box (Search Location) - this is an autocomplete of our geographical database. If you are unable to find the location you want to search, please open a support ticket to let us know and we can add new locations in for you. Once you click on the location from the autocomplete, it will fill in both fields for you.

The top field (Location Name/Alias) can be changed to the text you want the customer to see in your searchbox - you can either keep it as-is or change it to something else (see the example below where it has been shortened to just "Barcelona" rather than our full location details).

Save this location and carry on adding locations as you wish.

Once you have finished adding your locations to the list (you can always come back and add more at a later date - they will automatically update across all searchboxes that use them), return to the Location Lists page as you will need the List ID shown on this page to add to your searchbox(es). In the example below, you will see the List ID of 92.

Add location list to searchbox widget

To add your new location list to your searchbox, either create a new travel searchbox widget, or edit an existing one.

In the first tab of settings, you will see a "Location Settings" button (see below) - click on that to get the location settings popup.

Depending on whether you want to set an origin or destination location list will depend on what you have created - each is controlled seperately so you can use 2 different lists.

Change the Type dropdown to "Custom (list id)" as shown below and enter the List ID into the fields that now appear.

Website Analytics

Mon, 01 Sep 2025 11:47:02 GMT

Website analytics is a crucial part of running a website - it gives you important insights into your visitors.

Website analytics is a crucial part of running a website - it gives you important insights into your visitors, where they are coming from, what they are looking at, and where they are leaving your website.

There are various free website analytics tools available (eg. Google Analytics ), however they are normally over-complicated and hard to understand what you are looking at - they are normally aimed at hard-core marketing professionals.

Our recommended analytics tool is Clicky - a privacy-friendly analytics tool often preferred over Google Analytics due to its ease of use and straightforward installation. The tool is known for its real-time traffic analytics and heatmap tracking, which allows you to visualize the user’s journey on your site. Despite its early 2000s-looking website, Clicky is one of the best Google Analytics alternatives ( see comparison ) out there and offer a FREE level which is normally enough for any website owner.

Set up a FREE account

Click on the register link on Clicky and fill out your details
Register a new website - enter your website domain name (eg. www.acmetravel.com)
Add optional preferences - you can now set up some optional information such as language, timezone and more (we recommend disabling the on-site analytics option as this would allow your customers/competitors to see your analytics!)

Add tracking code to your website

On the last step above, click on the "grab tracking code" link (also available in Prefs > Tracking code menu)
Untick the "Affiliate badge" option (you don't want to show their logo on your website!)
Copy the Tracking code shown
Option 1 (if we built your website) : please send us the tracking code and we can add it into the website for you (or you can add this in Seo & Settings > Head HTML > Body end HTML)
Option 2 (if you built your own website) : add the tracking code into the HTML of your website, normally before the </body> tag

Advanced tracking and links in Travelify

We will soon be adding more functionality into the Travelify platform for analytics and so if you also provide us with the following information, we can add this for you as soon as it become available.

Click on the Prefs > Info menu
Copy the Admin Site Key (we can use this to push search data into your account so that you can see information about what your customers are searching for)
Copy the Private Link (we can then add a link in your Travelify account to be able to view your analytics without leaving Travelify)

Backoffice Providers

Mon, 01 Sep 2025 09:39:17 GMT

We connect with various backoffice providers where we can automatically push your website orders into your backoffice account.

We connect with various backoffice providers (see our website for our current list) where we can automatically push your website orders into your backoffice account.

Normally, we have to connect the order to your suppliers that are set up in your backoffice so that you can then handle supplier payments correctly.

When we push your order to your backoffice provider, the supplier linking is handled in one of two ways:

Your suppliers must be set up in advance in the backoffice account before the order wil successfully be pushed (eg. PenAir by Penguin)
We can lookup/create suppliers on the fly when an order is pushed to the backoffice (eg. eTrip Agency)

In order to match up suppliers between the systems, we use the supplier codes. You can obtain our current list of supplier codes on this link , however where the supplier is via another technology provider (eg. Traveltek, Paxport, Ypsilon or Intuitive), their list can change on occaison so we show the sub-suppliers below on our list where we can.

Account Billing Centre

Fri, 29 Aug 2025 09:46:48 GMT

We have partnered with Stripe to handle our invoicing and monthly payments for your Travelgenix account.

We have partnered with Stripe to handle our invoicing and monthly subscription payments for your Travelgenix account.

You have the option of paying your monthly subscriptions by either credit/debit card or Direct Debit.

IMPORTANT : Due to the way Stripe works, the invoice links sent via email will only contain the option of paying via credit/debit card. To switch to paying by Direct Debit, you will need to follow the instructions below.

Accessing our Billing Centre

Visit our Stripe Billing Center ( click this link to open in a new tab )
Enter your billing email address (the email address that you receive the invoices to - if you do not know this or need it updating, please contact us) in the form, you will be emailed a one-time use code to this email address to be able to sign in to your account
Once you are signed in, if you have more than one subscription in your account, select the relevant subscription that you would like to manage
You will be shown a screen similar to that below ( Please note prices may vary, this is only an example ), showing the details of your subscription - you can update your billing address using the "Update information" link and add/manage your payment method using the options show.

Setting up Direct Debit payments

Follow the instructions above and click on "Add payment method"
You will be presented with an option to select "Bacs Direct Debit" - simply complete your bank details to add this payment method to the subscription

Running Your Own Tour Operation - Set Up

Fri, 22 Aug 2025 10:33:26 GMT

This guide is exclusively for users running their own tour operation.

This guide is exclusively for users who are running their own tour operator for package holidays by dynamically packaging flights, hotels and extras.

If you are running your tour operation with Travelgenix, this article outlines the setup process and how to manage access to your services for other users of the Travelgenix platform.

You will be provided an API application by Travelgenix and this will be used to set up your suppliers, pricing rules and access to your account for other travel agents using our platform.

It is crucuial to note that the initial setup of your tour operation will need to be set up by Travelgenix a s this can cover some important rules such as:

Your tour operator logo and any summary text
Routes - for example, if you only want to allow certain origins/destinations to be searches
Flight selection - for example, you may want to only allow flights that have certain baggage included
Accommodation selection - for example, only allowing certain star ratings and, if you have Tripadvisor reviews enabled for your properties, maybe you only want to allow properties with a minimum Tripadvisor rating to be shown
Upsells products - we currently support transfers as an upsell product and any optional flight extras that are returned by the carrier

Application Settings

In your Application Settings in Travelify, you can control who receives notifications about bookings made via your tour opererator. Just go into the application settings, General tab and set the email address in the "System Notification Sent To" field. This email address will receive a full booking summary of any orders placed - who the agent (company) was, the passenger details and all the products booked.

When it comes to providing credentials to your agency/company, there are two parts - your API Key (same for all agencies) are in your application settings under the "API Keys" tab. It is made up of the Application ID and Public API Key (see below for an example), so you will need to copy these and provide to the agency, along with their company-specific reference (see Managing Access below)

Supplier Management

The core of the tour operation is what suppliers you connect to supply your flights, accommodation and any upsell products (eg. transfers). You can view and manage any of your suppliers in the "My Suppliers" and "Supplier Directory" section of Travelify.

When a search is performed for a tour operator package, then these suppliers will be searched and packaged together to create your own tour operator results.

Pricing Rules

You will need to create pricing rules in order to apply markups to your suppliers to ensure that you make money on your bookings.

These rules will be used to create the "nett" price that the agent recieves on their side (they will never see your nett prices from suppliers). They have the ability to create their own rules on top of yours to make their own commission on top of yours.

Managing Access / Agency Accounts

To provide access to an agency/company to your product, you will need to create them as a Company in your CRM. Click into your CRM in Travelify and then the " Manage Companies " button.

Any existing companies you have set up will be displayed here, or you can "Add Company" to create a new one. When setting up a new company, please ensure you enter the " Internal Reference " field as this will become their Company Code that you will need to provide them, along with your API Key from the Application Settings section above.

It is also recommended to set up additional information such as their address, email address, ABTA/IATA numbers and commission information - all of this will be included in the confirmation emails you receive when that company places a booking.

You can temporarily disable an agency from accessing your API connection without deleting them by toggling the "Is Active" button on the company.

To recap what you need to provide an agency to connect to your API account:

API Key : Application ID and Public API Key from the "Application Settings" section (eg. 100:ABC123-1234-ABCD12-ABCD123)

Company Code : Internal reference from the company setup in the CRM.

Order Manager - Managing Orders

Fri, 22 Aug 2025 10:33:24 GMT

This guide outlines the various tools available in the Order Manager to be able to perform post-booking updates

Hopefully you have read our getting started guide to your Order Manager and understand the basics on searching/finding orders, the data available within an order and the different statuses. This guide outlines the various tools available in the Order Manager to be able to perform post-booking updates.

Changing Order Status

To change the overall status on an order, you can simply select a different status from the dropdown on the top-right of the order overview panel as seen below.

This table outlines what each of the order statuses mean

Updating Customer Information

To update any of the customer information on an order, click the "Edit" button on the right of the customer panel. Please note that this will not update the CRM record for this customer, only the contact details for this order.

Updating Order Products/Items

To update any of the items in the order, click the "pencil" icon on the right of the product/item you want to edit.

We allow the following fields to be updated on an item - please note that we do not support altering the booking data:

Booking Reference - if you manually booked this with a supplier, you can enter the booking reference in this field
Supplier Price - the price that you will be billed by the supplier for this item (eg. nett cost)
Supplier Price Currency - the supplier selling currency (this may differ from the selling currency)
Selling Price - the price you sold this item to the customer - be aware that updating this field may conflict with the item data stored in the product information (eg. price breakdowns). Please note that updating this field will not alter the amount paid by the customer. Any change in price will need to be handled manually by your accounts team to either refund the difference or manually take further payment for any increase in price.
Status - similar to the overall order status above, you can update the individual item status. I MPORTANT : This just changes the status on our side, it does not cancel the booking with your suppliers.

Cancelling Products/Items

To cancel an item within an order, you need to click the "cross" icon on the right of the relevant order item. This will only appear for a confirmed item and it will open a popup for you to view cancellation policies and enter cancellation information before attempting to cancel the product with the supplier. Please note that not all suppliers support cancellations via their API, so you will be informed of this when you attempt to cancel.

The popup will ask for a cancellation reason, which may be passed to the supplier (if supported) via their API, and ask you to confirm the cancellation before proceeding. If it fails to cancel with the supplier, you will be informed of the reason as an error message and may need to contact the supplier directly to cancel the booking.

Sending Customer Order Confirmation Email

After you have updated any information, you may wish to resend the confirmation email to the customer. At the very top of the order view page is a "Send Email Confirmation" button - this opens a popup asking you what email address to send the confirmation to and will be pre-populated with the customer email address. You can send to multiples with a comma-delimited list.

Sending To Your Backoffice

If you have a backoffice provider connected in your suppliers, you can click on the "Send To Backoffice" button - this will re-send any information updated in the order to your backoffice provider. Please note: not all backoffice providers allow updates via their API, so if you have previously send the order to the backoffice, you may need to manually update it directly in your backoffice system

Order Manager

Fri, 22 Aug 2025 10:33:23 GMT

The Order Manager displays all order information for any bookings made through Travelify

The Order Manager displays all order information, for any bookings made through your Travelgenix solution. It offers you a quick and easy way to search, view and review bookings made by your customers.

Search filters

At the top of the order manager, you will see there are filters that allow you to find and view the orders you need. Filters include:

Date to search
Booking date (The date the booking was made on the website)
Travel date (The date of the first element of travel e.g. Flight departure date, or hotel check in date)
Date range (Pick a date range from the calendar)
Agent (Filter orders made by specific Agents)
Order status (Filter orders by their order status. More on that below)
Name/ Order Ref / Booking Ref (Free text search field, to find orders that include specific information)

Order Status

You will see there is a search filter called "Order Status" that allows you to filter orders by status. These include:

Basket
Processing
Confirmed
Confirmed with failure
Cancelled
Partial cancelled

Basket order

A basket order, is where a customer has searched for some products through your website, and taken to them through to the basket/payment page - but did not go any further. This means the customer is very close to making a buying decision, but for some reason, decided not to go through with the process. This is typically because they either don't have enough trust in your brand, or perhaps still think they can find a better deal somewhere else. If you're seeing lots of basket status orders but low confirmed orders, you may want to think about optimising the payment page on your website to increase the number of people that complete the transaction.

Processing order

Your online travel website is a mechanism that connects supplier products with customers, and you facilitate the transaction. If you see a processing order status, it means a customer has completed a purchase on your website, but the suppliers are yet to confirm the booking or the payment is still being processed. We recommend not touching orders classed as "Processing" as there are automated processes in place.

Confirmed order

This means a customer has completed a purchase on your website, the payment has been processed correctly, the supplier has confirmed the booking and the customer has received an order confirmation email with all the details they need.

Confirmed with failure

This means a customer has completed a purchase on your website, but for some reason, the supplier has not been able to confirm the booking. These orders need your attention. Click on the order to see which product within the booking has failed and read the error message displayed by the supplier. You will most likely need to contact the supplier directly, to resolve this situation manually.

Cancelled order

This will display orders that have been marked as cancelled (E.g. The entire order has been cancelled)

Partial cancelled orders

Customers may purchase multiple travel products at the same time, such as airport parking, flights, transfer, hotel and excursions. If the customer needs to cancel one product within a booking, but not the entire order, then the order will be classed as "Partial Cancelled". This denotes that the main order is still active, but one or more products within that live order has been cancelled. If a customer only purchases one product, it can not be classed as partial cancelled. It will either be cancelled or confirmed.

Order dashboard

The Order manager dashboard displays all your orders, in rows. The information displayed on each row includes:

Order ID (This is unique to each order)
Status (The current order status)
Agent (Which Agent, if any, generated this order)
Customer (Customer name)
Summary (Product codes of the products purchased E.g. FLT = Flight, ACC - Accommodation etc)
Total (The total amount the customer paid)
Created Date (The date the order was created)
Actions
View order (This lets you see the details of this order in more detail)

View Order

When you click on the view order icon from the main dashboard, you will be presented with a page that shows you all the data relating to this specific order. It's broken down into different sections. At the top you have the following:

Order ID (Unique to this order)
Customer language (The language the customer was viewing the booking website in)
Customer IP (The IP address of the customer. Good to know if you experience multiple fraudulent orders from the same IP address)
Booking Agent (If this booking was facilitated by a specific agent)
Order status
Order total
Created
Marketing source
Customer ID
Customer name
Customer email
Customer Tel
Customer address
Internal reference

Below that, you will see another section that gives you an overview of the products purchased as part of this order. Remember that one order can have multiple products in it (E.g. Airport parking, flight, transfer, hotel etc)

Type (The product type purchased)
Supplier (Which supplier provided this product)
Departure/Duration (Departure date and duration of product)
Added to basket (Date this product was added to the basket)
Supplier price (The price the supplier is selling this product for)
Selling price (The supplier price + any pricing rules you've added)
Booking reference (The booking reference provided by the supplier)

Below that, you will see another section that gives you an overview of the payment information. This includes:

Payment provider (Your payment provider that you use to facilitate online payments)
Payment method (The payment method used by the customer)
Amount (The amount the customer paid)
Reference (If applicable, a payment reference)
Date/Time (The date and time the payment was made)
Balance remaining (The outstanding balance value)

Below that, towards the bottom of the page, you will see an overview of the products the customer has purchased. This will be a summary of the data that the supplier has confirmed. It typically includes the supplier name, supplier price, if a pricing rule was applied, sale price, product details (E.g. flight number or hotel info), along with the names of all passengers or guests.

Good to know

More features are being added to the order manager all the time. Stay tuned to Travelgenix announcements to know when they go live, and how they can help your business.
The order manager has an impact on your internal business processes and how you react to different customer requests. It's worth taking some time to create some scenario based processes, so you know how to react to different situations, and to make sure everything is documented in the right way.

Enquiry Viewer

Fri, 22 Aug 2025 10:33:21 GMT

The Enquiry Viewer is a helpful tool that lets you recreate customer searches from within the Travelify dashboard.

The Enquiry viewer is a helpful tool, that lets you recreate customer searches from within the Travelify dashboard, without having to repeatedly input travel dates, passenger details and geographic information.

In just a few clicks, you can identify the exact search a person completed on your website and recreate it easily.

Just click Enquiry Viewer from the side menu to get started.

Enquiry Viewer Dashboard

When you click on Enquiry Viewer, you will be presented with a dashboard that lists all of the searches that people have carried out using your Travelgenix technology. The dashboard has a number of columns:

Actions
Eye Icon - View this specific enquiry
Search ID - A unique value allocated to the search
Web Reference - A unique value allocated to the search
Search Type - The type of travel products searched for
Passengers - The number of passengers included in the search criteria
Search Date - The date the search was completed
Search Box - Search for a specific web reference number
Pagination - Click through multiple pages of search data in the dashboard

How to find a specific enquiry/search

Sometimes a person visiting your travel website may need some assistance making a booking. You can ask the person if they can see a web reference number for the products they've been searching for. Take that reference number and type it into the search box

The information in the dashboard will reduce until there is an exact match for the Web reference number you have typed in. Click on the "Eye" icon which will open up this enquiry.

How to view an enquiry/search

Once you have located the enquiry you want to view, click on the "eye" icon to open it.

You will then be presented with the details for this particular search/enquiry completed by a user on your travel website.

Data about the search will be displayed, dependant on the type of products searched.

E.g.

If a hotel search was completed, you will see info such as:

Location
Board basis
Refund option
Rooms
Dates of stay
Etc

If a flight + hotel search was completed, you will see all of the above, as well as:

Number of passengers
Departure/Arrival locations
Cabin class
Etc

How to recreate an enquiry/search

Within the details for a specific enquiry, there is a helpful feature that lets you recreate the search from within the Travelify dashboard.

Simply open the enquiry you're interested in, scroll to the bottom of the page and you will see a dropdown bar:

From the dropdown, select which stage in the booking flow you would like to see information for:

Search
Availability
Basket

Then click the Visit Site button.

This will then initiate a search on the website, using the search criteria contained within the enquiry, going to the specific stage of the booking flow, as dictated by your choice in the dropdown.

Website Builder - Getting Started

Mon, 18 Aug 2025 11:31:12 GMT

Our CMS is one of the most flexible and comprehensive available.

Our CMS is one of the most flexible and comprehensive available

Below are a few articles to get you started.

Getting Started

Got a Travelgenix Website? Read me first!

Mon, 18 Aug 2025 11:27:05 GMT

We have a separate knowledge base that covers everything in more detail.

Because of the wide range of features and functionality within a Travelgenix website, we have a separate knowledge base that covers everything in more detail.

You can access the full knowledge base here.

Website Builder - Video tutorials

Mon, 18 Aug 2025 11:21:16 GMT

Take a look at our comprehensive range of video tutorials

Take a look at our comprehensive range of video tutorials.

Understanding Supplier Results via API vs Portals

Mon, 18 Aug 2025 11:01:19 GMT

This article gives you some insight into the differences when comparing supplier results via an API connection

This article hopes to give you some insight into the differences when comparing supplier results via an API connection (how we connect to your suppliers) vs the results they display on their portal, along with why you are never likely to see the same results on both.

API connections are built for speed and have been optimised in order to get the best results on screen to your customers in the fastest possible time.

Below are the most common reasons why you may not see the same results via the API connection as you do on the supplier portal/website:

Number of results & distance from search point

With a lot of API connections, we can only search by property ids and the APIs have a limit on how many properties we can search at once (eg. 250), so when you are searching all star ratings, particularly in a large area such as Dubai which has a high concentration of properties in a small area, there are limits on how many results we can get to return. Normally we take the max number we can search from the distance from the point of the search (centre point), but to try and maximise the search area, we do randomise this when searching large areas to try and get a good spread over the area, however this does mean you may not get all the properties you are expecting.

Another issue with searching by property lists is that we have no knowledge of what properties are available and so we could be performing a search for 250 properties where only 100 are available. Where supported by suppliers, we try and search by geographical location as that then ensures we get up to the maximum number of results that are actually available in the location, rather than sending in properties that we do not know are available.

Please note that we are limited by the suppliers API and what they support when searching.

Speed of results (particularly third party suppliers)

A lot of suppliers now search lots of third parties, as well as their own stock/availability. Connecting to additional third parties brings with it more results, but also slows down their API from returning results. In these cases, either the supplier will have a timeout settings or we will.

If your timeout setting is set too low (we recommend anywhere between 15 and 25 seconds to return a good set of results, depending on your suppliers) then you will not receive as many results as the supplier portal/website. Some suppliers (eg. Ratehawk) have a portal that will just keep on searching in the background until they have all results from all their third-parties, however their API has a set limit (normally 12-15 seconds) and returns what it has in that time.

Special/restricted rates

Most supplier portals/websites have rates available that they cannot sell on their API's as they are a closed user group behind a login they control. When it comes to an API, they cannot control how their product is being sold (this is normally a restriction in place by their hotel providers) and so these rates are not available on their API product when they are available on the supplier website/portal.

Some suppliers may have an agreement where you can obtain "some" of these rates by agreeing that you are selling their content to a closed user group (B2B) - however, you need to speak to your suppliers about this as they may require you to sign/agree to additional terms and you may still not be able to retrieve all of these rates via their API.

Deduping

Some suppliers (eg. Intuitive) dedupe results and return only the cheapest of each property on their API before we even get the results. You also have the ability to enable/disable deduping in your application settings depending on who is searching and, if enabled, you should only see the single cheapeast property in your results rather than all the results for a single property from all of your suppliers.

Invalid Supplier Credentials Notification

Mon, 18 Aug 2025 11:01:16 GMT

Sometimes you may receive an automated email notification that your supplier credentials are invalid, read this to get an understanding for why this may happen.

Sometimes, you may receive an automated email notification that your supplier credentials are invalid. Most of the time, this is because your credentials are no longer active (may be due to a period of inactivity on your account).

However, some times the supplier may have experienced a temporary issue while validating your credentials when a customer is trying to search on your website and we receive an error that your credentials are no longer valid.

I either case, we will automatically disable the supplier in your account and send you a notification.

To resolve, if you believe your credentials are active, then you can just test and re-activate them in Travelify. Just log into your Travelify account, go to "My Suppliers".

You can see the disabled supplier in your travelify account as they will show an exclamation mark next to them.

Click in to edit the supplier and you will see a "Test" button at the bottom of the page. When you click the Test button, we will attempt to verify the credentials and return a status to you. If the test is successful, you can just click the "Save" button to reactivate the supplier.

If you credentials are not working, please contact the supplier to rectify your account before reactivating them in Travelify, otherwise they will be deactivated again automatically.

IP Whitelisting

Mon, 18 Aug 2025 11:01:15 GMT

Some suppliers have extra security to protect your account from misuse and will require you to send them a list of our IP addresses.

Some suppliers have extra security to protect your account from misuse and will require you to send them a list of our IP addresses. This essentially gives our servers permission to access your account and you will need to ensure your supplier has enabled this before your account will work.

The list below is our current list of production IP addresses, but this may change, so if you experience any issues with your supplier connection, please ensure you check this list for changes.

20.90.225.75
20.90.232.39
20.90.233.3
20.90.234.138
20.90.234.148
20.90.234.153
51.104.28.80
77.68.5.38
86.8.58.146
88.98.9.169
145.40.155.103
20.90.234.165
20.90.234.204
20.90.235.85
20.90.235.132
20.90.235.147
20.90.235.150
20.90.235.162
20.90.235.164
20.90.235.167
20.90.235.177
20.90.235.186
20.90.236.47
20.90.236.60
20.90.236.89
20.90.236.113
20.90.236.117
20.90.236.123
20.90.236.125
20.90.236.127
20.90.236.135
20.90.236.140
20.90.236.151
20.90.236.179
20.90.236.183

The following are the IP addresses of our test/development system. It is not normally needed to whitelist these addresses unless we need to perform tests on your account or are building a new supplier integration for you.

82.28.228.192
88.98.9.169
86.8.58.146
145.40.155.103
51.143.226.77
51.143.226.88
51.143.226.111
51.143.226.123
51.143.226.138
51.143.226.169
51.104.28.70
77.68.5.38

Introduction to Travelgenix Travel Widgets

Mon, 18 Aug 2025 10:35:18 GMT

Travelgenix gives you an easy and flexible way to sell travel products on your website.

We do this with our "Travel Widgets":

By using widgets, you don't need to be locked into long term contracts with legacy travel technology providers. You're free to choose whatever website builder you want, and drop our widgets into each page.

Before you start creating your travel widgets, you must first think about your booking flow, and create the pages on your website needed to facilitate this.

Typically this requires:

Search page (Usually the "Home" page)
Results page
Extras page
Payment page

So the booking journey looks like this:

Search > Results > Extras > Basket

Once you have created these pages, you can then start building your travel widgets, which will go on each page respectively:

This creates the logical flow, that let's your end-users:

Search for travel products
View results and proceed with a booking
Select travel extras
Make a secure payment that books the products in real time

Within each travel widget you may need to input the URL's of these pages on your website, so it's advised to get these pages set up first , to ensure the widgets work correctly

Embedding travel booking widgets into your website

Mon, 18 Aug 2025 10:35:15 GMT

This introduction article outlines our 4 main widgets.

Introduction

It is recommended to read our introduction about the travel booking flow widgets and the pages you need to create to support this in this article first.

In summary, the introduction article outlines our 4 main widgets (Searchbox, Results, Availability & Extras, Payment) and the pages you need to create on your website (results, availability & payment) - if we are building your website, we will set these up for you.

Getting Your Widget Embed Code

In the sections below, we reference obtaining your own widget code for each of the widgets. To obtain your own widget embed code, just login to your Travelify portal, go to "My Widgets", select the widget you want to embed and, as per the screenshot below, each of your widgets will have a green "Add to website" button which will give you a popup containing the custom HTML code you will need to embed that widget.

Elements Script

Any page that is going to host one (or more) of our widgets needs to have a link to our elements script (it only needs to be added once per page, no matter how many widgets you have on the page). This script should be placed within your page HTML head tags, as close to the end of the head tags as possible. The elements script takes care of loading all of our widgets on the page. It does not affect the loading speed of the page due to the use of the defer attribute (read more about this here). Our latest version now includes an SRI hash for extra security (read more about this here) . We also recommend adding the two preconnect links as this can also improve performance with our widgets and the API that powers them.

<head>

...

<link rel="preconnect" href="https://static.travelify.io/" crossorigin />

<link rel="preconnect" href="https://api.travelify.io/" crossorigin />

</head>

Searchbox Widget

The first part of the customer booking journey is the searchbox widget which allows customers to search for the product(s) that they would like to book.

Once the searchbox is set up and styled as per your requirements, you can place this on one or as many pages as you require. We recommend placing this in a prominent position on your homepage to help drive bookings.

To embed the searchbox widget into your website, you will normally need a HTML module/plugin (depends on the website builder or platform you are using) and you will place this in the exact position on your page where you want the searchbox to appear. Once you have placed your HTML module/plugin on the page, you can copy your widget code into it as below (this is an example and you will need to get your own widget code by clicking on the "Add to website" button inside Travelify).

<travel-searchbox widgetid="00000" class="travelify-widget"></travel-searchbox>

Important widget setting : you must ensure that you have set the Url to your results page in the searchbox settings (under Miscellaneous). We recommend setting the relative Url to the page rather than the full domain (eg. /results) as below example.

Results Widget

The second page of the booking journey is the results page & widget . This is the page that the customer will be redirected to after performing a search using the searchbox widget.

We recomment that this is the only widget and content on the page (barring header, navigation and footer) as the results widget is design to take up the full page.

Just like the searchbox, ensure you have the elements script on the page, place a HTML module/plugin on the page and paste your results widget code into it as below (again, this is an example only and you need to obtain your own widget code from your Travelify admin).

<travel-results widgetid="00000" class="travelify-widget"></travel-results>

Important widget settings : you must ensure that you have set the Url to your availability/extras page in the widget settings (under Layout). We recommend setting the relative Url to the page rather than the full domain (eg. /availability) as below example. You can also set the Url to your homepage in the other field.

Availability & Extras Widget

The third page of the booking journey is the availability & extras page and widget . This is the page that the customer will be redirected to after selecting a result. It is responsible for not only collecting the travelling passenger/guest information, but can also be used to upsell optional extras such as flight extras (baggage, meal and seat options), transfers, car rental, insurance and various other extras that you want to upsell.

We recomment that this is the only widget and content on the page (barring header, navigation and footer) as the results widget is design to take up the full page.

Just like the results page, ensure you have the elements script on the page, place a HTML module/plugin on the page and paste your availability extras widget code into it as below (again, this is an example only and you need to obtain your own widget code from your Travelify admin).

<travel-avail-extras widgetid="00000" class="travelify-widget"></travel-avail-extras>

Important widget settings : you must ensure that you have set the Url to your basket/payment page in the widget settings (under Layout). We recommend setting the relative Url to the page rather than the full domain (eg. /basket) as below example. You can also set the Url to your results page and homepage in the other fields.

Basket/Payment Widget

The final page of the booking journey is the basket/payment page and widget . This is the page that the customer will be redirected to after entering passenger/guest information and selecting any optional extras. It is responsible for collecting the billing details and processing any payment information from the customer using your payment gateway of choice.

We recomment that this is the only widget and content on the page (barring header, navigation and footer) as the results widget is design to take up the full page.

Just like the last two pages, ensure you have the elements script on the page, place a HTML module/plugin on the page and paste your basket widget code into it as below (again, this is an example only and you need to obtain your own widget code from your Travelify admin).

<travel-basket widgetid="00000" class="travelify-widget"></travel-basket>

That completes the customer booking journey as the confirmation is displayed within the basket/payment widget. Our other widgets can normally be placed where required on your website.

What is Travelgenix?

Fri, 15 Aug 2025 11:57:54 GMT

Travelgenix provides flexible and powerful travel technology

Travelgenix provides flexible and powerful travel technology and websites, that let you compete head-to-head with the industry giants.

Get the edge for your travel business, by leveraging the Travelgenix platform to scale online bookings.

The Travelgenix team has met with considerable and repeated success during its 30 years, serving customers operating across 67 countries.

Scale online bookings for your travel business with our easy-to-configure widgets that can drop into any existing website. Get set-up for successful and secure transactions in a fraction of the time it normally takes. Our enterprise class travel software is accessible, powerful and easy-to-implement

Who is Travelgenix for?

Fri, 15 Aug 2025 11:57:38 GMT

We bring together everything that's required to a build fully featured website

We believe that all travel businesses both large and small, should be able to compete online free from the burden of legacy systems, complexity and high cost.

We bring together everything that's required to build fully featured websites for Travel Agents, Tour Operators, Wholesalers and leading organisations.

Not only that, Travelgenix's full catalogue of powerful widgets will work pretty much anywhere - so if you prefer, you can build your site on your current platform or one of over 70 we support including Wordpress, Webflow, Shopify, Duda and many more.

How does Travelgenix work?

Fri, 15 Aug 2025 11:57:23 GMT

We can help you to scale online bookings

Travelgenix helps travel business of all shapes and sizes, to scale online bookings in two main ways:

Travel technology
Travel technology + Website

Travel Technology

Using years of experience, and cutting edge development technologies, we have developed a widget based approach to selling travel online. We've built a suite of 50+ powerful and flexible website widgets, that have unparalleled customisation options and can be dropped into almost any existing website. These widgets connect to third party travel suppliers via our Travelify mid office platform, which allows you to have a fully bookable online presence in a fraction of the time it takes to scope solutions with other legacy travel enterprise companies.

Travel Technology + Website

Let us build you a powerful website, that includes all our travel technology, that is mobile responsive, that lets you compete head-to-head with the travel industry giants, for a fraction of the price and in a fraction of the time.

And all of this with just one affordable one off payment and then a low monthly fee thereafter.

Is there an API?

Fri, 15 Aug 2025 11:56:49 GMT

Drive change with our powerful API

Yes!

You can drive change and lead innovation, with our powerful, yet simple to use API. You can break the boundaries of what's possible. Move faster with a fully customisable platform that evolves as fast as you do. The API can be used in conjunction with our range of widgets or completely standalone.

How much does Travelgenix cost?

Fri, 15 Aug 2025 11:56:35 GMT

Follow the link to our Pricing guide

Get the latest information on our pricing page.

How do I get started?

Fri, 15 Aug 2025 11:56:19 GMT

Contact us to get started on your relationship with Travelgenix

If you're ready to start your journey with Travelgenix, or still have some questions you 'd like answered, visit our contact page to request a demo.

Results Widget - Changing Templates

Fri, 15 Aug 2025 11:24:22 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - Learn how to change templates for your Results pages.

Results De-duping (Flights)

Fri, 15 Aug 2025 10:16:27 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - This Guide will walk you through the steps to de-duplicate flight results from multiple suppliers.

Result De-duping (Accommodation)

Fri, 15 Aug 2025 10:09:52 GMT

VIDEO TRAINING - This Guide will walk you through the steps to de-duplicate accommodation results from multiple suppliers.

Understanding Order Processing

Mon, 11 Aug 2025 10:17:01 GMT

Want to understand how an order is processed after a customer has paid, then this article is for you.

On the front end of your website, the customer reaches the "basket" page and we request payment using your chosen payment provider. We do not attempt to place a booking until we have received payment from your customer (unless using a B2B account/credit limit), otherwise you could be stuck with a non-cancellable product without any payment.

Once payment has been made by the customer, we simply report that their booking is confirmed with you and show them their order reference from our platform. At this point, they can now leave the website should they choose.

Behind the scenes, we then attempt to confirm each of the products in their order with your suppliers. This is done in an "offline" process as it can take up to 5-10 minutes to confirm all products with suppliers.

You, as the travel company/OTA, will be sent a summary email of the customer order, with a breakdown of each item, who the supplier is, and details as to whether that item was confirmed (along with the supplier booking reference) or not (along with any errors that may be returned by the supplier as to why it may have failed). Only if all the products confirm with the suppliers, do we send the confirmation email to the customer from you.

The reason why we do not inform the customer of any supplier booking failures is that it is normally hard enough to obtain a new customer and so the last thing you want is the customer going elsewhere to book something when any errors can usually be manually rectified by your booking agents. Also, a booking can normally be complicated and made up of several elements, so telling a customer that their booking has failed when only a single element of a multi-element order has failed may also be confusing for them.

Remember, that if you have manually booked a failed element, you can always update the booking reference and status in your Travelify Order Manager and then send out the confirmation email from there.

Getting Started Guide

Fri, 08 Aug 2025 16:51:50 GMT

Now it's time to put you in the driving seat, to generate your first booking through our platform as quickly as possible.

So you've got a Travelgenix solution...

Now it's time to put you in the driving seat, to generate your first booking through our platform as quickly as possible.

The way Travelgenix customers approach this is unique to each business, but this list will serve as a helpful guide to get you started with your new platform.

Need any help? Just create a support ticket and we can help you with anything you don't understand or need assistance with.

Access the platforms

You've either purchased a travel technology package or a travel technology + website package. In both cases, you will need to obtain your credentials from Travelgenix to access Travelify , which is our mid-office system where you manage everything about your travel booking platform.

Customers that have a website included as part of their package will need to obtain their website CMS (Content Management System) credentials from Travelgenix too - see below for more information on your website CMS.

Configure application/website settings

Within Travelify, you need to configure the settings for your application , to ensure everything your customers see is consistent with your brand, such as your booking confirmation emails. This section also includes some important settings to control how your travel booking flow works, so be sure to check out the guide on this section to cover all the important aspects.

Configure your suppliers and connections to third-party platforms

Within Travelify, you can connect third party suppliers that will provide all of the travel products that you sell online, along with connections to marketing and CRM providers. Access our full list of suppliers in the Supplier Directory in your Travelify account - we also provide contact details/website links if you need to set up an account.

Set up pricing rules

Once your suppliers have been connected, you need to set up your pricing rules , to ensure you add a mark up to the product prices you're getting from the suppliers directly. You may wish to consider setting up one basic pricing rule first, to launch quickly, and then create more granular pricing rules later.

Configure deposit rules

After you have added your suppliers and configured pricing rules, you have the option to activate and configure deposit rules within Travelify. This controls if/when/how website visitors can pay a deposit or instalment payments for their purchases. This is not essential for launch, and can be set up later.

Add your team members

You may have other people that help you run your business. You will want to create roles within Travelify that are appropriate for each member of staff, so they only access the tools that they need to do their job. You can then create accounts and invite team members to log in .

Review booking journey and facilitate a test booking

If you've purchased a travel technology package, you will need to add the booking flow widgets to your website . If you've purchased a travel technology + website package, then these widgets will have been added to your website as part of the build.

You should search all product types on your website through to the payment page, to ensure everything looks and works as expected. You may need to translate the widget copy before you add the widgets to your website. You may wish to complete a test booking on a low value, refundable product, to understand the processes involved within the Order Manager when a booking is made.

Manage Your Website

If you have purchased a website from us, you will be given access to our full CMS management platform. You can access your website manager via this link (link to edit your website is also available in your Travelify account menu). Be sure you visit the website CMS help centre for articles and guides on how to manage most aspects of your website, including video tutorials to make managing your website a breeze.

Drive traffic

Speed is a core value at Travelgenix and we believe the sooner you can drive traffic to generate your first booking through our platform, the sooner you will see a return on your investment. Driving traffic and optimising your business around that is far more effective, than trying to make everything perfect before you launch.

Useful Resources & Tools

What Is Travelify?

Fri, 08 Aug 2025 16:51:49 GMT

Travelify is the Travelgenix "mid office".

You can access it here: www.travelify.io

(Travelgenix will provide you with credentials when you when you become a customer)

Travelify provides you with all the tools you need to manage your Travelgenix technology.

For customers that have purchased a travel technology + website package, your website will be managed through a different platform, which Travelgenix will give you separate credentials for.

At a high level, the Travelify platform allows you to manage the following:

Company settings (Logo, business address, 2FA etc)
Role types (Owner, admin, designer, customer support etc)
Users (Staff members)
Applications (A single Travelgenix instance e.g. One travel business)
Order manager (A database of started, pending or completed online bookings)
Customers (A CRM database for all your customers)
Enquiry viewer (A tool that allows you to initiate searches using a unique customer reference code)
Suppliers (A directory of third party product suppliers and how to activate them on your website)
Widgets (All the travel and website widget functionality provided by Travelgenix)
Pricing rules (The ability to add and manage the mark up on the products you sell)
Deposit rules (The ability to configure and manage how deposits work on your website)
Translations (The ability to translate Travelgenix widget content)
And more (Like RSS link builders. More coming soon.)

Access to Travelify

Fri, 08 Aug 2025 16:51:47 GMT

If you need to have an account created for Travelify, there are two routes to get your account set up:

New Customers/Clients

If you are a new Travelgenix customer/client and you are waiting on getting your first access to the platform, you are normally provided access once you have set up your training. This is normally so that you understand the platform and the settings.

If you haven't had your login details to Travelify, despite having your training, please contact us .

Existing Customers/Clients

If you are a new employee of an existing Travelgenix customer/client, please contact your manager or the owner who already has access to their Travelify account as they will need to add you to their company and assign you the appropriate permissions. We do not normally add you as it is down to the company manager/owner to permit access to their account.

Going Live - Full Website

Fri, 08 Aug 2025 16:51:46 GMT

Once you are ready to go live with your full website (website built by Travelgenix), you will need to ensure you follow the following process.

Once you are ready to go live with your full website (website built by travelgenix), you will need to ensure you follow the following process.

Suppliers

Please ensure that all of your suppliers are in a production state and ensure you either disable or update any that are in a development/test state.

Application Settings

Go into your application settings (click on Applications in your travelify.io admin area) > General Settings and ensure you update any of your website URL's that may be pointing to your development website to your live domain name. There may be other references to your development website URL such as email content, so ensure you also update these where relevant.

Putting Your Domain Live

This is the final stage to get your domain name pointing to your new website and visible to your customers. You will need to inform travelgenix once you are ready to put your website live as we will need to switch your development website over to your live domain name.

You must set up your DNS settings through your domain host. In order to do this, you will need admin access to the domain which you intend to use. In your domain host, you need to create two A records and a CNAME record.

Note : Some domain hosts will not allow you to set up multiple records for the @ domain. If this is the case for your domain host, then simply add one record for the @ domain and include both IP addresses.

Use the following information for the CNAME record and A records:

CNAME

Host: www

Points to: s.multiscreensite.com

A Records

Two A Records are used for server balance and redundancy.

First A Record:

Host/Alias: @

Target/Destination: 35.172.94.1

Second A Record:

Host/Alias: @

Target/Destination: 100.24.208.97

Examples

The following is an example from Google Domains, in which they use one A record with two IP addresses:

The following is an example from GoDaddy, in which they use two A records (one for each IP):

Note : Most domain hosts have instructions on creating CNAME records and A records in their help center. If you cannot find this information, you must contact your domain host. For a list of common domain hosts and their help information, see Specific Domain Host Records .

Website Cookie - Consent Banners

Fri, 08 Aug 2025 16:51:45 GMT

Here’s why having a cookie consent banner on your website is not just a nice-to-have, but essential.

Why Your Travel Website Should Have a Cookie Consent Banner

And the Travelgenix-recommended tool to make it easy

When someone visits your travel website, it’s likely that cookies are being used behind the scenes. These small files help with things like remembering preferences, tracking booking sessions, and improving the overall user experience. But they also come with a responsibility - especially if your visitors are based in the UK or Europe.

Here’s why having a cookie consent banner on your website is not just a nice-to-have, but essential.

Why Cookie Consent Matters

It’s a Legal Requirement

Under the UK GDPR and the ePrivacy Directive (sometimes called the “cookie law”), you must inform visitors if your website uses non-essential cookies—such as tracking or marketing cookies—and get their consent before they’re set. Failing to do this can lead to fines or complaints.

It Builds Trust with Visitors

People are more aware of their online privacy than ever. A clear cookie banner shows your customers you respect their data and are transparent about how it’s used.

It Can Improve Your Website’s Reputation

A professional-looking cookie banner gives your website a polished, trustworthy feel. It’s one more way to show your travel brand takes customer care seriously.

Our Recommended Tool: CookieScript

At Travelgenix, we recommend using Cookie-Script.com to handle cookie consent on your website. We’ve tested it thoroughly and found it works perfectly with our booking platform, and they even have a FREE plan available to get you started.

Why We Recommend Cookie-Script:

✅ Fully compatible with Travelgenix sites and booking widgets

✅ Easy setup with no coding knowledge needed

✅ Customisable to match your website branding

✅ Auto-blocks cookies until users give consent

✅ Supports multiple languages and geo-targeting

✅ Keeps you compliant with GDPR, UK privacy laws, and more

How to Get Started

Sign up at cookie-script.com
Follow their guided setup to create your cookie banner
Their system will auto-scan your website and suggest the cookies it finds and whether it deems them necessary or not to run functionality - please note that it won't automatically pick up the cookies from our booking platform so you will need to add some manually (see the below Adding Manual Cookies section for more information) - this part is important and must be completed, else you may find that some of the functionality on your website/our widgets will not work as intended.
Add the code snippet they give you into the header of your Travelgenix website (our support team can help if you’re not sure how)

That’s it! You’ll be protecting your visitors’ privacy - and your business - in just a few simple steps.

IMPORTANT: Adding Manual Cookies

Please note, that you must add the following manual cookies. If you skip this part, you may find that a lot of our booking and login functionality will not function as intended.

To manually add cookie settings into your Cookie-Scripe account (you will need to do this to add the Travelgenix cookies in so that your booking funcationality works correctly), first you will need to go into the Cookies tab in your settings:

Click on the Add new cookie button:

You should then see this entry field where you enter the information about the cookie you want to add to their list. You will need to add the cookies in the table below into their list (you can add others as required, depending on what third-party services you may use on your website, but they are outside of the scope of this support article).

Please ensure you add all of the following cookies into your account. The Cookie domain setting will be the domain name of your website and will be the same for all of the cookies you are adding here, so for example, if your website address is https://www.traveldemo.site/ then you will need to add www.traveldemo.site into the Cookie domain setting (don't add the https:// or any / into this field):

Important (Choice of Cookie Consent Provider)

You have a choice to use other cookie consent platforms, however we have tested the Cookie-Script platform and, using the recommended settings above, it should work seamlessly with our booking platform and websites. If you choose to use other cookie consent platforms, they should all offer the ability to set up custom cookies as above, but we are unable to assist you if you experience problems with our booking platform, especially if they implement other blocking systems.

Getting started with the B2B setup

Fri, 08 Aug 2025 16:51:44 GMT

If you have purchased the B2B option, you can now set up and manage your B2B settings and companies.

There are various steps required to ensure your B2B users can utilise your website correctly:

Application Settings - this allows you to set up and control various aspects of the B2B platform
Email Settings - control the content sent in emails to your B2B users
CRM - set up or manage B2B companies and users
Pricing Rules - set up custom pricing rules just for your B2B companies

Application Settings

Go into your application settings (Applications > Click the pencil/edit icon next to the application you want to edit) and then click on "General Settings" tab. You will need to go to the section named "General Settings - CRM".

Auto-Enable Customers: Depending on how you want your registration form to work, you may want to have to manually check and activate your users when they register. The default setting is to enable your customers when then register, meaning they can log in and book straight away (using a normal payment method, to activate credit limits, please go to the CRM section below) - if you are operating a mixed B2C and B2B website, this default setting is recommended. If you want to manually check and set up the B2B companies with access to credit limits, then change this setting to "Disable customers on register" - this means they won't be able to sign in until you activate their account (see CRM section below).

Auto-Create Companies (Good for B2B-only sites): If you are operating a B2B-only website, you can enable this setting which (as long as you have enabled the Company Name field in the registration widget), it will auto-create or link new customers to a B2B company (see CRM section below).

B2B Workflows: enabling/selecting both of the workflows is recommended as it means that if you add manual B2B companies/users later on, they will receive the workflow emails such as sending them temporary passwords to sign in.

Make sure you click the save button at the bottom of this section before moving on.

Email Settings

Go into your application settings (Applications > Click the pencil/edit icon next to the application you want to edit) and then click on "Email Settings" tab.

Email - B2B Company Link Verify Account: this email is sent when you have activated the "B2B Workflows" in the settings above. When you link a user account to a B2B company, if they have not set their own password (i.e. if you created their account in the CRM), then this email will be sent to them containing a temporary password to be able to sign in to your website. Ensure you fill in the subject, header text and body text (example below).

Email - Customer Registration Verify Account: We recommend setting the "Notify Email of New Registrations" so that you will receive a notification when a new user registers for an account. This is highly recommended if you are going to manually activate each user as without setting this email address, you will not know that a new user registers for an account.

Make sure you click the save button at the bottom of this section before moving on.

CRM

Firstly, you will need some customers - you can either add a new customer via the "Add" button, or they can register themselves via the registration form widget on your website.

Manage Companies: for customers to access B2B booking capabilities (e.g. credit limits) they need to be linked to a company.

Click on the "Manage Companies" and add your first company by completing the basic company information (most is optional and for your own reference only). One important setting is the email domains section - this allows you to add email domain(s) (one per line) to auto-link registrations to this company. Important: we recommend only using corporate domains (e.g. mytravelcompany.com) and not generic email domains that could be used by anyone (e.g. gmail.com/hotmail.com).

You will see your new company displayed in the list and have the following options:

Eye icon - view company information

Pencil icon - edit company information

User icon - view/add users linked to the company

Card icon - manage credit limits for the company

Bin icon - delete company

Company Users

Click on the user/person icon next to the company. Remember, the user will need to exist in your CRM before you can add them to a company. Just use the select/autocomplete field to find the user and then click the "Add User" button to add them into the company. Once you have finished adding users, you can click the "Back to companies list" button to return to the previous screen.

Company Credit Limits

Click on the card icon next to the company. To create a new credit limit, click the "Add" button.

Only the amount and currency are required, the other fields are for your reference only.

You can create or add multiple credit limits to a company and they will roll over into each other, in the order they are created. For example, if a user is trying to place an order that uses the the remaining balance in credit limit one, but they have a second credit limit to fulfill the rest of the order amount, then the platform will automatically span both credit limits - depleting the available credit in the first limit and then assigning the remainder amount to the second limit.

To see the orders against each credit limit, click on the graph icon next to the credit limit.

Pricing Rules

You have the ability to apply pricing rules in a number of different circumstances. In your rules setting, you will see a setting called "B2B Companies" where you can select none, one or multiples of the settings:

Searches with no B2B company: Selecting this option will mean the rule will only apply if the customer is NOT logged in (eg. B2C) or if they ARE logged in, but are not linked to a company (see section above)

Searches with ANY B2B company: Selecting this option will mean the rule will only apply if the customer IS logged in AND linked to a company in the section above. This is the easiest option to set up for B2B pricing rules as it means it will pick up any company you create in the section above.

Specific B2B company/companies: As you add companies in the section above, you will see them appear in this dropdown. You can then select individual companies to apply the rule to. If you choose this way of working, you will need to remember that when you add a new company, you will need to add them into the rules you want, which is why we recommend the "Any B2B company" option.